[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025091435A1 - Communication methods, apparatus, device, chip and storage medium - Google Patents

Communication methods, apparatus, device, chip and storage medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2025091435A1
WO2025091435A1 PCT/CN2023/129468 CN2023129468W WO2025091435A1 WO 2025091435 A1 WO2025091435 A1 WO 2025091435A1 CN 2023129468 W CN2023129468 W CN 2023129468W WO 2025091435 A1 WO2025091435 A1 WO 2025091435A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
cell
terminal device
information
indication information
network device
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/CN2023/129468
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
付喆
胡荣贻
卢前溪
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp Ltd
Original Assignee
Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp Ltd filed Critical Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp Ltd
Priority to PCT/CN2023/129468 priority Critical patent/WO2025091435A1/en
Publication of WO2025091435A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025091435A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W56/00Synchronisation arrangements

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication technology, and specifically to a communication method, apparatus, device, chip and storage medium.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method applied to a terminal device, the method comprising: obtaining a first timing advance TA between the terminal device and a first cell, the first TA being used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell; wherein the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, applied to a network device, the method comprising: sending a first media access control control unit MAC CE to a terminal device, the first MAC CE being used to indicate a reporting method of a first CSI report with a sub-reporting configuration.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, applied to a terminal device, the method comprising: receiving fifth indication information from a network device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate a first operation; or, the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation when a third condition is met; the first operation comprises at least one of the following: a source cell of the terminal device enters a network energy saving NES; the terminal device executes or starts to execute a conditional switching CHO; and the terminal device evaluates the execution conditions of the CHO.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, applied to a network device, the method comprising: sending a fifth indication information to a terminal device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate a first operation; or, the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation when a third condition is met; the first operation comprises at least one of the following: a source cell of the terminal device enters a network energy saving NES; the terminal device executes a conditional switching CHO; the terminal device starts to execute CHO; and the terminal device evaluates the execution conditions of CHO.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which includes: a first acquisition unit, configured to acquire a first timing advance TA between the device and a first cell, the first TA being used for the device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell; wherein the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, the device comprising: a first sending unit, configured to send a first signal to a terminal device;
  • the fourth indication information is prepared to be sent, the fourth indication information includes a first timing advance TA between the terminal device and the first cell, and/or a second TA between the terminal device and the second cell, the second cell is a cell used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell; the second TA is used to determine the first TA, and the first TA is used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell; wherein the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which includes: a first receiving unit, configured to receive a reference signal of a second cell or a downlink data signal of a first cell, the reference signal or the downlink data signal is used for the device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell; wherein the second cell is a cell used for the device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell, and the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which includes: a second sending unit, configured to send a reference signal of a second cell or a downlink data signal of a first cell to a terminal device, the reference signal or the downlink data signal is used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell; wherein the second cell is a cell used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell, and the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which includes: a second receiving unit, configured to receive a first media access control control unit MAC CE from a network device, the first MAC CE being used to indicate a reporting method of a first SCI report with a sub-configuration.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which includes: a third sending unit, configured to send a first media access control control unit MAC CE to a terminal device, the first MAC CE being used to indicate a reporting method of a first SCI report with a sub-configuration.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which includes: a third receiving unit, configured to receive fifth indication information from a network device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate a first operation; or, the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation when a first condition is met; the first operation includes at least one of the following: a source cell of the device enters a network energy saving NES; the device executes or starts to execute a conditional switching CHO; and the device evaluates the execution conditions of CHO.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, comprising: a fourth sending unit, configured to send fifth indication information to a terminal device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate a first operation; or, the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation when a first condition is met; the first operation includes at least one of the following: a source cell of the terminal device enters the network energy saving NES; the terminal device executes or starts to execute conditional switching CHO; and the terminal device evaluates the execution conditions of CHO.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which includes a memory and a processor; wherein the memory is used to store computer-executable instructions; the processor is connected to the memory, and is used to implement the method described in any one of the first to eighth aspects by executing the computer-executable instructions.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, which includes: a processor, configured to call and run a computer program from a memory, so that a device equipped with the chip executes the method described in any one of the first to eighth aspects.
  • a communication method, apparatus, chip, device and storage medium provided in the embodiments of the present application clarify how to synchronize or time a terminal device with a secondary cell without SSB transmission.
  • FIG1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG2 is a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG3 is a second flow chart of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG4 is a third flow chart of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG5 is a fourth flow chart of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG6 is a first structural diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG7 is a second structural diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG8 is a third structural diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG9 is a fourth structural diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG10 is a fifth structural diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG11 is a sixth structural diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG12 is a schematic diagram of a structure of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG13 is a schematic diagram of a structure of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG14 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG15 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG16 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 100 may include a terminal device 110 and a network device 120.
  • the network device 120 may communicate with the terminal device 110 via an air interface.
  • the terminal device 110 and the network device 120 support multi-service transmission.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • TDD LTE Time Division Duplex
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • NB-IoT Narrow Band Internet of Things
  • eMTC enhanced Machine-Type Communications
  • 5G communication system also known as New Radio (NR) communication system
  • B5G communication system 6G communication system
  • future communication system such as: Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, LTE Time Division Duplex (TDD), Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS), Internet of Things (IoT) system, Narrow Band Internet of Things (NB-IoT) system, enhanced Machine-Type Communications (eMTC) system, 5G communication system (also known as New Radio (NR) communication system), B5G communication system, 6G communication system, or future communication system.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • NB-IoT Narrow Band Internet of Things
  • eMTC enhanced Machine-Type Communications
  • the network device 120 may be an access network device that communicates with the terminal device 110.
  • the access network device may provide communication coverage for a specific geographical area, and may communicate with the terminal device 110 (eg, UE) located in the coverage area.
  • the network device 120 can be an evolved base station (Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB) in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, or a Next Generation Radio Access Network (NG RAN) device, or a base station (gNB) in an NR system, or a wireless controller in a Cloud Radio Access Network (CRAN), or the network device 120 can be a relay station, an access point, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device, a hub, a switch, a bridge, a router, or a network device in a future evolved Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN), etc.
  • Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system
  • NG RAN Next Generation Radio Access Network
  • gNB base station
  • CRAN Cloud Radio Access Network
  • PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
  • the terminal device 110 may be any terminal device, including but not limited to a terminal device connected to the network device 120 or other terminal devices by wire or wireless connection.
  • the terminal device 110 may refer to an access terminal, a user equipment (UE), a user unit, a user station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, a terminal, a wireless communication device, a user agent, or a user device.
  • UE user equipment
  • the access terminal may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, an IoT device, a satellite handheld terminal, a Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), a handheld device with wireless communication function, a computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, a terminal device in a 5G network, or a terminal device in a future evolution network, etc.
  • SIP Session Initiation Protocol
  • IoT IoT device
  • satellite handheld terminal a Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • the terminal device 110 can be used for device to device (Device to Device, D2D) communication.
  • D2D Device to Device
  • the wireless communication system 100 may further include a core network device 130 for communicating with the network device 120.
  • the core network device 130 may be a 5G core network (5G Core, 5GC) device, such as an access and mobility management function (Access and Mobility Management Function, AMF), and another example, an authentication server function (Authentication Server Function, AUSF), and another example, a user plane function (User Plane Function, UPF), and another example, a session management function (Session Management Function, SMF).
  • 5G Core, 5GC 5G Core, 5GC
  • AMF Access and Mobility Management Function
  • AUSF Authentication Server Function
  • UPF User Plane Function
  • SMF Session Management Function
  • the core network device 130 may also be an evolved packet core (Evolved Packet Core, EPC) device of the LTE network, such as a session management function + core network data gateway (Session Management Function+Core Packet Gateway, SMF+PGW-C) device.
  • EPC evolved Packet Core
  • SMF+PGW-C Session Management Function+Core Packet Gateway
  • SMF+PGW-C Session Management Function+Core Packet Gateway
  • SMF+PGW-C Session Management Function+Core Packet Gateway
  • SMF+PGW-C Session Management Function+Core Packet Gateway
  • SMF+PGW-C Session Management Function+Core Packet Gateway
  • the various functional units in the communication system 100 can also establish connections and achieve communication through the next generation network (NG) interface.
  • NG next generation network
  • the terminal device establishes an air interface connection with the access network device through the NR interface for transmitting user plane data and control plane signaling; the terminal device can establish a control plane signaling connection with the AMF through the NG interface 1 (referred to as N1); the access network device, such as the next generation wireless access base station (gNB), can establish a user plane data connection with the UPF through the NG interface 3 (referred to as N3); the access network device can establish a control plane signaling connection with the AMF through the NG interface 1 (referred to as N1); the access network device, such as the next generation wireless access base station (gNB), can establish a user plane data connection with the UPF through the NG interface 3 (referred to as N3); Interface 2 (N2 for short) establishes a control plane signaling connection with AMF; UPF can establish a control plane signaling connection with SMF through NG interface 4 (N4 for short); UPF can exchange user plane data with the data network through NG interface 6 (N6 for short); AMF can establish a
  • FIG1 exemplarily shows a network device, a core network device and two terminal devices.
  • the wireless communication system 100 may include multiple network devices and each network device may include other number of terminal devices within its coverage area, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 1 is only an example of the system to which the present application is applicable.
  • the method shown in the embodiment of the present application can also be applied to other systems.
  • system and “network” are often used interchangeably in this article.
  • the term “and/or” in this article is only a description of the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships.
  • a and/or B can represent: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone.
  • the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or” relationship.
  • the "indication" mentioned in the embodiment of the present application can be a direct indication, an indirect indication, or an indication of an association relationship.
  • a indicates B which can mean that A directly indicates B, for example, B can be obtained through A; it can also mean that A indirectly indicates B, for example, A indicates C, B can be obtained through C; it can also mean that A and B have an association relationship.
  • the "correspondence” mentioned in the embodiment of the present application can mean that there is a direct or indirect correspondence relationship between the two, or it can mean that there is an association relationship between the two, or it can mean that there is an indication and being indicated, configuration and being configured, etc.
  • predefined or “predefined rules” mentioned in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information in devices (for example, including terminal devices and network devices), and the present application does not limit its specific implementation method.
  • predefined may refer to the definition in the protocol.
  • protocol may refer to a standard protocol in the field of communications, such as LTE protocols, NR protocols, and related protocols used in future communication systems, and the present application does not limit this.
  • 5G 3rd Generation Partnership Project
  • eMBB enhanced mobile broadband
  • URLLC ultra-reliable low-latency communications
  • mMTC massive machine-type communications
  • eMBB still aims at enabling users to obtain multimedia content, services and data, and its demand is growing rapidly.
  • eMBB since eMBB may be deployed in different scenarios, such as indoors, in urban areas, and in rural areas, its capabilities and requirements vary greatly, so it cannot be generalized and must be analyzed in detail in combination with specific deployment scenarios.
  • Typical applications of URLLC include: industrial automation, power automation, remote medical operations (surgery), traffic safety assurance, etc.
  • Typical features of mMTC include: high connection density, small data volume, latency-insensitive services, low cost of modules and long service life, etc.
  • NR can be deployed independently.
  • a new RRC state is defined, namely the RRC inactive (RRC_INACTIVE) state. This state is different from the RRC idle (RRC_IDLE) state and the RRC active (RRC_ACTIVE) state.
  • RRC_INACTIVE the RRC inactive
  • RRC_IDLE the RRC idle
  • RRC_ACTIVE the RRC active
  • RRC_IDLE state Mobility is based on UE cell selection and reselection, paging is initiated by the core network (CN), and the paging area is configured by the CN. There is no UE access stratum (AS) context on the base station side, and there is no RRC connection.
  • AS UE access stratum
  • RRC_CONNECTED state There is an RRC connection, and the base station and the UE have a UE AS context.
  • the network knows the location of the UE at the specific cell level.
  • the mobility is controlled by the network.
  • Unicast data can be transmitted between the UE and the base station.
  • Mobility is based on UE cell selection and reselection, there is a connection between CN-NR, the UE AS context exists on a base station, paging is triggered by the Radio Access Network (RAN), and the RAN-based paging area is managed by the RAN.
  • the network side knows the UE's location based on the RAN paging area level.
  • Power consumption has become an important part of operators' operating costs. According to reports, the energy cost of mobile networks accounts for about 23% of operators' total costs. Most of the energy consumption comes from the radio access network, especially the active antenna unit (AAU), while data centers and fiber optic transmission account for only a small share. Power consumption includes two types:
  • Dynamic part such as consumption during data transmission/reception
  • Static part such as the consumption to maintain the operation of necessary wireless access equipment, even when there is no continuous data transmission/reception.
  • the study should not only evaluate the potential network energy consumption benefits, but also evaluate and balance the impact on network and user performance. For example, the study should not have a particularly large impact on some key performance indicators (KPIs), such as: spectrum efficiency, capacity, user perceived throughput (User Packet Throughput, UPT), latency, UE power consumption, complexity, handover performance, call drop rate, initial access performance, etc.
  • KPIs key performance indicators
  • SCell can be a cell that does not send SSB.
  • This cell and special cell (SpCell) or other SCell are intra-band cells.
  • SpCell special cell
  • the UE synchronizes with it, and currently synchronizes with SpCell or other SCell.
  • the SSB-less SCell is an inter-band cell with the primary cell (PCell) or other SCells.
  • PCell primary cell
  • Scenario 1 SCell has no SSB transmission but has Tracking Reference Signal (TRS) transmission.
  • TRS Tracking Reference Signal
  • Scenario 2a SCell has no SSB transmission and no other downlink (DL) transmission, but has uplink (UL) reception on the network (NW) side.
  • Scenario 2 SCell has no SSB transmission and no TRS transmission.
  • Scenario 1 is supported in R18.
  • Scenario 2a is not supported in R18 but may be supported in R19.
  • R4 has the following conclusions on how to perform DL synchronization. However, there is no conclusion for Scenario 2a.
  • the conclusions for Scenario 1 include:
  • RAN4 agreed to introduce an indication from the NW to the UE to indicate which cell is the reference cell. If no indication is provided, RAN4 defines "by default cell" as the reference cell. Reference cell means that it is the timing reference and Automatic Gain Control (AGC) source for the SSB-less SCell. If the reference cell is a SCell or a Primary Secondary Cell (PSCell), it should be the activated SCell or the activated PSCell. RAN4 also reached an agreement on SSB-less SCell.
  • AGC Automatic Gain Control
  • the cell is considered to be an SSB-less SCell.
  • an SSB-less cell can be used as an Scell or as an independently working cell. So when an SSB-less cell is an SSB-less SCell, how the terminal device works with the SSB-less SCell, such as synchronization, is a problem that needs to be solved urgently.
  • the present application provides a communication method, in which a terminal device can obtain a timing advance (TA) with a first cell, and then the first TA can be used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell.
  • the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission (ie, SSB-less SCell).
  • TA may also be replaced by “TA advance” or “UL timing synchronization”.
  • Performing uplink synchronization may also be replaced by “performing timing advance” or “performing UL timing”.
  • first TA between the terminal device and the first cell can also be referred to as the "TA of the first cell”
  • the "second TA between the terminal device and the second cell” mentioned in the embodiment of the present application can also be referred to as the "TA of the second cell”.
  • FIG. 2 shows a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application, which may include:
  • the terminal device obtains a first TA between the terminal device and a first cell, where the first TA is used for the terminal device to perform UL synchronization with the first cell; wherein the first cell is a secondary cell without SSB transmission.
  • the terminal device may acquire a first TA with the first cell, and then may perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the first TA.
  • the first TA may be included in the first indication information from the network device, wherein the first indication information is a response to the first request information, and the first request information is used to request the first TA, or in other words, the first request information is request information sent by the terminal device to the network device to request the first TA.
  • the first indication information may be, for example, any one of the following: a random access response (Random Access Response, RAR); a timing advance command (TAC) media access control element (MAC Control Element, MAC CE); and a DL message carrying the first TA.
  • RAR Random Access Response
  • TAC timing advance command
  • MAC Control Element MAC Control Element
  • DL message carrying the first TA may be, for example, a DL message other than RAR and TAC MAC CE.
  • the first request information may be, for example, any one of the following: a scheduling request (Scheduling Request, SR) (or a dedicated SR); uplink control information (Uplink Control Information, UCI) (or a dedicated UCI); UL MAC CE (which may be carried by PUSCH); UL Radio Resource Control (RRC) message (may be carried by PUSCH); UL resources of the first cell; and UL resources of the second cell.
  • SR scheduling request
  • UCI Uplink Control Information
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • the UL resources may refer to PUSCH at a specific time-frequency position, for example.
  • the second cell is a cell for the terminal device to perform UL synchronization with the first cell.
  • the second cell is a cell for the terminal device to perform UL synchronization with the first cell, or it can also be understood that the TA of the second cell can be used to determine the TA of the first cell (that is, the second TA can be used to determine the first TA), or it can also be understood that the second cell is a cell with the same or similar TA as the first cell (that is, the second TA is the same or similar to the first TA).
  • the terminal device can request the network device to send the first TA by sending a first request message to the network device.
  • the network device can carry the first TA in the first indication message and send it to the terminal device based on the first request message from the terminal device.
  • the first indication information may also carry a second TA, and the second TA may be used to determine the first TA.
  • the terminal device may perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the first TA carried in the first indication information, or may determine the first TA based on the second TA carried in the first indication information, and then perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the determined first TA.
  • the first indication information may carry the second TA instead of the first TA. That is, after receiving the first request information for requesting the first TA from the terminal device, the network device may carry the second TA in the first indication information and send it to the terminal device. In this case, the terminal device may determine the first TA based on the second TA carried in the first indication information, and then perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the determined first TA.
  • the first TA is obtained through a random access (RA) process (for example, recorded as a first RA process); wherein the first RA process is executed by the terminal device on the first cell or the second cell.
  • RA random access
  • the method may also include: the terminal device obtains configuration information of a first reference signal, the first reference signal is a reference signal of the first cell or a reference signal of the second cell, and the first reference signal is used to execute the first RA process.
  • the network device may send configuration information of the first reference signal to the terminal device, and accordingly, the terminal device may receive the configuration information of the first reference signal from the network device.
  • the terminal device may read the configuration information of the first reference signal from the first cell or the second cell. For example, the terminal device may read the configuration information of the reference signal of the first cell from the first cell; for another example, the terminal device may read the configuration information of the reference signal of the second cell from the second cell.
  • the network device may send at least part of the configuration information of the first reference signal to the terminal device, in which case the terminal device may read the remaining at least part of the configuration information of the first reference signal from the first cell or the second cell.
  • the terminal device may obtain the configuration information of the first reference signal, and then the terminal device may perform the first RA process on the first cell or the second cell based on the first reference signal configured by the configuration information. For example, after obtaining the configuration information of the first reference signal, the terminal device may determine the preamble and/or RO corresponding to the first reference signal, and then perform the first RA process based on the determined preamble and/or RO.
  • the terminal device can obtain the first TA.
  • the network device can carry the first TA in the RAR and send it to the terminal device.
  • the network device can also carry the second TA in the RAR and send it to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the first TA carried therein, or can determine the first TA based on the second TA carried therein, and then perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the determined first TA.
  • the RAR can carry the second TA but not the first TA. In this way, after receiving the RAR, the terminal device can determine the first TA based on the second TA carried therein, and then perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the determined first TA.
  • the type of reference signal used to perform the first RA process is indicated by the network device. That is, the type of the first reference signal used by the terminal device when performing the first RA process is indicated by the network device.
  • the network device may indicate to the terminal device which reference signal (s) to use to perform the first RA process.
  • the network device may indicate to the terminal device whether to use SSB, TRS or CSI-RS to perform the first RA process.
  • the first TA is determined based on the UL data signal of the first cell. That is, the terminal device may acquire the first TA based on the UL data signal of the first cell, and then perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the first TA.
  • the first TA is equal to the second TA, that is, the second cell has the same TA as the first cell.
  • the terminal sets The terminal device may use the second TA as the first TA, that is, the terminal device may perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the second TA.
  • the second cell has a similar TA to the first cell.
  • the second TA may be included in the second indication information from the network device, wherein the second indication information is a response to the second request information, and the second request information is used to request the second TA, or in other words, the second request information is request information sent by the terminal device to the network device to request the second TA.
  • the second indication information may be, for example, any one of the following: RAR; TAC MAC CE; and, a DL message carrying the second TA.
  • the DL message carrying the second TA may be, for example, a DL message other than RAR and TAC MAC CE.
  • the second request information may be any one of the following: SR (or dedicated SR); UCI (or dedicated UCI); UL MAC CE (may be carried by PUSCH); UL RRC message (may be carried by PUSCH); UL resources of the first cell; and UL resources of the second cell.
  • UL resources may refer to PUSCH at a specific time-frequency position, for example.
  • the terminal device can request the network device to send a second TA by sending a second request message to the network device.
  • the network device can carry the second TA in the first indication message and send it to the terminal device based on the second request message from the terminal device.
  • the second indication information may also carry the first TA.
  • the terminal device may perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the first TA carried in the second indication information, or may determine the first TA based on the second TA carried in the second indication information, and then perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the determined first TA.
  • the second indication information may carry the first TA but not the second TA. That is, after receiving the second request information for requesting the second TA from the terminal device, the network device may carry the first TA in the first indication information and send it to the terminal device. In this case, the terminal device may perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the first TA carried in the second indication information.
  • the second TA is obtained through a random access process (for example, recorded as a second RA process); wherein the second RA process is executed by the terminal device on the first cell or the second cell.
  • a random access process for example, recorded as a second RA process
  • the method may further include: the terminal device obtains configuration information of a first reference signal, the first reference signal is a reference signal of the first cell or a reference signal of the second cell, and the first reference signal is used to execute the second RA process.
  • the way in which the terminal device obtains the configuration information of the first reference signal, the type of the reference signal of the first cell, and the type of the reference signal of the second cell can refer to the aforementioned description of the first RA process, which will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device may obtain the configuration information of the first reference signal, and then the terminal device may perform the second RA process on the first cell or the second cell based on the first reference signal configured by the configuration information. For example, after obtaining the configuration information of the first reference signal, the terminal device may determine the preamble and/or RO corresponding to the first reference signal, and then perform the second RA process based on the determined preamble and/or RO.
  • the terminal device can obtain the second TA.
  • the network device can carry the second TA in the RAR and send it to the terminal device.
  • the network device can also carry the first TA in the RAR and send it to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the first TA carried therein, or can determine the first TA based on the second TA carried therein, and then perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the determined first TA.
  • the RAR can carry the first TA but not the second TA. In this way, after receiving the RAR, the terminal device can perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the first TA carried therein.
  • the type of reference signal used to perform the second RA process is indicated by the network device. That is, the type of the first reference signal used by the terminal device when performing the second RA process is indicated by the network device.
  • the network device may indicate to the terminal device which reference signal (s) to use to perform the second RA process.
  • the network device may indicate to the terminal device whether to use SSB, TRS or CSI-RS to perform the second RA process.
  • the network device may carry the first TA and/or the second TA in the fourth indication information and send it to the terminal device, wherein the second TA is used to determine the first TA, and the first TA is used for the terminal device to perform UL synchronization with the first cell.
  • the fourth indication information is the above-mentioned first indication information or the second indication information.
  • the fourth indication information is a response to the third request information
  • the third request information is used to request the first TA and/or the second TA, or in other words, the third request information is request information sent by the terminal device to the network device to request the first TA and/or the second TA.
  • the fourth indication information may be any one of the following: RAR; TAC MAC CE; and a DL message carrying the first TA and/or the second TA.
  • the DL message carrying the first TA and/or the second TA may be, for example, a DL message other than RAR and TAC MAC CE.
  • the third request information may be any one of the following: SR (or dedicated SR); UCI (or dedicated UCI); UL MAC CE (may be carried by PUSCH); UL RRC message (may be carried by PUSCH); UL resources of the first cell; and UL resources of the second cell.
  • UL resources may refer to PUSCH at a specific time-frequency position, for example.
  • the fourth indication information is a RAR sent by the network device to the terminal device during the RA process.
  • the RA process may be, for example, the first RA process or the second RA process. That is, the fourth indication information may be a RAR sent by the network device to the terminal device during the first RA process; or, the fourth indication information may be a RAR sent by the network device to the terminal device during the second RA process.
  • the second cell in this embodiment is introduced below.
  • the second cell is indicated by the network device; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the terminal device; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the network device; or, the second cell is predefined (such as predefined by a protocol); or, the second cell is determined/selected by the terminal device.
  • which cell is used for the terminal device to perform UL synchronization with the first cell or, which cell's TA can be used to determine the TA of the first cell, or, which cell has the same or similar TA as the first cell
  • the method for determining the second cell is clarified, that is, it is clarified which cell can be used for the terminal device to perform UL synchronization with the first cell.
  • the second cell is determined/selected based on the first information.
  • the second cell is determined/selected by the terminal device based on the first information sent by the network device.
  • the first information may, for example, include at least one of the following: location information of the network device; location information of an adjacent network device of the network device (i.e., a network device adjacent to the network device); location information of a third cell included in the network device, the third cell being the cell where the terminal device is located; location information of a cell adjacent to the third cell; co-located information between each network device; co-located information between each cell; quasi co-location (QCL) information between reference signals; QCL information between channels; and positioning information.
  • location information of the network device i.e., a network device adjacent to the network device
  • location information of a third cell included in the network device the third cell being the cell where the terminal device is located
  • location information of a cell adjacent to the third cell co-located information between each network device; co-located information between each cell;
  • the first information may, for example, include at least one of the following: location information of this base station (i.e., location information of the network device); location information of neighboring base stations (i.e., location information of neighboring network devices of the network device); location information of the cell where the terminal device is located/this cell (i.e., location information of the third cell included in the network device); location information of neighboring cells (i.e., location information of cells adjacent to the third cell); information on which base stations are co-located base stations (i.e., co-location information between various network devices); information on which cells are co-located cells (i.e., co-location information between various cells); QCL information between reference signals; QCL information between channels; and positioning information.
  • location information of this base station i.e., location information of the network device
  • location information of neighboring base stations i.e., location information of neighboring network devices of the network device
  • location information of the cell where the terminal device is located/this cell i.e., location information of the
  • the second cell may be any of the following cells: PCell; PSCell; PCell or PSCell in the same cell group as the first cell; any cell in the same cell group as the first cell; the cell with the smallest cell index in the same cell group as the first cell; the cell with the largest cell index in the same cell group as the first cell; any cell in the same TA group as the first cell; the cell with the smallest cell index in the same TA group as the first cell; the cell with the largest cell index in the same TA group as the first cell.
  • the second cell is indicated by the network device through third indication information.
  • the network device may send the third indication information to the terminal device, and accordingly, the terminal device may receive the third indication information from the network device, so that the terminal device may know, based on the third indication information, that the second cell is the cell for the terminal device to perform UL synchronization with the first cell.
  • the third indication information may include, for example, the frequency and/or cell identifier of the second cell.
  • the frequency may be a frequency index (index), such as an index of an adjacent frequency in SIB3/4/5, or a frequency index of SIB2 (frequency index of the serving cell).
  • the frequency may be a frequency value (ARFCN-ValueNR), or the frequency may be a frequency value corresponding to SIB2 (frequency value of the serving cell).
  • the cell identifier may be, for example, a physical cell identifier (Physical Cell Identity, PCI) or a global cell identifier.
  • the frequency value may be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, or other IEs.
  • the frequency when the frequency value may be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, the frequency may be the frequency of the current serving cell, or the frequency of a reference cell or a cell for obtaining downlink timing (such as when an SSB-less SCell obtains downlink timing from another cell, the frequency of another cell or the SSB of the cell is given).
  • the third indication information is configured under the first condition.
  • the first condition may, for example, include at least one of the following: the condition of SCellAdd; the condition of SCellAddMod; the condition of SCellOnly; and the condition of SCelladdOnly. That is, the third indication information may be configured under at least one of the conditions of SCellAdd, SCellAddMod, SCellOnly, and SCelladdOnly.
  • the third indication information may be configured under the condition of SCellAdd, or, may be configured under the condition of SCellAddMod, or, may be configured under the condition of SCellOnly, or, may be configured under the condition of SCelladdOnly.
  • Table 1 For a description of the above conditions, see Table 1 below.
  • the terminal device may perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the second cell indicated by the third indication information; if the third indication information does not appear, In other words, if the network device does not send the third indication information to the terminal device, the terminal device may use the default cell as the second cell, and perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the default cell; or, the terminal device may autonomously determine/select a cell as the second cell, and perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the determined/selected cell.
  • the first cell and the second cell belong to the same TA group and/or cell group. Since the TAs of the cells belonging to the same TA group are the same and there is an association relationship between the TAs of the cells belonging to the same cell group, when the first cell and the second cell belong to the same TA group and/or cell group, the second TA can be used to determine the first TA.
  • the TA group and/or cell group is determined by the network device based on the second information.
  • the second information may include at least one of the following: measurement results of reference signals; positioning information (such as location information of the terminal device, and/or location information of network devices adjacent to the terminal device); movement trajectory information of the terminal device; location information of the network device; location information of adjacent network devices of the network device; location information of a third cell included in the network device, the third cell being the cell where the terminal device is located; location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; and, co-site information between various cells.
  • positioning information such as location information of the terminal device, and/or location information of network devices adjacent to the terminal device
  • movement trajectory information of the terminal device location information of the network device; location information of adjacent network devices of the network device; location information of a third cell included in the network device, the third cell being the cell where the terminal device is located; location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; and, co-site information between
  • At least one of the measurement result of the reference signal, the positioning information, and the movement trajectory information of the terminal device may be, for example, sent by the terminal device to the network device. That is, the terminal device may send at least one of the measurement result of the reference signal, the positioning information, and the movement trajectory information of the terminal device to the network device, so that the network device can determine the TA group and/or cell group.
  • the second cell is activated by the terminal device by instructing the network device to activate the second cell; or, the second cell is activated by the terminal device under the second condition.
  • the second cell is activated by the terminal device by instructing the network device.
  • the network device may instruct the terminal device to activate the second cell through RRC configuration.
  • the network device may set the scellState in the RRC configuration (such as in SCellConfig) to activated to indicate the activation of the second cell.
  • the network device may instruct the terminal device to activate the second cell through MAC CE (such as SCell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE, enhanced Sell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE, or new SCell activation/deactivation MAC CE).
  • Another possible situation is that the second cell is activated by the terminal device under the second condition.
  • the second condition may include at least one of the following: the deactivation timer of the second cell times out; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be started; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be restarted; the terminal device obtains indication information for indicating the second cell; the terminal device obtains the reference signal of the second cell; the terminal device performs uplink synchronization or downlink synchronization with the first cell; the terminal device obtains the configuration of the first cell; the first cell is activated; and, the first cell needs to be activated.
  • the terminal device performs UL synchronization with the first cell (SSB-less Scell).
  • schemes 2A to 2C may be for example directed to the aforementioned scenario 2a.
  • the network may configure the SSB-less SCell (an example of the first cell) and the specific cell (an example of the second cell) to belong to the same cell group and/or TA group.
  • the specific cell is a cell for the UE to perform uplink synchronization with the SSB-less SCell, or the specific cell may also be understood as a cell having the same/similar TA as the SSB-less SCell.
  • the TA between the UE and the specific cell (corresponding to the second TA in the aforementioned embodiment) may be used to determine the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell (corresponding to the first TA in the aforementioned embodiment).
  • the specific cell may be, for example, a reference cell, or the specific cell may also be replaced by a reference cell.
  • the UE may consider that the UL timing synchronization (or TA) between the UE and the specific cell and the UL timing synchronization (or TA) between the UE and the SSB-less SCell are the same/similar. In this case, the UE may determine the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell based on the TA between the UE and the specific cell, and then perform UL synchronization with the SSB-less SCell.
  • the UE may report at least one of the following information to the network for the network to configure a cell group or a TA group of cells: reference signal measurement results, positioning information (such as the location of the UE and/or the location of the base station adjacent to the UE), and UE motion trajectory information.
  • which cell is the specific cell, or which cell does the SSB-less SCell belong to in the same cell group and/or TA group as the SSB-less SCell, or which cell's TA can the UE use to determine the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell can be indicated to the UE by the network or determined in any of the following ways: preconfigured to the UE; determined/selected by the UE itself; predefined (such as predefined by the protocol).
  • the specific cell can be any of the following cells: a PCell in the same cell group as the SSB-less SCell, a PSCell, a cell with the smallest cell index, and a cell with the largest cell index.
  • the network may indicate auxiliary information (corresponding to the first information in the aforementioned embodiment) to the UE for the UE to determine/select a specific cell, or in other words, for the UE to determine a cell having the same/similar TA as the SSB-less SCell.
  • auxiliary information corresponding to the first information in the aforementioned embodiment
  • the auxiliary information may include at least one of the following: location information of the base station (the network/network device), neighboring base stations (neighboring networks/network devices of the network/network device), network equipment); location information of this area (the cell where the UE is located); location information of neighboring cells (the adjacent cells of the cell where the UE is located); information on which base stations are co-located with this base station (or co-located information between base stations); information on which cells are co-located cells; information on which base stations are co-located base stations; QCL information between reference signals; QCL information between channels; and positioning information.
  • the UE may autonomously determine/select a specific cell based on some preset criteria, or in other words, autonomously determine/select a cell having the same/similar TA as the SSB-less SCell.
  • the UE may determine/select a specific cell based on at least one of the following information: cell identification, UE location information, network location information (for example, may include cell coverage information, quasi-co-location (QCL information), positioning information, co-site information, and co-located information.
  • the UE may determine/select a specific cell by judging a threshold value.
  • the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell is equal to the TA between the UE and the specific cell, that is, the specific cell and the SSB-less SCell have the same TA.
  • the TA between the UE and the specific cell may be used as the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell.
  • the UE may use the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell to determine the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell, and then perform UL synchronization with the SSB-less SCell based on the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell.
  • the UE may request to activate the specific cell if the specific cell has not been activated.
  • the UL resources may be resources on the SSB-less SCell or resources on a specific cell.
  • the UL request message may be, for example, any one of the following: SR (or dedicated SR); specific UL MAC CE carried on PUSCH; specific RRC signaling carried on PUSCH; UCI (or dedicated UCI).
  • the network may determine the TA between the UE and the SSB-less cell and/or the TA between the UE and the specific cell based on the first request information, and then send the first indication information to the UE to indicate the TA information (including the TA between the UE and the SSB-less cell and/or the TA between the UE and the specific cell) to the UE, and then the UE may perform UL synchronization with the SSB-less SCell based on the first indication information.
  • the first indication information may be, for example, an RAR, a TAC MAC CE, or other message carrying the TA.
  • the network may use the DL information of the specific cell (such as a DL boundary) as a reference for the TA.
  • the specific cell in Scheme 2A to Scheme 2C may be, for example, a reference cell, that is, the specific cell may also be replaced by a reference cell.
  • Implementation method a The network indicates that the SSB-less SCell (denoted as cell #1) and cell #2 (an example of a specific cell) are cells of the same TA group. In this case, the UE can perform UL synchronization (or timing advance) with cell #1 based on the TA with cell #2.
  • the UE may use the valid TA with cell #2 to perform UL synchronization (or timing advance) with cell #1.
  • the UE may send a request message (such as the first request message/the second request message/the third request message) to the network in cell #2 or cell #1 to request a valid TA from the network.
  • the network may indicate the valid TA to the UE for the UE to perform UL synchronization (or timing advance) with cell #1.
  • the UE may trigger a RA process in cell #2 or cell #1, and/or send msg1 to the network in cell #2 or cell #1 to obtain a valid TA, and then perform UL synchronization (or timing advance) with cell #1 based on the valid TA.
  • cell #2 may be a specific cell indicated by the network, or may be another specific cell, such as a cell in the same cell group as the SSB-less SCell.
  • the UE uses the valid TA value with cell #2 to perform UL synchronization (or timing advance) with cell #1.
  • the UE if the UE does not have a valid TA with cell #2, the UE sends a request message (such as the first request message/the second request message/the third request message) to the network in cell #2 or cell #1 to request a valid TA from the network. Then, the network may indicate the valid TA to the UE for the UE to perform UL synchronization (or timing advance) with cell #1.
  • a request message such as the first request message/the second request message/the third request message
  • the network may indicate the valid TA to the UE for the UE to perform UL synchronization (or timing advance) with cell #1.
  • the UE may trigger a RA process in cell #2 or cell #1, and/or send msg1 to the network in cell #2 or cell #1 to obtain a valid TA, and then perform UL synchronization (or timing advance) with cell #1 based on the valid TA.
  • Implementation c If the UE is out of synchronization in the uplink of SSB-less SCell (cell #1), or has UL data to send, or needs to perform UL synchronization, the UE may request a valid TA from the network using specific resources or resource locations. Accordingly, the network sends a valid TA to the UE for the UE to perform UL synchronization (or timing advance) with cell #1.
  • Implementation d If the UE loses synchronization in the uplink of SSB-less SCell (cell #1), or has UL data to send, or needs to perform UL synchronization, the UE may trigger the RA process in cell #2 or cell #1.
  • the UE may select the reference signal to be used based on the reference signal (such as SSB/TRS/CSI-RS) configuration of cell #2 and/or the channel quality information of the reference signal, and perform the RA process using the resources (such as preamble and/or RO) on cell #1.
  • the UE may send msg3/MSG A in cell #1 and receive msg2 or 4 in cell #2.
  • Implementation method e If the UE loses uplink synchronization in the SSB-less SCell (cell #1), or has UL data to send, or needs to perform UL synchronization, the UE triggers the RA process in cell #2 or cell #1.
  • the UE can obtain the TA between the UE and cell #2 through the RA process, and the TA between the UE and cell #2 can be used to determine the TA between the UE and cell #1 (the TA between the UE and cell #1 is equal to the TA between the UE and cell #2, or the TA between the UE and cell #1 is derived based on the TA between the UE and cell #2).
  • the UE may obtain (eg, directly obtain) the TA between the UE and cell #1 through the RA process.
  • the UE can simultaneously obtain the TA between the UE and cell #2, and the TA between the UE and cell #1.
  • the UE may indicate to the network that it needs to obtain the TA between the UE and cell #2, or synchronize with the UL of cell #2.
  • the UE may indicate this information via msg1/msgA/msg3.
  • the information in the code, RO, and PUSCH (such as Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI), MAC CE, etc.) is carried or indicated to the network.
  • RNTI Radio Network Temporary Identifier
  • MAC CE MAC CE
  • the RA process may be performed based on the TRS/CSI-RS of the SSB-less SCell (such as replacing the relevant operations for the SSB with the relevant operations for the TRS).
  • the RA process may be performed based on the reference signal of a specific cell (such as a reference cell) of the SSB-less SCell (similar to the methods for scenario 2a in schemes 2A to 2C).
  • the UE may perform timing based on the DL or UL data signal of the SSB-less SCell. For example, the UE may perform DL timing or DL synchronization based on the DL data signal of the SSB-less SCell; for another example, the UE may perform UL timing or obtain TA based on the UL data signal of the SSB-less SCell.
  • FIG3 shows another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application, which may include:
  • the terminal device receives a reference signal of a second cell or a DL data signal of a first cell, and the reference signal or the DL data signal is used for the terminal device to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell; wherein the second cell is a cell used for the terminal device to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell, and the first cell is a secondary cell without SSB transmission.
  • the terminal device may receive a DL data signal of the first cell (eg, receive a DL data signal of the first cell from a network device), so that the terminal device may perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell based on the DL data signal.
  • a DL data signal of the first cell eg, receive a DL data signal of the first cell from a network device
  • the type of the reference signal may be any one of SSB, TRS, and CSI-RS. That is, the terminal device may use any one of SSB, TRS, and CSI-RS reference signals to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell.
  • the network device may send (indicate) at least part of the configuration information of the reference signal to the terminal device, and accordingly, the terminal device may receive at least part of the configuration information from the network device. In this case, the terminal device may not need to read at least part of the configuration information from the second cell. In another example, the terminal device may read at least part of the configuration information of the reference signal from the second cell. In another example, the network device may send (indicate) at least part of the configuration information of the reference signal to the terminal device, and at the same time, the terminal device may read the remaining at least part of the configuration information of the reference signal from the second cell.
  • the type of the reference signal is indicated by the network device. That is, in the process of the terminal device performing DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell, the type of reference signal used by the terminal device is indicated by the network device.
  • the network device may indicate to the terminal device which reference signal (which type) to use to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell. For example, the network device may indicate to the terminal device whether to use SSB, TRS or CSI-RS to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell.
  • the second cell in this embodiment is introduced below.
  • the second cell is indicated by the network device; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the terminal device or the network device; or, the second cell is predefined (such as predefined by a protocol); or, the second cell is determined/selected by the terminal device.
  • which cell is used for the terminal device to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell is indicated by the network device, or, is preconfigured by the terminal device or the network device, or, is predefined (such as predefined by a protocol), or, is determined/selected by the terminal device.
  • the second cell is determined/selected by the terminal device based on first information from the network device
  • the first information may, for example, include at least one of the following: location information of the network device; location information of adjacent network devices of the network device; location information of a third cell included in the network device, the third cell being the cell where the terminal device is located; location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; co-located information between various network devices; co-located information between various cells; QCL information between reference signals; QCL information between channels; and positioning information.
  • the second cell is indicated by the network device through third indication information.
  • the network device may send the third indication information to the terminal device, and accordingly, the terminal device may receive the third indication information from the network device, so that the terminal device may The third indication information indicates that the second cell is the cell used for the terminal device to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell.
  • the third indication information may include, for example, the frequency and/or cell identifier of the second cell.
  • the frequency may be a frequency index (index), such as an index of an adjacent frequency in SIB3/4/5, or a frequency index of SIB2 (frequency index of the serving cell).
  • the frequency may be a frequency value (ARFCN-ValueNR).
  • the frequency may be a frequency value of SIB2 (frequency value of the serving cell).
  • the cell identifier may be, for example, a physical cell identifier (Physical Cell Identity, PCI) or a global cell identifier.
  • the frequency value may be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, or other IEs.
  • the frequency when the frequency value may be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, the frequency may be the frequency of the current serving cell, or the frequency of a reference cell or a cell for obtaining downlink timing (such as when an SSB-less SCell obtains downlink timing from another cell, the frequency of another cell or the SSB of the cell is given).
  • the third indication information is configured under the first condition.
  • the first condition may, for example, include at least one of the following: the condition of SCellAdd; the condition of SCellAddMod; the condition of SCellOnly; and the condition of SCelladdOnly. That is, the third indication information may be configured under at least one of the conditions of SCellAdd, SCellAddMod, SCellOnly, and SCelladdOnly.
  • the third indication information may be configured under the condition of SCellAdd, or, may be configured under the condition of SCellAddMod, or, may be configured under the condition of SCellOnly, or, may be configured under the condition of SCelladdOnly.
  • Table 1 For a description of the above conditions, see Table 1 below.
  • the third indication information is optionally configured when an SCell is added.
  • the terminal device may perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell based on the second cell indicated by the third indication information; if the third indication information does not appear, or in other words, if the network device does not send the third indication information to the terminal device, the terminal device may use the default cell as the second cell, and perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell based on the default cell; or, the terminal device may autonomously determine/select a cell as the second cell, and perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell based on the determined/selected cell.
  • the first cell and the second cell belong to the same TA group and/or cell group.
  • the TA group and/or cell group is determined by the network device based on the second information.
  • the second information may include at least one of the following: measurement results of reference signals; positioning information (such as location information of the terminal device, and/or location information of network devices adjacent to the terminal device); movement trajectory information of the terminal device; location information of the network device; location information of adjacent network devices of the network device; location information of a third cell included in the network device, the third cell being the cell where the terminal device is located; location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; and, co-site information between various cells.
  • positioning information such as location information of the terminal device, and/or location information of network devices adjacent to the terminal device
  • movement trajectory information of the terminal device location information of the network device; location information of adjacent network devices of the network device; location information of a third cell included in the network device, the third cell being the cell where the terminal device is located; location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; and, co-site information between
  • At least one of the measurement result of the reference signal, the positioning information, and the movement trajectory information of the terminal device may be, for example, sent by the terminal device to the network device. That is, the terminal device may send at least one of the measurement result of the reference signal, the positioning information, and the movement trajectory information of the terminal device to the network device, so that the network device can determine the TA group and/or cell group.
  • the second cell is activated by the terminal device by instructing the network device to activate the second cell; or, the second cell is activated by the terminal device under the second condition.
  • the second cell is activated by the terminal device by instructing the network device.
  • the network device may instruct the terminal device to activate the second cell through RRC configuration.
  • the network device may set the scellState in the RRC configuration (such as in SCellConfig) to activated to indicate the activation of the second cell.
  • the network device may instruct the terminal device to activate the second cell through MAC CE (such as SCell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE, enhanced Sell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE, or new SCell activation/deactivation MAC CE).
  • Another possible situation is that the second cell is activated by the terminal device under the second condition.
  • the second condition may include at least one of the following: the deactivation timer of the second cell times out; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be started; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be restarted; the terminal device obtains indication information for indicating the second cell; the terminal device obtains the reference signal of the second cell; the terminal device performs uplink synchronization or downlink synchronization with the first cell; the terminal device obtains the configuration of the first cell; the first cell is activated; and, the first cell needs to be activated.
  • the terminal device performs DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell (SSB-less Scell).
  • a specific cell in order to achieve DL synchronization or DL timing between the UE and the SSB-less SCell, a specific cell needs to be activated.
  • the specific cell is a cell used for the UE to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell.
  • the specific cell can be, for example, a reference cell, or the specific cell can also be replaced by a reference cell.
  • the network may set scellState (such as in SCellConfig) to activated to activate the specific cell; or the network may use MAC CE (such as SCell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE, enhanced Sell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE, or new SCell activation/deactivation MAC CE) activates the specific cell; or, the UE may start or restart sCellDeactivationTimer when it is obtained that the specific cell is a certain SCell, or when synchronization with the SSB-less SCell is performed based on the specific cell; or, the UE may activate the specific cell under the second condition.
  • SCellConfig such as in SCellConfig
  • MAC CE such as SCell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE, enhanced Sell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE, or new SCell activation/deactivation MAC CE
  • the second condition may, for example, include at least one of the following: obtaining indication information for indicating the specific cell; obtaining a reference signal (such as SSB/CSI-RS/TRS) of the specific cell; the UE performs uplink synchronization or downlink synchronization with the SSB-less SCell; obtaining the configuration of the SSB-less SCell; the SSB-less SCell is activated or needs to be activated.
  • obtaining indication information for indicating the specific cell obtaining a reference signal (such as SSB/CSI-RS/TRS) of the specific cell
  • the UE performs uplink synchronization or downlink synchronization with the SSB-less SCell
  • obtaining the configuration of the SSB-less SCell the SSB-less SCell is activated or needs to be activated.
  • the network may indicate to the UE which cell (such as indicating a cell identifier, SSB frequency, etc.) is a specific cell of the SSB-less SCell.
  • the UE may perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the SSB-less SCell according to the SSB of the specific cell.
  • the network may simultaneously indicate to the UE the SSB configuration information of the specific cell, such as at least part of the information in the MIB and/or SIB1 (for example, ssb-SubcarrierOffset and/or systemFrameNumber). It is understandable that if the network indicates the SSB configuration information of a specific cell, the UE may not need to read the SSB configuration information of the specific cell (such as MIB and/or SIB1) from the specific cell.
  • the network may indicate to the UE which cell (such as indicating a cell identifier, SSB frequency, etc.) is a specific cell of the SSB-less SCell.
  • the UE may perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the SSB-less SCell according to the CSI-RS or TRS of the specific cell.
  • the network may simultaneously indicate to the UE at least part of the configuration information of the CSI-RS or TRS of the specific cell, such as at least part of the information of the CSI-RS or TRS (for example, at least one of scellActivationRS-Id, SCellActivationRS-ConfigId-r17, resourceSet, NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId, gapBetweenBursts, and qcl-Info-r17). It is understandable that if the network indicates the configuration information of the CSI-RS or TRS of a specific cell, the UE may not need to access the specific cell to obtain the configuration information of the CSI-RS or TRS.
  • the UE may perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the SSB-less SCell based on the reference signal (such as SSB/CSI-RS/TRS) of the default cell, that is, the UE may use the default cell as a specific cell of the SSB-less SCell.
  • the UE may learn which cell is the default cell by any of the following methods: network indication; UE autonomous determination/selection; pre-definition (such as protocol pre-definition); UE pre-configuration.
  • the default cell may be any of the following cells: PCell; PSCell; PCell or PSCell in the same cell group as the SSB-less SCell; any cell in the same cell group as the SSB-less SCell; the cell with the smallest cell index in the same cell group as the SSB-less SCell; the cell with the largest cell index in the same cell group as the SSB-less SCell; any cell in the same TA group as the SSB-less SCell; the cell with the smallest cell index in the same TA group as the SSB-less SCell; the cell with the largest cell index in the same TA group as the SSB-less SCell.
  • the network may indicate the configuration information of the reference signal (such as SSB/CSI-RS/TRS) of the default cell of the UE.
  • the network may indicate at least part of the information in MIB and/or SIB1 (for example: ssb-SubcarrierOffset and/or systemFrameNumber).
  • the UE may not need to read the SSB configuration information (such as MIB and/or SIB1) of the default cell from the default cell.
  • the network may indicate at least part of the information of CSI-RS or TRS (for example: at least one of scellActivationRS-Id, SCellActivationRS-ConfigId-r17, resourceSet, NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId, gapBetweenBursts, qcl-Info-r17).
  • the UE may not need to access the default cell to obtain the configuration information of CSI-RS or TRS.
  • the UE may perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the SSB-less SCell based on the SSB/CSI-RS/TRS of the specific cell/default cell. For example, the UE may receive or measure the SSB/CSI-RS/TRS of the specific cell/default cell to obtain synchronization information, and may consider that the synchronization information is also the synchronization information of the SSB-less SCell, and then, the UE may perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the SSB-less SCell based on the synchronization information.
  • the network may instruct the UE on which reference signal(s) of the specific cell/default cell to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the SSB-less SCell. For example, the network may instruct the UE to perform DL synchronization or DL timing based on SSB, CSI-RS, or TRS.
  • the UE may perform timing based on the DL or UL data signal of the SSB-less SCell. For example, the UE may perform DL timing or DL synchronization based on the DL data signal of the SSB-less SCell; for another example, the UE may perform UL timing or obtain TA based on the UL data signal of the SSB-less SCell.
  • the network may indicate a specific cell and/or a default cell to the UE through a first parameter (corresponding to the third indication information in the aforementioned embodiment). That is, the first parameter may be used to indicate which cell the specific cell and/or the default cell is. As an example, the first parameter may include information about the specific cell and/or the default cell (such as frequency, cell identifier, etc.). That is, the network may indicate the specific cell and/or the default cell to the UE by indicating information about the specific cell and/or the default cell (such as frequency, cell identifier, etc.).
  • the frequency may be a frequency index (index), such as an index of an adjacent frequency in SIB3/4/5, or a frequency index of SIB2 (frequency index of the serving cell).
  • the frequency may be a frequency value (ARFCN-ValueNR).
  • the frequency may be a frequency value of SIB2 (frequency value of the serving cell).
  • the cell identifier may be, for example, a PCI, or a global cell identifier.
  • the frequency value may be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, or provided by other IEs.
  • the frequency when the frequency value can be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, the frequency may be the frequency of the current serving cell, or the frequency of the reference cell or the cell for obtaining downlink timing (if the SSB-less SCell obtains downlink timing from another cell, the frequency of another cell or the SSB of the cell is given).
  • the first parameter may be configured under a first condition, for example.
  • the first condition may include, for example, at least one of the following: a condition of SCellAdd; a condition of SCellAddMod; a condition of SCellOnly; and a condition of SCelladdOnly. That is, the first parameter may be configured under at least one of the conditions of SCellAdd, SCellAddMod, SCellOnly, and SCelladdOnly.
  • the first parameter may be configured under the condition of SCellAdd, or, may be configured under the condition of SCellAddMod, or, may be configured under the condition of SCellOnly, or, may be configured under the condition of SCelladdOnly.
  • Table 1 For a description of the above conditions, see Table 1.
  • the first parameter may be included in at least one of the following information: RRC reconfiguration, ReconfigurationWithSync; ScellConfig; ServingCellConfigCommon; downlinkConfigCommon; FrequencyInfoDL.
  • the first parameter is used to indicate a specific cell.
  • the UE may obtain a timing reference based on the specific cell indicated by the first parameter; if the first parameter does not appear, or in other words, if the network does not indicate the first parameter to the UE, the UE may obtain a timing reference based on a default cell or a cell determined autonomously by the UE.
  • the first parameter is used to indicate a default cell.
  • the UE may acquire a timing reference based on the default cell indicated by the first parameter; if the first parameter does not appear, or if the network does not indicate the first parameter to the UE, the UE may acquire a timing reference based on a cell autonomously determined by the UE.
  • the above-mentioned use of the first parameter by the UE may be supported in the case where the SCell for which the UE obtains the timing reference and the cell from which the UE obtains the timing reference are in different frequency bands (only supported in case the SCell for which the UE obtains the timing reference is in the different frequency band as the cell from which the UE obtains the timing reference); and/or; may be supported in the case where the SCell for which the UE obtains the timing reference and the cell from which the UE obtains the timing reference are in different frequency bands and co-located (only supported in case the SCell for which the UE obtains the timing reference is in the inter-band and co-located as the cell from which the UE obtains the timing reference)
  • the network may add a new indication in the FrequencyInfoDL IE to indicate which cell is the specific cell (or reference cell) for the SCell.
  • the information of the specific cell (or reference cell) includes at least the SSB frequency and/or the PCI.
  • the SSB frequency may be represented as ARFCN ValueNR, and the PCI may be represented as PhysCellId.
  • the information of the specific cell (or reference cell) may be given only the SSB frequency, or the SSB frequency and the PCI.
  • the SSB frequency or frequency point value may be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, or provided by other IEs.
  • the frequency point in the case where the frequency point value may be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, the frequency point may be the frequency point of the current serving cell, or the frequency point of the reference cell or the cell for obtaining downlink timing (e.g., if the SSB-less SCell obtains downlink timing from another cell, the frequency point of the SSB of another cell or cell is given).
  • the UE in the presence of absoluteFrequencySSB, or in the presence of absoluteFrequencySSB and PCI configuration, the UE obtains the timing reference for this SSB-less SCell from another cell (such as a specific cell or a reference cell).
  • another cell such as a specific cell or a reference cell.
  • the information of the specific cell (or reference cell) exists.
  • the network When configuring the SSB-less SCell to a UE and in the case that UE needs to obtain the timing reference for this SCell from another cell on the different frequency band, the network would add the new indication in FrequencyInfoDL IE to indicate which is the reference cell of this SCell.
  • the information of the reference cell would at least include SSB frequency and PCI.
  • SSB frequency would be represent as ARFCN-Va lueNR and PCI would be represented as PhysCellId.
  • the information of the reference cell would be optionally present upon adding a new SCell.
  • the FrequencyInfoDL IE is extended to indicate the information of the specific cell (or reference cell).
  • the information of the specific cell (or reference cell) includes the ARFCN ValueNR and/or PhysCellId of the specific cell (or reference cell).
  • the information of the specific cell (or reference cell) may be given only the SSB frequency, or the SSB frequency and PCI.
  • the SSB frequency or frequency point value may be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, or other IEs.
  • the frequency point when the frequency point value may be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, the frequency point may be the frequency point of the current serving cell, or the frequency point of the reference cell or the cell that obtains the downlink timing (if the SSB-less SCell obtains the downlink timing from another cell, the frequency point of the SSB of another cell or cell is given).
  • the UE in the case that absoluteFrequencySSB is absent, or in the case that absoluteFrequencySSB is present and PCI is configured, the UE obtains the timing reference for the SSB-less SCell from another cell (such as a specific cell or a reference cell).
  • FrequencyInfoDL IE is extended to indicate the information of the reference cell.
  • the information of the reference cell includes ARFCN-ValueNR and PhysCellId of the reference cell.
  • the UE when absoluteFrequencySSB does not exist and/or the UE is configured with a specific cell (or reference cell), or when absoluteFrequencySSB does not exist and/or the UE is configured with a specific cell (or reference cell) to obtain a timing reference for an SSB-less SCell, the UE obtains a timing reference through the specific cell (or reference cell), or obtains a timing reference for an SSB-less SCell.
  • the information of the specific cell (or reference cell) is included in the FrequencyInfoDL IE.
  • the information of the specific cell (or reference cell) includes the ARFCN ValueNR and/or PhysCellId of the specific cell (or reference cell).
  • the UE obtains the timing reference of the SSB-less SCell from the specific cell (or reference cell). In some embodiments, this scheme can be supported when the SCell from which the UE obtains the timing reference and the cell from which the UE obtains the timing reference (i.e., the specific cell) are in different frequency bands.
  • the information of the specific cell (or reference cell) can be given only the SSB frequency, or the SSB frequency and PCI. In some embodiments, the SSB frequency or frequency point value can be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, or other IEs.
  • the frequency point when the frequency point value can be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, the frequency point can be the frequency point of the current serving cell, or the frequency point of the reference cell or the cell for obtaining downlink timing (such as when the SSB-less SCell obtains downlink timing from another cell, the frequency point of the SSB of another cell or cell is given).
  • the UE in the presence of absoluteFrequencySSB, or in the presence of absoluteFrequencySSB and PCI configuration, the UE obtains the timing reference for the SSB-less SCell from another cell (e.g., a specific cell or a reference cell).
  • the UE obtains the timing reference for SSB-less SCell from the reference cell.
  • the SCell for which the UE obtains the timing reference is in the different frequency band as the cell (i.e. the reference cell) from which the UE obtains the timing reference.
  • the UE follows the traditional behavior, that is, the UE obtains the timing reference from the SpCell or SCell (if applicable). In some embodiments, this scheme can be supported when the SCell from which the UE obtains the timing reference is in the same frequency band as the cell from which the UE obtains the timing reference (i.e., the SpCell or SCell, respectively).
  • the information of the specific cell (or reference cell) can be given only the SSB frequency, or the SSB frequency and PCI.
  • the SSB frequency or frequency point value can be provided using the absoluteFrequencySSB, or its In some embodiments, when the frequency value can be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, the frequency can be the frequency of the current serving cell, or the frequency of the reference cell or the cell for obtaining downlink timing (such as when the SSB-less SCell obtains downlink timing from another cell, the frequency of the other cell or the SSB of the cell is given). In some embodiments, when absoluteFrequencySSB appears, or when absoluteFrequencySSB appears and PCI is configured, the UE obtains the timing reference of the SSB-less SCell from another cell (such as a specific cell or a reference cell).
  • the UE follows the legacy behavior,iethe UE obtains timing reference from the SpCell or an SCell if applicable.
  • the SCell for which the UE obtains the timing reference is in the same frequency band as the cell(iethe SpCell or the SCell,respectively)from which the UE obtains the timing reference.
  • the UE obtains the timing reference for SSB-less SCell from the intra-band cell or Pcell or default cell.
  • the UE implementation or the network indication Whether the obtaining is from the intra-band cell or Pcell or default cell depends on the UE implementation or the network indication.
  • the UE obtains the timing reference of the SSB-less SCell from an in-band cell or Pcell or other Scell or a default cell.
  • the cell from which the UE obtains the timing reference is determined by the UE implementation, or is predefined, or is preconfigured by the network, or is otherwise indicated by the network.
  • the above-mentioned scheme regarding the third indication information (first parameter), for example, can be applicable to a scenario of how the UE determines DL timing, or how the UE determines a timing reference; or, can be applicable to a scenario of how to indicate or determine a specific cell or a timing reference cell.
  • the above-mentioned scheme regarding the third indication information (first parameter) can be implemented in combination with the method shown in Figure 2 or Figure 3, or can also be implemented separately, and the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this. That is, the embodiments of the present application also provide a method of communication, in which the third indication information (first parameter) can be used to indicate the second cell (such as a specific cell and/or a default cell). Among them, the introduction of the third indication information (first parameter) can be found in the description in the aforementioned embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 4 shows another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application, which may include:
  • the terminal device receives a first MAC CE from the network device, and the first MAC CE is used to indicate the reporting method of the first CSI report with sub-reporting configuration.
  • the reporting method can also be called an activation method.
  • the network device may send a first MAC CE to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the terminal device may receive the first MAC CE from the network device.
  • the first MAC CE is at least used to indicate a reporting method of a first CSI report with a sub-reporting configuration.
  • the first MAC CE may, for example, include indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report, and when any indication or position of the sub-reporting configuration is set to activated, the first MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the first CSI report.
  • the terminal device needs to report the first CSI report.
  • an indication or position such as a bitmap position
  • a first specific value such as 1
  • a second specific value such as 0
  • the number of indications or positions of the sub-reporting configurations set to be activated is greater than or equal to 1.
  • the first MAC CE includes indications or positions of 4 sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report
  • the MAC CE indicates that the terminal device needs to report the first CSI report
  • there may be at least 1 indication or position of the sub-reporting configuration set to be activated for example, the indications or positions of the 1st and 4th sub-reporting configurations are set to be activated.
  • the first CSI report is a CSI report with sub-reporting configurations.
  • the first MAC CE is also used to instruct the terminal device to report the sub-report report corresponding to the sub-reporting configuration in the first CSI report.
  • the first MAC CE includes indications or positions of 4 sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report
  • the first MAC CE can not only indicate that the terminal device needs to report the first CSI report, but also be used to further indicate that the terminal device needs to report the sub-report reports corresponding to the first sub-reporting configuration and the third sub-reporting configuration in the first CSI report.
  • the first MAC CE is also used to indicate the reporting method of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration. That is, the first MAC CE can be used to indicate the reporting method of the first CSI report with sub-reporting configuration, and can also be used to indicate the reporting method of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration.
  • the first MAC CE may, for example, include indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the second CSI report, and when any indication or position of the sub-reporting configuration is set to activated, the first MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the second CSI report.
  • the terminal device needs to report the second CSI report.
  • the number of indications or positions of the sub-reporting configurations set to be activated is 1.
  • the first MAC CE includes indications or positions of 4 sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the second CSI report
  • the MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the second CSI report, among the 4 sub-reporting configurations, there is an indication or position of 1 sub-reporting configuration that is set to be activated, for example, the indication or position of the 1st sub-reporting configuration is set to be activated, at this time, the indications or positions of the other 3 sub-reporting configurations may not need to be configured.
  • the length of the first MAC CE is fixed. In this way, the terminal device may no longer need to determine the length of the first MAC CE, for ease of implementation.
  • the first MAC CE is not used to indicate the reporting method of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration. That is, the first MAC CE can be used to indicate the reporting method of the first CSI report with sub-reporting configuration, but not to indicate the reporting method of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration.
  • the second CSI report may be indicated by a second MAC CE.
  • the second MAC CE may be, for example, an existing MAC CE, such as: SP CSI reporting on PUCCH Activation/Deactivation MAC CE.
  • the second MAC CE is at least used to indicate the reporting mode of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration.
  • the length of the first MAC CE is fixed or variable.
  • the terminal device may no longer need to determine the length of the first MAC CE, which is convenient for implementation.
  • the length of the first MAC CE is variable, the length of the first MAC CE can be flexibly adjusted.
  • a new logical channel identifier (Logical Channel ID, LCID) can be used to identify the MAC CE, such as E-LCID.
  • the terminal device when the network device sends a first MAC CE to the terminal device, the terminal device does not use a conventional MAC CE, wherein the conventional MAC CE is used to indicate a reporting method of a CSI report with a reporting configuration, but is not used to indicate a reporting method of a CSI report with a sub-reporting configuration.
  • the terminal device when the network device sends the first MAC CE to the terminal device, the terminal device can still use the traditional MAC CE. At this time, if the indication or position of a reporting configuration included in the traditional MAC CE is set to activated, it is considered that the indication or position of all sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the reporting configuration is set to activated.
  • the network device indicates the reporting method of the CSI report to the terminal device through the MAC CE.
  • the CSI report (such as the first CSI report; and the second CSI report) can be, for example, a semi-persistent (SP) CSI report.
  • SP semi-persistent
  • the MAC CE includes: indication information for a CSI report with a sub-config (i.e., the aforementioned sub-reporting configuration) (corresponding to the first CSI report in the aforementioned embodiment), and indication information for a CSI report without a sub-configuration (corresponding to the second CSI report in the aforementioned embodiment).
  • the indication information for a CSI report with a sub-configuration is used to indicate to the UE that there is a sub-configuration. Whether the CSI report needs to be reported; the indication information for the CSI report without sub-configuration is used to indicate to the UE whether the CSI report without sub-configuration needs to be reported.
  • the MAC CE can be used to indicate to the UE whether the CSI report with sub-configuration needs to be reported, and can be used to indicate to the UE whether the CSI report without sub-configuration needs to be reported.
  • the MAC CE may not need to explicitly distinguish whether a CSI report has a sub-configuration.
  • the number of positions corresponding to the bitmap position of the sub-configuration that have a specific value (such as 1) may be more than one; if a CSI report has no sub-configuration, the number of positions corresponding to the bitmap position of the sub-configuration that have a specific value (such as 1) may be 0 or 1.
  • 0 indicates that the CSI report does not need to be reported
  • 1 indicates that the CSI report needs to be reported.
  • the length of the MAC CE may be, for example, a fixed length.
  • a new LCID can be used to identify the MAC CE, such as E-LCID.
  • the MAC CE includes indication information for a CSI report with sub-configuration (corresponding to the first CSI report in the aforementioned embodiment), but does not include indication information for a CSI report without sub-configuration (corresponding to the second CSI report in the aforementioned embodiment).
  • the indication information for the CSI report with sub-configuration is used to indicate to the UE whether the CSI report with sub-configuration needs to be reported.
  • the MAC CE can be used to indicate to the UE whether a CSI report with sub-configuration needs to be reported, but not to indicate to the UE whether a CSI report without sub-configuration needs to be reported.
  • a CSI report has a sub-configuration
  • the length of the MAC CE may be, for example, a fixed length or a variable length.
  • a new LCID can be used to identify the MAC CE, such as E-LCID.
  • another MAC CE may be used to carry at least indication information for CSI reporting with sub-configuration.
  • the other MAC CE may be, for example, an existing MAC CE, such as: SP CSI reporting on PUCCH Activation/Deactivation MAC CE.
  • Table 2 and Table 3 show examples of the reporting method of the network indicating the CSI report to the UE through the MAC CE.
  • Table 2 for example, can be applied to Scheme 4A and Scheme 4B;
  • Table 3 for example, can be applied to Scheme 4B.
  • R represents a reserved bit
  • Serving Cell ID is used to indicate the identifier of the serving cell applied by MAC CE
  • BWP ID is used to indicate the identifier of the UL BWP applied by MAC CE
  • S i is used to indicate the activation/deactivation status of the semi-persistent CSI report configuration in csi-ReportConfigToAddModList
  • Ni ,x is used to indicate the activation/deactivation status of the semi-persistent CSI report subconfiguration (SubConfiguration) x in csi-ReportSubConfigList where CSI-ReportConfigId is i.
  • S i is used to indicate the activation/deactivation status of the semi-persistent CSI reporting configuration within csi-ReportConfigToAddModList.
  • S 0 refers to the report configuration which includes PUCCH resources for SP CSI reporting in the indicated BWP and has the lowest CSI-ReportConfigId within the list with type set to semi-PersistentOnPUCCH;
  • S 1 refers to the report configuration which includes PUCCH resources for SP CSI reporting in the indicated BWP and has the second lowest CSI ReportConfigId, and so on.
  • the MAC implements The entity should ignore the Si field.
  • the Si field is set to 1, it is used to indicate that the corresponding semi-persistent CSI reporting configuration is activated; when the Si field is set to 0, it is used to indicate that the corresponding semi-persistent CSI reporting configuration is deactivated.
  • the UE may further check Ni ,x .
  • the Si field is set to 0, the UE does not check Ni ,x , or considers that Ni ,x does not exist for this Si .
  • the Si field is set to 0, the corresponding Ni ,x field is not included.
  • the Si field is set to 0, the corresponding Ni ,x field is not included.
  • Ni ,x is used to indicate the activation/deactivation status of the semi-persistent CSI reporting subconfiguration (SubConfiguration) x in the csi-ReportSubConfigList with CSI-ReportConfigId i.
  • the MAC entity ignores the Ni ,x field.
  • the MAC entity ignores the N i,x field where x is greater than or equal to 4.
  • the MAC entity shall ignore the Ni ,x field.
  • Ni ,x field When the Ni ,x field is set to 1, it indicates that the corresponding sub-configuration x in the semi-persistent CSI report i is activated; when the Ni ,x field is set to 0, it indicates that the corresponding sub-configuration x in the semi-persistent CSI report i is deactivated.
  • FIG. 5 shows another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application, which may include:
  • the terminal device receives fifth indication information from the network device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate a first operation; or, the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation when a third condition is met.
  • the network device may send the fifth indication information to the terminal device, and accordingly, the terminal device may receive the fifth indication information from the network device.
  • the fifth indication information may be used to indicate the first operation; or the fifth indication information may be used to indicate the first operation when the third condition is met.
  • the fifth indication information may be, for example, downlink control information (DCI) or MAC CE.
  • the DCI may be, for example, a DCI of a specific RNTI (such as NES RNTI) or a specific DCI format (such as DCI format 2_9).
  • the first operation may, for example, include at least one of the following: a source cell of the terminal device enters Network Energy Saving (NES); the terminal device executes Conditional Handover (CHO); the terminal device starts to execute CHO; and the terminal device evaluates the execution conditions of CHO.
  • NES Network Energy Saving
  • CHO Conditional Handover
  • the terminal device starts to execute CHO
  • the terminal device evaluates the execution conditions of CHO.
  • the method may further include: the terminal device executes CHO based on the fifth indication information; or, the terminal device starts to execute CHO based on the fifth indication information; or, the terminal device evaluates the execution condition of CHO based on the fifth indication information; or, the terminal device determines/believes that the candidate target cell satisfies the CHO switching condition; or, when the first CHO event (such as A3 or A4 or A5) is satisfied, the terminal device determines/believes that the candidate target cell satisfies the CHO switching condition; or, when the first CHO event is satisfied, the terminal device determines/believes that the CHO execution condition is satisfied; or, when the first CHO event is satisfied, the terminal device determines/believes that the CHO event is satisfied; or, when the first CHO event is satisfied, the terminal device determines/believes that the CHO event is satisfied; or, when the first CHO event is satisfied, the terminal device determines/believes that the CHO event is satisfied; or, when the first CHO event is satisfied, the terminal
  • the method may also include: when the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation, within the first time period, the terminal device performs any of the following operations: the terminal device does not expect to receive new fifth indication information; the terminal device does not expect to receive new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition; when the terminal device receives new fifth indication information, ignores the new fifth indication information; when the terminal device receives new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition, ignores the new fifth indication information.
  • the first duration may be, for example, a timer duration.
  • the first duration and/or the first offset may be predefined or preconfigured; or, the first duration and/or the first offset may be configured by the network device; or, the first duration and/or the first offset may be configured by the RRC; or, the first duration and/or the first offset are included in the fifth indication information.
  • the first duration is predefined, preconfigured, configured by the network device, based on the radio resource control configuration, or included in the fifth indication information
  • the first offset is predefined, preconfigured, configured by the network device, based on the radio resource control configuration, or included in the fifth indication information.
  • the method may further include: the network device sends new fifth indication information to the terminal device, the new fifth indication information is used to indicate the third operation, or the new fifth indication information is used to indicate the third operation when the third condition is not met.
  • the third operation may, for example, include at least one of the following: the source cell of the terminal device leaves the NES; stops executing CHO; determines/considers that the candidate target cell does not meet the CHO switching conditions; determines/considers that the CHO execution conditions are not met; determines/considers that the CHO event is not met; determines/considers that the CHO execution conditions are not available; determines/considers that the candidate target cell is not a triggered cell; and stops CHO evaluation.
  • the second operation when the terminal device receives new fifth indication information, or when the terminal device receives new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition, the second operation may be performed.
  • the second operation may, for example, include at least one of the following: stop executing CHO; stop CHO evaluation; delete CHO configuration; indicate CHO stop to the network device; indicate switching stop to the network device; determine/believe that the candidate target cell does not meet the CHO switching condition; determine/believe that the CHO execution condition is not met; determine/believe that the CHO event is not met; determine/believe that the candidate target cell is not a triggered cell; and determine/believe that the source cell leaves the NES.
  • the second operation is performed, for example, after the first time period. That is, after the first time period, when the terminal device receives new fifth indication information, or when the terminal device receives new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition, the second operation may be performed.
  • the third condition may include, for example: indicating a specific value (that is, the first bit in the fifth indication information is set to a specific value). That is, when the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) indicates a specific value, it indicates that the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) satisfies the third condition, otherwise, it indicates that the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) does not satisfy the third condition.
  • the specific value may be 1. In this case, if the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) indicates 1, it indicates that the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) satisfies the third condition; if the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) indicates a non-specific value (such as 0), it indicates that the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) does not satisfy the third condition.
  • the specific value may be 0. In this case, if the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) indicates 0, it indicates that the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) satisfies the third condition; if the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) indicates a non-specific value (such as 1), it indicates that the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) does not satisfy the third condition.
  • the terminal device if a CHO event related to NES and a CHO event not related to NES are configured at the same time, if one of the CHO events is satisfied, the terminal device performs CHO.
  • the CHO event related to NES and the CHO event not related to NES are associated with the same CondReconfigId. That is, if the CHO event related to NES is satisfied (including receiving the fifth indication information, or receiving the fifth indication information that satisfies the third condition), the terminal device considers the target candidate cell to be a triggered cell, and/or performs CHO.
  • the terminal device If the CHO event not related to NES is satisfied, or the CHO event not related to NES is satisfied (regardless of whether the fifth indication information is received, or regardless of whether the fifth indication information that satisfies the third condition is received), the terminal device considers the target candidate cell to be a triggered cell, and/or performs CHO.
  • nesEvent e.g., may or may not satisfy the measIDs associated with the nes event
  • a target candidate cell within the stored condRRCReconfig is not configured with nesEvent and fulfilled,and the other event associated to the measIds within condTriggerConfig for a target candidate cell within the stored condRRCReconfig is configured with nesEvent), then perform the following 1) or 2):
  • the size of the sequence number of each process does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiment of the present application.
  • downlink indicates that the transmission direction of the signal or data
  • uplink is used to indicate that the transmission direction of the signal or data is the second direction sent from the user equipment of the cell to the site
  • side is used to indicate that the transmission direction of the signal or data is the third direction sent from user equipment 1 to user equipment 2.
  • downlink signal indicates that the transmission direction of the signal is the first direction.
  • the term "and/or” is only a description of the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that three relationships can exist. Specifically, A and/or B can represent: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. In addition, the character “/" in this article generally indicates that the front and back associated objects are in an "or" relationship.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide corresponding communication devices.
  • FIG6 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application, which is applied to a terminal device.
  • the communication device 600 (hereinafter referred to as the device 600) includes:
  • the first acquisition unit 601 is configured to acquire a first timing advance TA between the device 600 and a first cell, where the first TA is used for the device 600 to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell; wherein the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.
  • the first TA is included in first indication information from the network device, the first indication information is a response to first request information, and the first request information is used to request the first TA.
  • the first indication information is any one of the following: a random access response; a timing advance command media access control control unit; and a downlink message carrying the first TA.
  • the first request information is any one of the following: a scheduling request; uplink control information; an uplink media access control control unit; an uplink wireless resource control message; uplink resources of the first cell; and, uplink resources of the second cell, the second cell being a cell used for the device 600 to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell.
  • the first TA is obtained through a random access process; wherein the random access process is performed by the device 600 on the first cell or the second cell; and the second cell is a cell used for the device 600 to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell.
  • the first TA is determined based on a second TA between the apparatus 600 and a second cell; the second cell is a cell used for the apparatus 600 to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell.
  • the second TA is included in second indication information from the network device, the second indication information is a response to second request information, and the second request information is used to request the second TA.
  • the second indication information is any one of the following: a random access response; a timing advance command media access control control unit; and a downlink message carrying a second TA.
  • the second request information is any one of the following: scheduling request; uplink control information; uplink media access control control unit; uplink radio resource control message; uplink resources of the first cell; and, uplink resources of the second cell.
  • the second TA is obtained through a random access procedure; wherein the random access procedure is performed by the apparatus 600 on the first cell or the second cell.
  • the apparatus 600 further includes: a second acquisition unit configured to acquire configuration information of a first reference signal, where the first reference signal is a reference signal of the first cell or a reference signal of the second cell, and the first reference signal is used to perform a random access process.
  • a second acquisition unit configured to acquire configuration information of a first reference signal, where the first reference signal is a reference signal of the first cell or a reference signal of the second cell, and the first reference signal is used to perform a random access process.
  • the type of the reference signal of the first cell is a tracking reference signal or a channel state information reference signal
  • the type of the reference signal of the second cell is any one of a synchronization signal block, a tracking reference signal, and a channel state information reference signal.
  • the type of the first reference signal is indicated by the network device.
  • the second cell is indicated by the network device; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the apparatus 600; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the network device; or, the second cell is predefined; or, the second cell is determined by the apparatus 600.
  • the second cell is determined by the device 600 based on first information from a network device, the first information including at least one of the following: location information of the network device; location information of a network device adjacent to the network device; location information of a third cell included in the network device, the third cell being the cell where the device 600 is located; location information of a cell adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; co-site information between various cells; quasi-co-site information between reference signals; quasi-co-site information between channels; and positioning information.
  • the second cell is indicated by the network device through third indication information; the third indication information includes: the frequency point and/or cell identifier of the second cell.
  • the third indication information is configured under the first condition.
  • the first cell and the second cell belong to the same timing advance group and/or cell group.
  • the timing advance group and/or cell group is determined by the network device based on second information, and the second information includes at least one of the following: measurement results of the reference signal; positioning information; movement trajectory information of the device 600; location information of the network device; location information of network devices adjacent to the network device; location information of a third cell included in the network device, the third cell being the cell where the device 600 is located; location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; and co-site information between various cells.
  • the second cell is activated by the apparatus 600 instructed by the network device; or, the second cell is activated by the apparatus 600 under the second condition.
  • the second condition includes at least one of the following: the deactivation timer of the second cell times out; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be started; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be restarted; indication information for indicating the second cell is obtained; a reference signal of the second cell is obtained; uplink synchronization or downlink synchronization with the first cell is performed; the configuration of the first cell is obtained; the first cell is activated; and the first cell needs to be activated.
  • the first TA is determined based on an uplink data signal of the first cell.
  • FIG. 7 is a second schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application, which is applied to a network device.
  • the communication device 700 (hereinafter referred to as the device 700) includes:
  • the first sending unit 701 is configured to send fourth indication information to the terminal device, the fourth indication information including a first timing advance TA between the terminal device and the first cell, and/or a second TA between the terminal device and the second cell, the second cell is a cell used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell, the second TA is used to determine the first TA, and the first TA is used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell; wherein the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.
  • the fourth indication information is a response to the third request information, where the third request information is used to request the first TA and/or the second TA.
  • the fourth indication information is any one of the following: a random access response; a timing advance command media access control control unit; and a downlink message carrying the first TA and/or the second TA.
  • the third request information is any one of the following: a scheduling request; uplink control information; an uplink media access control control unit; an uplink radio resource control message; an uplink resource of the first cell; and an uplink resource of the second cell.
  • the fourth indication information is a random access response sent to the terminal device during a random access procedure, and the random access procedure is performed by the terminal device on the first cell or the second cell.
  • the apparatus 700 further includes: a second sending unit configured to send configuration information of a first reference signal to the terminal device, the first reference signal being a reference signal of the first cell or a reference signal of the second cell, and the first reference signal being used to perform a random access process.
  • a second sending unit configured to send configuration information of a first reference signal to the terminal device, the first reference signal being a reference signal of the first cell or a reference signal of the second cell, and the first reference signal being used to perform a random access process.
  • the type of the reference signal of the first cell is a tracking reference signal or a channel state information reference signal
  • the type of the reference signal of the second cell is any one of a synchronization signal block, a tracking reference signal, and a channel state information reference signal.
  • the second cell is indicated by the apparatus 700; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the terminal device; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the apparatus 700; or, the second cell is predefined; or, the second cell is determined by the terminal device.
  • the second cell is determined based on the first information
  • the first information includes at least one of the following: location information of the device 700; location information of a network device adjacent to the device 700; location information of a third cell included in the device 700, the third cell being the cell where the terminal device is located; location information of a cell adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; co-site information between various cells; quasi-co-site information between reference signals; quasi-co-site information between channels; and positioning information.
  • the second cell is indicated by the apparatus 700 through third indication information; the third indication information includes: a frequency point and/or a cell identifier of the second cell.
  • the third indication information is configured under the first condition.
  • the first cell and the second cell belong to the same timing advance group and/or cell group.
  • the timing advance group and/or cell group is determined by the device 700 based on second information
  • the second information includes at least one of the following: measurement results of reference signals; positioning information; movement trajectory information of the terminal device; location information of the device 700; location information of network devices adjacent to the device 700; location information of a third cell included in the device 700, the third cell being the cell where the terminal device is located; location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; and co-site information between various cells.
  • the second cell is activated by the terminal device as instructed by the apparatus 700; or, the second cell is activated by the terminal device under the second condition.
  • the second condition includes at least one of the following: the deactivation timer of the second cell times out; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be started; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be restarted; indication information for indicating the second cell is obtained; a reference signal of the second cell is obtained; uplink synchronization or downlink synchronization with the first cell is performed; the configuration of the first cell is obtained; the first cell is activated; and the first cell needs to be activated.
  • FIG8 is a third schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application, which is applied to a terminal device.
  • the communication device 800 (hereinafter referred to as the device 800) includes:
  • the first receiving unit 801 is configured to receive a reference signal of a second cell or a downlink data signal of a first cell, where the reference signal or the downlink data signal is used for the device 800 to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell; wherein the second cell is a cell used for the device 800 to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell, and the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.
  • the type of the reference signal is any one of a synchronization signal block, a tracking reference signal, and a channel state information reference signal.
  • At least part of the configuration information of the reference signal is indicated by the network device; and/or, at least part of the configuration information of the reference signal is read by the apparatus 800 from the second cell.
  • the type of the reference signal is indicated by the network device.
  • the second cell is indicated by the network device; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the apparatus 800; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the network device; or, the second cell is predefined; or, the second cell is determined by the apparatus 800.
  • the second cell is determined based on the first information
  • the first information includes at least one of the following: location information of the network device; location information of a network device adjacent to the network device; location information of a third cell included in the network device, the third cell being the cell where the device 800 is located; location information of a cell adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between each network device; co-site information between each cell; quasi-co-site information between reference signals; quasi-co-site information between channels; and positioning information.
  • the second cell is indicated by the network device through third indication information; the third indication information includes: the frequency point and/or cell identifier of the second cell.
  • the third indication information is configured under the first condition.
  • the first cell and the second cell belong to the same timing advance group and/or cell group.
  • the timing advance group and/or cell group is determined by the network device based on second information, and the second information includes at least one of the following: measurement results of the reference signal; positioning information; movement trajectory information of the device 800; location information of the network device; location information of adjacent network devices of the network device; location information of a third cell included in the network device, the third cell being the cell where the device 800 is located; location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; and, co-site information between various cells.
  • the second cell is activated by the apparatus 800 instructing the network device to do so; or, the second cell is activated by the apparatus 800 under a second condition.
  • the second condition includes at least one of the following: the deactivation timer of the second cell times out; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be started; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be restarted; the indication information for indicating the second cell is obtained; the reference signal of the second cell is obtained; uplink synchronization or downlink synchronization with the first cell is performed; the configuration of the first cell is obtained; and the first cell is activated active or needs to be activated.
  • FIG. 9 is a fourth schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application, which is applied to a network device.
  • the communication device 900 (hereinafter referred to as the device 900) includes:
  • the second sending unit 901 is configured to send a reference signal of the second cell or a downlink data signal of the first cell to the terminal device, where the reference signal or the downlink data signal is used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell; wherein the second cell is a cell used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell, and the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.
  • the type of the reference signal is any one of a synchronization signal block, a tracking reference signal, and a channel state information reference signal.
  • At least part of the configuration information of the reference signal used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell is indicated by the device 900; and/or, at least part of the configuration information of the reference signal used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell is read by the terminal device from the second cell.
  • the type of the reference signal is indicated by the apparatus 900 .
  • the second cell is indicated by the apparatus 900; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the terminal device or the apparatus 900; or, the second cell is predefined; or, the second cell is determined by the terminal device.
  • the second cell is determined based on the first information
  • the first information includes at least one of the following: location information of the device 900; location information of a network device adjacent to the device 900; location information of a third cell included in the device 900, the third cell being the cell where the terminal device is located; location information of a cell adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; co-site information between various cells; quasi-co-site information between reference signals; quasi-co-site information between channels; and positioning information.
  • the second cell is indicated by the apparatus 900 through third indication information; the third indication information includes: a frequency point and/or a cell identifier of the second cell.
  • the third indication information is configured under the first condition.
  • the first cell and the second cell belong to the same timing advance group and/or cell group.
  • the timing advance group and/or cell group is determined by the device 900 based on second information, and the second information includes at least one of the following: measurement results of reference signals; positioning information; movement trajectory information of the terminal device; location information of the device 900; location information of adjacent network devices of the device 900; location information of a third cell included in the device 900, where the third cell is where the terminal device is located; location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; and co-site information between various cells.
  • the second cell is activated by the terminal device as instructed by the apparatus 900; or, the second cell is activated by the terminal device under the second condition.
  • the second condition includes at least one of the following: the deactivation timer of the second cell times out; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be started; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be restarted; indication information for indicating the second cell is obtained; a reference signal of the second cell is obtained; uplink synchronization or downlink synchronization with the first cell is performed; the configuration of the first cell is obtained; the first cell is activated; and the first cell needs to be activated.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application, which is applied to a terminal device.
  • the communication device 1000 (hereinafter referred to as the device 1000) includes:
  • the second receiving unit 1001 is configured to receive a first media access control control unit MAC CE from a network device, where the first MAC CE is used to indicate a reporting method of a first CSI report with a sub-reporting configuration.
  • the first MAC CE includes indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report, and when the indications or positions of any of the sub-reporting configurations are set to activated, the first MAC CE instructs device 1000 to report the first CSI report.
  • the number of indications or positions of sub-reporting configurations set to be activated is greater than 1.
  • the first MAC CE is also used to instruct device 1000 to report the sub-report corresponding to the sub-reporting configuration in the first CSI report.
  • the first MAC CE is also used to indicate the reporting method of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration.
  • the first MAC CE includes indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the second CSI report, and when the indications or positions of any of the sub-reporting configurations are set to activated, the first MAC CE instructs device 1000 to report the second CSI report.
  • the number of indications or positions of sub-reporting configurations set to be activated is 1.
  • the length of the first MAC CE is fixed.
  • the first MAC CE is not used to indicate the reporting mode of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration.
  • the second CSI report is indicated by a second MAC CE.
  • the length of the first MAC CE is fixed or variable.
  • FIG. 11 is a sixth structural diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application, which is applied to a network device.
  • a communication device 1100 (hereinafter referred to as device 1100 ) includes:
  • the third sending unit 1101 is configured to send a first media access control control unit MAC CE to the terminal device, and the first MAC CE is used to indicate a reporting method of a first CSI report with a sub-reporting configuration.
  • the first MAC CE includes indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report, and when the indications or positions of any of the sub-reporting configurations are set to activated, the first MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the first CSI report.
  • the number of indications or positions of sub-reporting configurations set to be activated is greater than 1.
  • the first MAC CE is also used to instruct the terminal device to report the sub-reporting report corresponding to the sub-reporting configuration in the first CSI report.
  • the first MAC CE is also used to indicate the reporting method of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration.
  • the first MAC CE includes indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the second CSI report, and when the indications or positions of any of the sub-reporting configurations are set to activated, the first MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the second CSI report.
  • the length of the first MAC CE is fixed.
  • the first MAC CE is not used to indicate the reporting method of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration.
  • the second CSI report is indicated by a second MAC CE.
  • the length of the first MAC CE is fixed or variable.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application, which is applied to a terminal device.
  • the communication device 1200 (hereinafter referred to as the device 1200 ) includes:
  • the third receiving unit 1201 is configured to receive fifth indication information from the network device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation; or, the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation when the third condition is met; the first operation includes at least one of the following: the source cell of the device 1200 enters the network energy saving NES; the device 1200 executes the conditional switching CHO; the device 1200 starts to execute CHO; and the device 1200 evaluates the execution conditions of CHO.
  • the device 1200 also includes: a first processing unit, configured to, when the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation, execute CHO based on the fifth indication information; start executing CHO based on the fifth indication information; or, based on the fifth indication information, evaluate the execution condition of CHO; or, determine that the candidate target cell satisfies the CHO switching condition; or, when the first CHO event is satisfied, determine that the candidate target cell satisfies the CHO switching condition; or, when the first CHO event is satisfied, determine that the CHO execution condition is satisfied; or, when the first CHO event is satisfied, determine that the CHO event is satisfied; or, when the first CHO event is satisfied, determine that the candidate target cell is a triggered cell.
  • a first processing unit configured to, when the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation, execute CHO based on the fifth indication information; start executing CHO based on the fifth indication information; or, based on the fifth indication information, evaluate the execution condition of CHO; or, determine that the candidate
  • the device 1200 also includes: a second processing unit, configured to, when the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation, within a first time period, the device 1200 does not expect to receive new fifth indication information; or, within the first time period, the device 1200 does not expect to receive new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition; or, within the first time period, when the device 1200 receives new fifth indication information, ignore the new fifth indication information; or, within the first time period, when the device 1200 receives new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition, ignore the new fifth indication information.
  • a second processing unit configured to, when the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation, within a first time period, the device 1200 does not expect to receive new fifth indication information; or, within the first time period, the device 1200 does not expect to receive new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition; or, within the first time period, when the device 1200 receives new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition, ignore the new fifth indication information.
  • the starting moment of the first time length is the moment when the device 1200 receives the fifth indication information; or, the starting moment of the first time length is the moment when the device 1200 receives the fifth indication information that satisfies the third condition; or, the starting moment of the first time length is the result of adding the moment when the device 1200 receives the fifth indication information and the first offset; or, the starting moment of the first time length is the result of adding the moment when the device 1200 receives the fifth indication information that satisfies the third condition and the first offset.
  • the first duration is predefined, preconfigured, configured by the network device, based on the wireless resource control configuration, or included in the fifth indication information
  • the first offset is predefined, preconfigured, configured by the network device, based on the wireless resource control configuration, or included in the fifth indication information.
  • the device 1200 also includes: a third processing unit, configured to perform a second operation when the device 1200 receives new fifth indication information, or when the device 1200 receives new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition, the second operation includes at least one of the following: stop executing CHO; stop CHO evaluation; delete CHO configuration; indicate CHO stop to the network device; indicate switching stop to the network device; determine that the candidate target cell does not meet the CHO switching condition; determine that the CHO execution condition is not met; determine that the CHO event is not met; determine that the candidate target cell is not a triggered cell; and determine that the source cell leaves the NES.
  • a third processing unit configured to perform a second operation when the device 1200 receives new fifth indication information, or when the device 1200 receives new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition, the second operation includes at least one of the following: stop executing CHO; stop CHO evaluation; delete CHO configuration; indicate CHO stop to the network device; indicate switching stop to the network device; determine that the candidate target cell does
  • the apparatus 1200 further includes: a fourth processing unit configured to, after the first time period, receive a In the case of new fifth indication information, or in the case that the device 1200 receives new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition, a second operation is performed, and the second operation includes at least one of the following: stop executing CHO; stop CHO evaluation; delete CHO configuration; indicate CHO stop to the network device; indicate switching stop to the network device; determine that the candidate target cell does not meet the CHO switching condition; determine that the CHO execution condition is not met; determine that the CHO event is not met; determine that the candidate target cell is not a triggered cell; and determine that the source cell leaves the NES.
  • a fourth processing unit configured to, after the first time period, receive a In the case of new fifth indication information, or in the case that the device 1200 receives new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition, a second operation is performed, and the second operation includes at least one of the following: stop executing CHO; stop CHO evaluation; delete CHO configuration
  • the new fifth indication signal is used to indicate a third operation, or the new fifth indication signal is used to indicate the third operation when the third condition is not met;
  • the third operation includes at least one of the following: the source cell of the device 1200 leaves the NES; stops executing CHO; determines that the candidate target cell does not meet the CHO switching condition; determines that the CHO execution condition is not met; determines that the CHO event is not met; determines that the CHO execution condition is not available; determines that the candidate target cell is not a triggered cell; and stops CHO evaluation.
  • the third condition includes: the first bit in the fifth indication information is set to a specific value.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application, which is applied to a network device.
  • the communication device 1300 (hereinafter referred to as the device 1300 ) includes:
  • the fourth sending unit 1301 is configured to send fifth indication information to the terminal device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation; or, the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation when the third condition is met; the first operation includes at least one of the following: the source cell of the terminal device enters the network energy saving NES; the terminal device executes the conditional switching CHO; the terminal device starts to execute the conditional switching CHO; and the terminal device evaluates the execution conditions of CHO.
  • the apparatus 1200 further includes: a fifth sending unit, configured to send new fifth indication information to the terminal device, the new fifth indication information being used to indicate a third operation, or the new fifth indication information being used to indicate a third operation when the third condition is not met;
  • the third operation includes at least one of the following: the source cell of the terminal device leaves the NES; stops executing CHO; determines that the candidate target cell does not meet the CHO switching condition; determines that the CHO execution condition is not met; determines that the CHO event is not met; determines that the CHO execution condition is not available; determines that the candidate target cell is not a triggered cell; and stops CHO evaluation.
  • the third condition includes: the first bit in the fifth indication information is set to a specific value.
  • FIG14 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1400 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device may be a terminal device or a network device.
  • the communication device 1400 shown in FIG14 includes a processor 1410, which may call and run a computer program from a memory to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1400 may further include a memory 1420.
  • the processor 1410 may call and run a computer program from the memory 1420 to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the memory 1420 may be a separate device independent of the processor 1410 , or may be integrated into the processor 1410 .
  • the communication device 1400 may further include a transceiver 1430 , and the processor 1410 may control the transceiver 1430 to communicate with other devices, specifically, may send information or data to other devices, or receive information or data sent by other devices.
  • the transceiver 1430 may include a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the transceiver 1430 may further include an antenna, and the number of the antennas may be one or more.
  • the communication device 1400 may specifically be a network device of an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1400 may implement corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiment of the present application, which will not be described in detail here for the sake of brevity.
  • the communication device 1400 may specifically be a terminal device of an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1400 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in each method of the embodiment of the present application, which will not be described in detail here for the sake of brevity.
  • the transceiver 1430 can be the first acquisition unit 601 in the device 600, the first sending unit 701 in the device 700, the first receiving unit 801 in the device 800, the second sending unit 901 in the device 900, the second receiving unit 1001 in the device 1000, the third sending unit 1101 in the device 1100, the third receiving unit 1201 in the device 1200, or the fourth sending unit 1301 in the device 1300.
  • the processor 1410 may be, for example, the first acquisition unit 601 in the device 600 .
  • Fig. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip 1500 shown in Fig. 15 includes a processor 1510, and the processor 1510 can call and run a computer program from a memory to implement the method according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip 1500 may further include a memory 1520.
  • the processor 1510 may call and run a computer program from the memory 1520 to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the memory 1520 may be a separate device independent of the processor 1510 , or may be integrated into the processor 1510 .
  • the chip 1500 may further include an input interface 1530.
  • the processor 1510 may control the input interface 1530 to communicate with other devices or chips, and specifically, may obtain information or data sent by other devices or chips.
  • the chip 1500 may further include an output interface 1540.
  • the processor 1510 may control the output interface 1540 to communicate with other devices or chips, and specifically, may output information or data to other devices or chips.
  • the chip can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.
  • the chip can be applied to the terminal device in the embodiments of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.
  • the chip mentioned in the embodiments of the present application can also be called a system-level chip, a system chip, a chip system or a system-on-chip chip, etc.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer storage medium, which stores one or more programs.
  • the one or more programs can be executed by one or more processors to implement the method in the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG16 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system 1600 provided in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG16 , the communication system 1600 includes a terminal device 1610 and a network device 1620 .
  • the terminal device 1610 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the terminal device in the above method
  • the network device 1620 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the network device in the above method.
  • the terminal device 1610 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the terminal device in the above method
  • the network device 1620 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the network device in the above method.
  • the processor of the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities.
  • each step of the above method embodiment can be completed by the hardware integrated logic circuit in the processor or the instruction in the form of software.
  • the above processor can be a general processor, a digital signal processor (Digital Signal Processor, DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (Application Specific Integrated Circuit, ASIC), a field programmable gate array (Field Programmable Gate Array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • DSP Digital Signal Processor
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
  • the methods, steps and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed.
  • the general processor can be a microprocessor or the processor can also be any conventional processor, etc.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiment of the present application can be directly embodied as a hardware decoding processor to execute, or the hardware and software modules in the decoding processor can be executed.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as a random access memory, a flash memory, a read-only memory, a programmable read-only memory or an electrically erasable programmable memory, a register, etc.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application can be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or can include both volatile and non-volatile memories.
  • the non-volatile memory can be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), or a flash memory.
  • the volatile memory can be a random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM Direct Rambus RAM
  • SRAM Static RAM
  • DRAM Dynamic RAM
  • SDRAM Synchronous DRAM
  • DDR SDRAM Double Data Rate SDRAM
  • ESDRAM Enhanced SDRAM
  • SLDRAM Synchlink DRAM
  • DR RAM Direct Rambus RAM
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application may also be static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (synch link DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DR RAM), etc. That is to say, the memory in the embodiment of the present application is intended to include but not limited to these and any other suitable types of memory.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they are not repeated here.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be applied to the terminal device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they are not repeated here.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, including computer program instructions.
  • the computer program product can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program instructions enable the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they are not repeated here.
  • the computer program product can be applied to the terminal device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program instructions enable the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they are not repeated here.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program.
  • the computer program can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in the various methods in the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they are not described here.
  • the computer program can be applied to the terminal device in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program runs on the computer, the computer executes the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they are not repeated here.
  • the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
  • Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be essentially or partly embodied in the form of a software product that contributes to the prior art.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium and includes several instructions for a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in each embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), disk or optical disk, and other media that can store program codes.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

Provided in the embodiments of the present application are communication methods. A method comprises: acquiring a first timing advance (TA) between a terminal device and a first cell, wherein the first TA is used for the terminal device to implement uplink synchronization with the first cell, the first cell being a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission. The method specifies how to perform synchronization between a terminal device and a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.

Description

一种通信的方法、装置、设备、芯片和存储介质A communication method, device, equipment, chip and storage medium 技术领域Technical Field

本申请实施例涉及通信技术领域,具体涉及一种通信的方法、装置、设备、芯片和存储介质。The embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication technology, and specifically to a communication method, apparatus, device, chip and storage medium.

背景技术Background Art

SSB-less小区是不发送同步信号块(Synchronization Signal Block,SSB)的小区,或者说,是无SSB传输的小区。目前,在SSB-less小区为SSB-less辅小区(Secondary Cell,SCell)的情况下,尚不明确终端设备与SSB-less辅小区之间如何进行通信。An SSB-less cell is a cell that does not send a synchronization signal block (SSB), or in other words, a cell without SSB transmission. Currently, when an SSB-less cell is an SSB-less secondary cell (SCell), it is not clear how a terminal device communicates with the SSB-less secondary cell.

发明内容Summary of the invention

本申请实施例提供一种通信的方法、装置、设备、芯片和存储介质。Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, apparatus, device, chip, and storage medium.

第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信的方法,应用于终端设备,该方法包括:获取终端设备与第一小区之间的第一定时提前TA,第一TA用于终端设备与第一小区执行上行同步;其中,第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method applied to a terminal device, the method comprising: obtaining a first timing advance TA between the terminal device and a first cell, the first TA being used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell; wherein the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.

第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信的方法,应用于网络设备,该方法包括:向终端设备发送第四指示信息,第四指示信息包括终端设备与第一小区之间的第一定时提前TA,和/或,终端设备与第二小区之间的第二TA,第二小区是用于终端设备与第一小区执行上行同步的小区,第二TA用于确定第一TA,第一TA用于终端设备与第一小区执行上行同步;其中,第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which is applied to a network device, the method comprising: sending fourth indication information to a terminal device, the fourth indication information comprising a first timing advance TA between the terminal device and a first cell, and/or a second TA between the terminal device and a second cell, the second cell being a cell used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell, the second TA being used to determine the first TA, and the first TA being used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell; wherein the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.

第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信的方法,应用于终端设备,该方法包括:接收第二小区的参考信号或第一小区的下行数据信号,参考信号或下行数据信号用于终端设备与第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时;其中,第二小区是用于终端设备与第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时的小区,第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, applied to a terminal device, the method comprising: receiving a reference signal of a second cell or a downlink data signal of a first cell, the reference signal or the downlink data signal being used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell; wherein the second cell is a cell used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell, and the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.

第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信的方法,应用于网络设备,该方法包括:向终端设备发送第二小区的参考信号或第一小区的下行数据信号,参考信号或下行数据信号用于终端设备与第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时;其中,第二小区是用于终端设备与第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时的小区,第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, applied to a network device, the method comprising: sending a reference signal of a second cell or a downlink data signal of a first cell to a terminal device, the reference signal or the downlink data signal being used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell; wherein the second cell is a cell used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell, and the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.

第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信的方法,应用于终端设备,该方法包括:接收来自网络设备的第一媒体接入控制控制单元MAC CE,第一MAC CE用于指示有子上报配置的第一CSI报告的上报方式。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, applied to a terminal device, the method comprising: receiving a first media access control control unit MAC CE from a network device, the first MAC CE being used to indicate a reporting method of a first CSI report with a sub-reporting configuration.

第六方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信的方法,应用于网络设备,该方法包括:向终端设备发送第一媒体接入控制控制单元MAC CE,第一MAC CE用于指示有子上报配置的第一CSI报告的上报方式。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, applied to a network device, the method comprising: sending a first media access control control unit MAC CE to a terminal device, the first MAC CE being used to indicate a reporting method of a first CSI report with a sub-reporting configuration.

第七方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信的方法,应用于终端设备,该方法包括:接收来自网络设备的第五指示信息;其中,第五指示信息用于指示第一操作;或者,第五指示信息在满足第三条件的情况下用于指示第一操作;第一操作包括以下至少之一:终端设备的源小区进入网络节能NES;终端设备执行或开始执行条件切换CHO;以及,终端设备评估CHO的执行条件。In the seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, applied to a terminal device, the method comprising: receiving fifth indication information from a network device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate a first operation; or, the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation when a third condition is met; the first operation comprises at least one of the following: a source cell of the terminal device enters a network energy saving NES; the terminal device executes or starts to execute a conditional switching CHO; and the terminal device evaluates the execution conditions of the CHO.

第八方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信的方法,应用于网络设备,该方法包括:向终端设备发送第五指示信息;其中,第五指示信息用于指示第一操作;或者,第五指示信息在满足第三条件的情况下用于指示第一操作;第一操作包括以下至少之一:终端设备的源小区进入网络节能NES;终端设备执行条件切换CHO;终端设备开始执行CHO;以及,终端设备评估CHO的执行条件。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, applied to a network device, the method comprising: sending a fifth indication information to a terminal device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate a first operation; or, the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation when a third condition is met; the first operation comprises at least one of the following: a source cell of the terminal device enters a network energy saving NES; the terminal device executes a conditional switching CHO; the terminal device starts to execute CHO; and the terminal device evaluates the execution conditions of CHO.

第九方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信的装置,该装置包括:第一获取单元,被配置为获取装置与第一小区之间的第一定时提前TA,第一TA用于装置与第一小区执行上行同步;其中,第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。In the ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which includes: a first acquisition unit, configured to acquire a first timing advance TA between the device and a first cell, the first TA being used for the device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell; wherein the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.

第十方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信的装置,该装置包括:第一发送单元,被配置为向终端设 备发送第四指示信息,第四指示信息包括终端设备与第一小区之间的第一定时提前TA,和/或,终端设备与第二小区之间的第二TA,第二小区是用于终端设备与第一小区执行上行同步的小区;第二TA用于确定第一TA,第一TA用于终端设备与第一小区执行上行同步;其中,第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。In a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, the device comprising: a first sending unit, configured to send a first signal to a terminal device; The fourth indication information is prepared to be sent, the fourth indication information includes a first timing advance TA between the terminal device and the first cell, and/or a second TA between the terminal device and the second cell, the second cell is a cell used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell; the second TA is used to determine the first TA, and the first TA is used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell; wherein the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.

第十一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信的装置,该装置包括:第一接收单元,被配置为接收第二小区的参考信号或第一小区的下行数据信号,参考信号或下行数据信号用于装置与第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时;其中,第二小区是用于装置与第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时的小区,第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。In the eleventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which includes: a first receiving unit, configured to receive a reference signal of a second cell or a downlink data signal of a first cell, the reference signal or the downlink data signal is used for the device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell; wherein the second cell is a cell used for the device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell, and the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.

第十二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信的装置,该装置包括:第二发送单元,被配置为向终端设备发送第二小区的参考信号或第一小区的下行数据信号,参考信号或下行数据信号用于终端设备与第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时;其中,第二小区是用于终端设备与第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时的小区,第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。In the twelfth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which includes: a second sending unit, configured to send a reference signal of a second cell or a downlink data signal of a first cell to a terminal device, the reference signal or the downlink data signal is used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell; wherein the second cell is a cell used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell, and the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.

第十三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信的装置,该装置包括:第二接收单元,被配置为接收来自网络设备的第一媒体接入控制控制单元MAC CE,第一MAC CE用于指示有子配置的第一SCI报告的上报方式。In the thirteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which includes: a second receiving unit, configured to receive a first media access control control unit MAC CE from a network device, the first MAC CE being used to indicate a reporting method of a first SCI report with a sub-configuration.

第十四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信的装置,该装置包括:第三发送单元,被配置为向终端设备发送第一媒体接入控制控制单元MAC CE,第一MAC CE用于指示有子配置的第一SCI报告的上报方式。In the fourteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which includes: a third sending unit, configured to send a first media access control control unit MAC CE to a terminal device, the first MAC CE being used to indicate a reporting method of a first SCI report with a sub-configuration.

第十五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信的装置,该装置包括:第三接收单元,被配置为接收来自网络设备的第五指示信息;其中,第五指示信息用于指示第一操作;或者,第五指示信息在满足第一条件的情况下用于指示第一操作;第一操作包括以下至少之一:该装置的源小区进入网络节能NES;该装置执行或开始执行条件切换CHO;以及,该装置评估CHO的执行条件。In the fifteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which includes: a third receiving unit, configured to receive fifth indication information from a network device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate a first operation; or, the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation when a first condition is met; the first operation includes at least one of the following: a source cell of the device enters a network energy saving NES; the device executes or starts to execute a conditional switching CHO; and the device evaluates the execution conditions of CHO.

第十六方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信的装置,该装置包括:第四发送单元,被配置为向终端设备发送第五指示信息;其中,第五指示信息用于指示第一操作;或者,第五指示信息在满足第一条件的情况下用于指示第一操作;第一操作包括以下至少之一:终端设备的源小区进入网络节能NES;终端设备执行或开始执行条件切换CHO;以及,终端设备评估CHO的执行条件。In the sixteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, comprising: a fourth sending unit, configured to send fifth indication information to a terminal device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate a first operation; or, the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation when a first condition is met; the first operation includes at least one of the following: a source cell of the terminal device enters the network energy saving NES; the terminal device executes or starts to execute conditional switching CHO; and the terminal device evaluates the execution conditions of CHO.

第十七方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信设备,该通信设备包括存储器和处理器;其中,存储器,用于存储计算机可执行指令;处理器,与该存储器连接,用于通过执行该计算机可执行指令,实现如第一方面至第八方面中任一方面所述的方法。In the seventeenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, which includes a memory and a processor; wherein the memory is used to store computer-executable instructions; the processor is connected to the memory, and is used to implement the method described in any one of the first to eighth aspects by executing the computer-executable instructions.

第十八方面,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片。该芯片包括:处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有该芯片的设备执行如第一方面至第八方面中任一方面所述的方法。In an eighteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, which includes: a processor, configured to call and run a computer program from a memory, so that a device equipped with the chip executes the method described in any one of the first to eighth aspects.

第十九方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,计算机程序被至少一个处理器执行时实现如第一方面至第八方面中任一方面所述的方法。In the nineteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, which stores a computer program. When the computer program is executed by at least one processor, it implements the method described in any one of the first to eighth aspects.

本申请实施例所提供的一种通信的方法、装置、芯片、设备和存储介质,明确了终端设备与无SSB传输的辅小区之间如何进行同步或定时。A communication method, apparatus, chip, device and storage medium provided in the embodiments of the present application clarify how to synchronize or time a terminal device with a secondary cell without SSB transmission.

附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

此处所说明的附图用来提供对本申请的进一步理解,构成本申请的一部分,本申请的示意性实施例及其说明用于解释本申请,并不构成对本申请的不当限定。在附图中:The drawings described herein are used to provide a further understanding of the present application and constitute a part of the present application. The illustrative embodiments of the present application and their descriptions are used to explain the present application and do not constitute an improper limitation on the present application. In the drawings:

图1是本申请实施例的一个应用场景的示意图;FIG1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application;

图2是本申请实施例提供的一种通信的方法的流程示意图一;FIG2 is a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application;

图3是本申请实施例提供的一种通信的方法的流程示意图二;FIG3 is a second flow chart of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图4是本申请实施例提供的一种通信的方法的流程示意图三;FIG4 is a third flow chart of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图5是本申请实施例提供的一种通信的方法的流程示意图四;FIG5 is a fourth flow chart of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图6是本申请实施例提供的一种通信的装置的结构示意图一;FIG6 is a first structural diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图7是本申请实施例提供的一种通信的装置的结构示意图二;FIG7 is a second structural diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图8是本申请实施例提供的一种通信的装置的结构示意图三;FIG8 is a third structural diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图9是本申请实施例提供的一种通信的装置的结构示意图四;FIG9 is a fourth structural diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图10是本申请实施例提供的一种通信的装置的结构示意图五;FIG10 is a fifth structural diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图11是本申请实施例提供的一种通信的装置的结构示意图六;FIG11 is a sixth structural diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图12是本申请实施例提供的一种通信的装置的结构示意图七; FIG12 is a schematic diagram of a structure of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application;

图13是本申请实施例提供的一种通信的装置的结构示意图八;FIG13 is a schematic diagram of a structure of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application;

图14是本申请实施例提供的一种通信设备示意性结构图;FIG14 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application;

图15是本申请实施例的芯片的示意性结构图;FIG15 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application;

图16是本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的示意性框图。FIG16 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system provided in an embodiment of the present application.

具体实施方式DETAILED DESCRIPTION

下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述,显然,所描述的实施例是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。基于本申请中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本申请保护的范围。The following will describe the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application in conjunction with the drawings in the embodiments of the present application. Obviously, the described embodiments are part of the embodiments of the present application, not all of the embodiments. Based on the embodiments in the present application, all other embodiments obtained by ordinary technicians in this field without creative work are within the scope of protection of this application.

图1是本申请实施例的一个应用场景的示意图。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the present application.

如图1所示,通信系统100可以包括终端设备110和网络设备120。网络设备120可以通过空口与终端设备110通信。终端设备110和网络设备120之间支持多业务传输。As shown in Fig. 1, the communication system 100 may include a terminal device 110 and a network device 120. The network device 120 may communicate with the terminal device 110 via an air interface. The terminal device 110 and the network device 120 support multi-service transmission.

应理解,本申请实施例仅以通信系统100进行示例性说明,但本申请实施例不限定于此。也就是说,本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统、LTE时分双工(Time Division Duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信系统(Universal Mobile Telecommunication System,UMTS)、物联网(Internet of Things,IoT)系统、窄带物联网(Narrow Band Internet of Things,NB-IoT)系统、增强的机器类型通信(enhanced Machine-Type Communications,eMTC)系统、5G通信系统(也称为新无线(New Radio,NR)通信系统)、B5G通信系统、6G通信系统,或未来的通信系统等。It should be understood that the embodiments of the present application are only exemplified by the communication system 100, but the embodiments of the present application are not limited thereto. That is to say, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, LTE Time Division Duplex (TDD), Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS), Internet of Things (IoT) system, Narrow Band Internet of Things (NB-IoT) system, enhanced Machine-Type Communications (eMTC) system, 5G communication system (also known as New Radio (NR) communication system), B5G communication system, 6G communication system, or future communication system.

在图1所示的通信系统100中,网络设备120可以是与终端设备110通信的接入网设备。接入网设备可以为特定的地理区域提供通信覆盖,并且可以与位于该覆盖区域内的终端设备110(例如UE)进行通信。In the communication system 100 shown in Fig. 1, the network device 120 may be an access network device that communicates with the terminal device 110. The access network device may provide communication coverage for a specific geographical area, and may communicate with the terminal device 110 (eg, UE) located in the coverage area.

网络设备120可以是长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)系统中的演进型基站(Evolutional Node B,eNB或eNodeB),或者是下一代无线接入网(Next Generation Radio Access Network,NG RAN)设备,或者是NR系统中的基站(gNB),或者是云无线接入网络(Cloud Radio Access Network,CRAN)中的无线控制器,或者该网络设备120可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、可穿戴设备、集线器、交换机、网桥、路由器,或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(Public Land Mobile Network,PLMN)中的网络设备等。The network device 120 can be an evolved base station (Evolutional Node B, eNB or eNodeB) in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, or a Next Generation Radio Access Network (NG RAN) device, or a base station (gNB) in an NR system, or a wireless controller in a Cloud Radio Access Network (CRAN), or the network device 120 can be a relay station, an access point, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device, a hub, a switch, a bridge, a router, or a network device in a future evolved Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN), etc.

终端设备110可以是任意终端设备,其包括但不限于与网络设备120或其它终端设备采用有线或者无线连接的终端设备。The terminal device 110 may be any terminal device, including but not limited to a terminal device connected to the network device 120 or other terminal devices by wire or wireless connection.

例如,所述终端设备110可以指接入终端、用户设备(User Equipment,UE)、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。接入终端可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(Session Initiation Protocol,SIP)电话、IoT设备、卫星手持终端、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备、5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进网络中的终端设备等。For example, the terminal device 110 may refer to an access terminal, a user equipment (UE), a user unit, a user station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, a terminal, a wireless communication device, a user agent, or a user device. The access terminal may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, an IoT device, a satellite handheld terminal, a Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), a handheld device with wireless communication function, a computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, a terminal device in a 5G network, or a terminal device in a future evolution network, etc.

终端设备110可以用于设备到设备(Device to Device,D2D)的通信。The terminal device 110 can be used for device to device (Device to Device, D2D) communication.

无线通信系统100还可以包括与网络设备120进行通信的核心网设备130,该核心网设备130可以是5G核心网(5G Core,5GC)设备,例如,接入与移动性管理功能(Access and Mobility Management Function,AMF),又例如,认证服务器功能(Authentication Server Function,AUSF),又例如,用户面功能(User Plane Function,UPF),又例如,会话管理功能(Session Management Function,SMF)。在一些实施例中,核心网络设备130也可以是LTE网络的分组核心演进(Evolved Packet Core,EPC)设备,例如,会话管理功能+核心网络的数据网关(Session Management Function+Core Packet Gateway,SMF+PGW-C)设备。应理解,SMF+PGW-C可以同时实现SMF和PGW-C所能实现的功能。在网络演进过程中,上述核心网设备也有可能叫其它名字,或者通过对核心网的功能进行划分形成新的网络实体,对此本申请实施例不做限制。The wireless communication system 100 may further include a core network device 130 for communicating with the network device 120. The core network device 130 may be a 5G core network (5G Core, 5GC) device, such as an access and mobility management function (Access and Mobility Management Function, AMF), and another example, an authentication server function (Authentication Server Function, AUSF), and another example, a user plane function (User Plane Function, UPF), and another example, a session management function (Session Management Function, SMF). In some embodiments, the core network device 130 may also be an evolved packet core (Evolved Packet Core, EPC) device of the LTE network, such as a session management function + core network data gateway (Session Management Function+Core Packet Gateway, SMF+PGW-C) device. It should be understood that SMF+PGW-C can simultaneously implement the functions that SMF and PGW-C can implement. During the network evolution process, the above-mentioned core network equipment may also be called other names, or new network entities may be formed by dividing the functions of the core network, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.

通信系统100中的各个功能单元之间还可以通过下一代网络(next generation,NG)接口建立连接实现通信。The various functional units in the communication system 100 can also establish connections and achieve communication through the next generation network (NG) interface.

例如,终端设备通过NR接口与接入网设备建立空口连接,用于传输用户面数据和控制面信令;终端设备可以通过NG接口1(简称N1)与AMF建立控制面信令连接;接入网设备例如下一代无线接入基站(gNB),可以通过NG接口3(简称N3)与UPF建立用户面数据连接;接入网设备可以通过NG 接口2(简称N2)与AMF建立控制面信令连接;UPF可以通过NG接口4(简称N4)与SMF建立控制面信令连接;UPF可以通过NG接口6(简称N6)与数据网络交互用户面数据;AMF可以通过NG接口11(简称N11)与SMF建立控制面信令连接;SMF可以通过NG接口7(简称N7)与PCF建立控制面信令连接。For example, the terminal device establishes an air interface connection with the access network device through the NR interface for transmitting user plane data and control plane signaling; the terminal device can establish a control plane signaling connection with the AMF through the NG interface 1 (referred to as N1); the access network device, such as the next generation wireless access base station (gNB), can establish a user plane data connection with the UPF through the NG interface 3 (referred to as N3); the access network device can establish a control plane signaling connection with the AMF through the NG interface 1 (referred to as N1); the access network device, such as the next generation wireless access base station (gNB), can establish a user plane data connection with the UPF through the NG interface 3 (referred to as N3); Interface 2 (N2 for short) establishes a control plane signaling connection with AMF; UPF can establish a control plane signaling connection with SMF through NG interface 4 (N4 for short); UPF can exchange user plane data with the data network through NG interface 6 (N6 for short); AMF can establish a control plane signaling connection with SMF through NG interface 11 (N11 for short); SMF can establish a control plane signaling connection with PCF through NG interface 7 (N7 for short).

图1示例性地示出了一个网络设备、一个核心网设备和两个终端设备,可选地,该无线通信系统100可以包括多个网络设备并且每个网络设备的覆盖范围内可以包括其它数量的终端设备,本申请实施例对此不做限定。FIG1 exemplarily shows a network device, a core network device and two terminal devices. Optionally, the wireless communication system 100 may include multiple network devices and each network device may include other number of terminal devices within its coverage area, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.

需要说明的是,图1只是以示例的形式示意本申请所适用的系统,当然,本申请实施例所示的方法还可以适用于其它系统。此外,本文中术语“系统”和“网络”在本文中常被可互换使用。本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。还应理解,在本申请的实施例中提到的“指示”可以是直接指示,也可以是间接指示,还可以是表示具有关联关系。举例说明,A指示B,可以表示A直接指示B,例如B可以通过A获取;也可以表示A间接指示B,例如A指示C,B可以通过C获取;还可以表示A和B之间具有关联关系。还应理解,在本申请的实施例中提到的“对应”可表示两者之间具有直接对应或间接对应的关系,也可以表示两者之间具有关联关系,也可以是指示与被指示、配置与被配置等关系。还应理解,在本申请的实施例中提到的“预定义”或“预定义规则”可以通过在设备(例如,包括终端设备和网络设备)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现,本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定。比如预定义可以是指协议中定义的。还应理解,本申请实施例中,所述“协议”可以指通信领域的标准协议,例如可以包括LTE协议、NR协议以及应用于未来的通信系统中的相关协议,本申请对此不做限定。It should be noted that FIG. 1 is only an example of the system to which the present application is applicable. Of course, the method shown in the embodiment of the present application can also be applied to other systems. In addition, the terms "system" and "network" are often used interchangeably in this article. The term "and/or" in this article is only a description of the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships. For example, A and/or B can represent: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. In addition, the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or" relationship. It should also be understood that the "indication" mentioned in the embodiment of the present application can be a direct indication, an indirect indication, or an indication of an association relationship. For example, A indicates B, which can mean that A directly indicates B, for example, B can be obtained through A; it can also mean that A indirectly indicates B, for example, A indicates C, B can be obtained through C; it can also mean that A and B have an association relationship. It should also be understood that the "correspondence" mentioned in the embodiment of the present application can mean that there is a direct or indirect correspondence relationship between the two, or it can mean that there is an association relationship between the two, or it can mean that there is an indication and being indicated, configuration and being configured, etc. It should also be understood that the "predefined" or "predefined rules" mentioned in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information in devices (for example, including terminal devices and network devices), and the present application does not limit its specific implementation method. For example, predefined may refer to the definition in the protocol. It should also be understood that in the embodiments of the present application, the "protocol" may refer to a standard protocol in the field of communications, such as LTE protocols, NR protocols, and related protocols used in future communication systems, and the present application does not limit this.

为便于理解本申请实施例的技术方案,以下对本申请实施例的相关技术进行说明,以下相关技术作为可选方案与本申请实施例的技术方案可以进行任意结合,其均属于本申请实施例的保护范围。To facilitate understanding of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the relevant technologies of the embodiments of the present application are described below. The following related technologies can be arbitrarily combined with the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application as optional solutions, and they all belong to the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application.

1、5G的主要应用场景1. Main application scenarios of 5G

随着人们对速率、延迟、高速移动性、能效的追求以及未来生活中业务的多样性、复杂性,为此第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd Generation Partnership Project,3GPP)国际标准组织开始研发5G。5G的主要应用场景为:增强移动超宽带(enhanced Mobile Broadband,eMBB)、低时延高可靠通信(Ultra-Reliable Low-Latency Communications,URLLC)、大规模机器类通信(massive Machine-Type Communications,mMTC)。As people pursue higher speed, latency, high-speed mobility, energy efficiency, and the diversity and complexity of services in future life, the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) international standard organization has begun to develop 5G. The main application scenarios of 5G are: enhanced mobile broadband (eMBB), ultra-reliable low-latency communications (URLLC), and massive machine-type communications (mMTC).

一方面,eMBB仍然以用户获得多媒体内容、服务和数据为目标,其需求增长十分迅速。另一方面,由于eMBB可能部署在不同的场景中,例如室内,市区,农村等,其能力和需求的差别也比较大,所以不能一概而论,必须结合具体的部署场景详细分析。URLLC的典型应用包括:工业自动化、电力自动化、远程医疗操作(手术)、交通安全保障等。mMTC的典型特点包括:高连接密度、小数据量、时延不敏感业务、模块的低成本和长使用寿命等。On the one hand, eMBB still aims at enabling users to obtain multimedia content, services and data, and its demand is growing rapidly. On the other hand, since eMBB may be deployed in different scenarios, such as indoors, in urban areas, and in rural areas, its capabilities and requirements vary greatly, so it cannot be generalized and must be analyzed in detail in combination with specific deployment scenarios. Typical applications of URLLC include: industrial automation, power automation, remote medical operations (surgery), traffic safety assurance, etc. Typical features of mMTC include: high connection density, small data volume, latency-insensitive services, low cost of modules and long service life, etc.

2、5G网络环境中的无线资源控制(Radio Resource Contro,RRC)状态2. Radio Resource Control (RRC) Status in 5G Network Environment

NR可以独立部署,5G网络环境中为了达到降低空口信令、快速恢复无线连接和快速恢复数据业务的目的,定义了一个新的RRC状态,即RRC非激活(RRC_INACTIVE)状态。这种状态有别于RRC空闲(RRC_IDLE)状态和RRC激活(RRC_ACTIVE)状态。以下对5G网络环境中的三种RRC状态进行说明:NR can be deployed independently. In order to reduce air interface signaling, quickly restore wireless connections and quickly restore data services in the 5G network environment, a new RRC state is defined, namely the RRC inactive (RRC_INACTIVE) state. This state is different from the RRC idle (RRC_IDLE) state and the RRC active (RRC_ACTIVE) state. The following describes the three RRC states in the 5G network environment:

1)RRC_IDLE状态:移动性为基于UE的小区选择重选,寻呼由核心网(Core Network,CN)发起,寻呼区域由CN配置。基站侧不存在UE接入层(Access Stratum,AS)上下文,不存在RRC连接。1) RRC_IDLE state: Mobility is based on UE cell selection and reselection, paging is initiated by the core network (CN), and the paging area is configured by the CN. There is no UE access stratum (AS) context on the base station side, and there is no RRC connection.

2)RRC_CONNECTED状态:存在RRC连接,基站和UE存在UE AS上下文。网络侧知道UE的位置是具体小区级别的。移动性是网络侧控制的移动性。UE和基站之间可以传输单播数据。2)RRC_CONNECTED state: There is an RRC connection, and the base station and the UE have a UE AS context. The network knows the location of the UE at the specific cell level. The mobility is controlled by the network. Unicast data can be transmitted between the UE and the base station.

3)RRC_INACTIVE状态:移动性为基于UE的小区选择重选,存在CN-NR之间的连接,UE AS上下文存在某个基站上,寻呼由无线接入网(Radio Access Network,RAN)触发,基于RAN的寻呼区域由RAN管理,网络侧知道UE的位置是基于RAN的寻呼区域级别的。3)RRC_INACTIVE state: Mobility is based on UE cell selection and reselection, there is a connection between CN-NR, the UE AS context exists on a base station, paging is triggered by the Radio Access Network (RAN), and the RAN-based paging area is managed by the RAN. The network side knows the UE's location based on the RAN paging area level.

3、网络节能项目。3. Network energy-saving project.

能源消耗已成为运营商运营成本的重要组成部分。根据报告,移动网络的能源成本约占运营商总成本的23%。大部分能源消耗来自于无线电接入网络,特别是有源天线单元(Active Antenna Unit,AAU),而数据中心和光纤传输只占较小的份额。功耗包括两种:Energy consumption has become an important part of operators' operating costs. According to reports, the energy cost of mobile networks accounts for about 23% of operators' total costs. Most of the energy consumption comes from the radio access network, especially the active antenna unit (AAU), while data centers and fiber optic transmission account for only a small share. Power consumption includes two types:

1)动态部分:比如数据传输/接收时的消耗1) Dynamic part: such as consumption during data transmission/reception

2)静态部分:比如保持必要的无线接入设备的操作的消耗,即使此时没有持续的数据传输/接收。 2) Static part: such as the consumption to maintain the operation of necessary wireless access equipment, even when there is no continuous data transmission/reception.

该研究不仅应评估潜在的网络能源消耗收益,而且还应评估和平衡对网络和用户性能的影响。例如本研究不应对一些关键性能指标(Key Performance Indicator,KPI)有特别大的影响,如:频谱效率、容量、用户感知吞吐量(User Packet Throughput,UPT)、延迟、UE功耗、复杂性、切换性能、呼叫下降率、初始访问性能等。The study should not only evaluate the potential network energy consumption benefits, but also evaluate and balance the impact on network and user performance. For example, the study should not have a particularly large impact on some key performance indicators (KPIs), such as: spectrum efficiency, capacity, user perceived throughput (User Packet Throughput, UPT), latency, UE power consumption, complexity, handover performance, call drop rate, initial access performance, etc.

4、SSB-less小区4. SSB-less cells

目前,SCell可以为不发送SSB的小区,此小区和特殊小区(Special Cell,SpCell)或其他SCell为频段内(intra-band)的小区。作为SSB-less的SCell,UE与其同步,目前是通过SpCell或其他SCell同步的。Currently, SCell can be a cell that does not send SSB. This cell and special cell (SpCell) or other SCell are intra-band cells. As an SSB-less SCell, the UE synchronizes with it, and currently synchronizes with SpCell or other SCell.

在网络节能项目中,考虑将频段内的场景扩展到频段间(inter-band)的场景,即SSB-less的SCell为与主小区(Primary Cell,PCell)或其他SCell跨频段(inter-band)的小区。可能的场景如下:In the network energy saving project, we consider extending the intra-band scenario to the inter-band scenario, that is, the SSB-less SCell is an inter-band cell with the primary cell (PCell) or other SCells. Possible scenarios are as follows:

场景1:SCell无SSB传输,有跟踪参考信号(Tracking Reference Signal,TRS)传输。Scenario 1: SCell has no SSB transmission but has Tracking Reference Signal (TRS) transmission.

场景2a:SCell无SSB传输,并且没有任何其他下行(Downlink,DL)传输,但在网络(NW)侧具有上行(Uplink,UL)接收。Scenario 2a: SCell has no SSB transmission and no other downlink (DL) transmission, but has uplink (UL) reception on the network (NW) side.

场景2:SCell无SSB传输,并且没有TRS传输。Scenario 2: SCell has no SSB transmission and no TRS transmission.

其中,场景1在R18支持。场景2a是R18不支持,但可能R19支持的场景。针对场景1,如何DL同步,R4的结论如下。但对于场景2a尚未有结论。针对场景1的结论包括:Scenario 1 is supported in R18. Scenario 2a is not supported in R18 but may be supported in R19. Regarding Scenario 1, R4 has the following conclusions on how to perform DL synchronization. However, there is no conclusion for Scenario 2a. The conclusions for Scenario 1 include:

为了实现SSB-less SCell操作,RAN4同意引入从NW向UE的指示,以指示哪个小区是参考小区。如果没有提供指示,RAN4则将“默认小区(by default cell)”定义为参考小区。参考小区意味着它是SSB-less的SCell的定时参考(timing reference)和自动增益控制(Automatic Gain Control,AGC)源。如果参考小区是SCell或辅助主小区(Primary Secondary Cell,PSCell),则应为激活的SCell或激活的PSCell。RAN4还就SSB-less SCell达成了协议。如果UE在SCell(FrequencyInfoDL)中没有被提供SSB配置(absoluteFrequencySSB),也没有被提供用于该SCell的SSB测量定时配置(SS/PBCH block measurement timing configuration,SMTC),则该小区被视为SSB-less SCell。To enable SSB-less SCell operation, RAN4 agreed to introduce an indication from the NW to the UE to indicate which cell is the reference cell. If no indication is provided, RAN4 defines "by default cell" as the reference cell. Reference cell means that it is the timing reference and Automatic Gain Control (AGC) source for the SSB-less SCell. If the reference cell is a SCell or a Primary Secondary Cell (PSCell), it should be the activated SCell or the activated PSCell. RAN4 also reached an agreement on SSB-less SCell. If the UE is not provided with the SSB configuration (absoluteFrequencySSB) in the SCell (FrequencyInfoDL) and the SSB measurement timing configuration (SS/PBCH block measurement timing configuration, SMTC) for that SCell, the cell is considered to be an SSB-less SCell.

上面对本申请中涉及到的相关技术/术语做了简单说明,下文实施例中不再赘述。The above briefly describes the related technologies/terms involved in this application, which will not be repeated in the following embodiments.

相关技术中,SSB-less小区可以作为Scell,也可以作为独立工作的小区。那么当SSB-less小区为SSB-less SCell的情况下,终端设备与SSB-less SCell如何工作,如同步,是目前亟需解决的问题。In related technologies, an SSB-less cell can be used as an Scell or as an independently working cell. So when an SSB-less cell is an SSB-less SCell, how the terminal device works with the SSB-less SCell, such as synchronization, is a problem that needs to be solved urgently.

鉴于此,本申请提供一种通信的方法,在该方法中,终端设备可获取与第一小区之间的定时提前(Timing Advance,TA),进而该第一TA可用于终端设备与第一小区执行上行同步。其中,第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区(即SSB-less SCell)。In view of this, the present application provides a communication method, in which a terminal device can obtain a timing advance (TA) with a first cell, and then the first TA can be used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell. The first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission (ie, SSB-less SCell).

需要说明的是,本申请实施例中的“TA”还可以替换为“TA提前量”或“UL定时同步”。“执行上行同步”还可以替换为“执行定时提前”或“执行UL定时”。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, "TA" may also be replaced by "TA advance" or "UL timing synchronization". "Performing uplink synchronization" may also be replaced by "performing timing advance" or "performing UL timing".

还需要说明的是,本申请实施例中提及的“终端设备与第一小区之间的第一TA”,还可以简称为“第一小区的TA”;本申请实施例中提及的“终端设备与第二小区之间的第二TA”,还可以简称为“第二小区的TA”。It should also be noted that the "first TA between the terminal device and the first cell" mentioned in the embodiment of the present application can also be referred to as the "TA of the first cell"; the "second TA between the terminal device and the second cell" mentioned in the embodiment of the present application can also be referred to as the "TA of the second cell".

为便于理解本申请实施例的技术方案,以下通过具体实施例详述本申请的技术方案。以上相关技术作为可选方案与本申请实施例的技术方案可以进行任意结合,其均属于本申请实施例的保护范围。本申请实施例包括以下内容中的至少部分内容。To facilitate understanding of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the technical solutions of the present application are described in detail below through specific embodiments. The above related technologies can be combined arbitrarily with the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application as optional solutions, and they all belong to the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application. The embodiments of the present application include at least part of the following contents.

图2示出了本申请实施例提供的一种通信的方法,该方法可以包括:FIG. 2 shows a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application, which may include:

S201,终端设备获取该终端设备与第一小区之间的第一TA,第一TA用于该终端设备与第一小区执行UL同步;其中,第一小区为无SSB传输的辅小区。S201, the terminal device obtains a first TA between the terminal device and a first cell, where the first TA is used for the terminal device to perform UL synchronization with the first cell; wherein the first cell is a secondary cell without SSB transmission.

在本实施例中,终端设备可获取与第一小区之间的第一TA,进而可基于该第一TA与第一小区执行UL同步。In this embodiment, the terminal device may acquire a first TA with the first cell, and then may perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the first TA.

作为示例,下面介绍终端设备获取第一TA的几种可能的实现方式。As examples, several possible implementations of a terminal device acquiring the first TA are described below.

在第一种可能的实现方式中,第一TA可包含在来自网络设备的第一指示信息中。其中,第一指示信息是针对第一请求信息的响应,第一请求信息用于请求第一TA,或者说,第一请求信息是终端设备向网络设备发送的用于请求第一TA的请求信息。In a first possible implementation, the first TA may be included in the first indication information from the network device, wherein the first indication information is a response to the first request information, and the first request information is used to request the first TA, or in other words, the first request information is request information sent by the terminal device to the network device to request the first TA.

示例性地,第一指示信息例如可以为以下任一项:随机接入响应(Random Access Response,RAR);定时提前命令(Timing Advance Command,TAC)媒体接入控制控制单元(MAC Control Element,MAC CE);以及,携带第一TA的DL消息。其中,携带第一TA的DL消息,例如可以为除RAR和TAC MAC CE之外的某一种DL消息。Exemplarily, the first indication information may be, for example, any one of the following: a random access response (Random Access Response, RAR); a timing advance command (TAC) media access control element (MAC Control Element, MAC CE); and a DL message carrying the first TA. The DL message carrying the first TA may be, for example, a DL message other than RAR and TAC MAC CE.

示例性地,第一请求信息例如可以为以下任一项:调度请求(Scheduling Request,SR)(或专用SR);上行控制信息(Uplink Control Information,UCI)(或专用UCI);UL MAC CE(可通过PUSCH携带); UL无线资源控制(Radio Resource Contro,RRC)消息(可通过PUSCH携带);第一小区的UL资源;以及,第二小区的UL资源。其中,UL资源例如可以指特定时频位置的PUSCH。Exemplarily, the first request information may be, for example, any one of the following: a scheduling request (Scheduling Request, SR) (or a dedicated SR); uplink control information (Uplink Control Information, UCI) (or a dedicated UCI); UL MAC CE (which may be carried by PUSCH); UL Radio Resource Control (RRC) message (may be carried by PUSCH); UL resources of the first cell; and UL resources of the second cell. The UL resources may refer to PUSCH at a specific time-frequency position, for example.

在本实施例中,第二小区是用于终端设备与第一小区执行UL同步的小区。其中,第二小区是用于终端设备与第一小区执行UL同步的小区,或者还可以理解为,第二小区的TA可用于确定第一小区的TA(也即,第二TA可用于确定第一TA),或者还可以理解为,第二小区是与第一小区具有相同或相似TA的小区(也即,第二TA与第一TA相同或相似)。In this embodiment, the second cell is a cell for the terminal device to perform UL synchronization with the first cell. The second cell is a cell for the terminal device to perform UL synchronization with the first cell, or it can also be understood that the TA of the second cell can be used to determine the TA of the first cell (that is, the second TA can be used to determine the first TA), or it can also be understood that the second cell is a cell with the same or similar TA as the first cell (that is, the second TA is the same or similar to the first TA).

根据上述技术方案,终端设备可通过向网络设备发送第一请求信息的方式请求网络设备发送第一TA,从而,网络设备可基于来自终端设备的第一请求信息,将第一TA携带在第一指示信息中,发送至终端设备。According to the above technical solution, the terminal device can request the network device to send the first TA by sending a first request message to the network device. Thus, the network device can carry the first TA in the first indication message and send it to the terminal device based on the first request message from the terminal device.

在一些实施例中,第一指示信息中还可以携带第二TA,该第二TA可用于确定第一TA。这样,终端设备在接收到来自网络设备的第一指示信息后,可基于该第一指示信息中携带的第一TA与第一小区执行UL同步,或者,可基于该第一指示信息中携带的第二TA确定第一TA,进而基于确定的第一TA与第一小区执行UL同步。In some embodiments, the first indication information may also carry a second TA, and the second TA may be used to determine the first TA. In this way, after receiving the first indication information from the network device, the terminal device may perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the first TA carried in the first indication information, or may determine the first TA based on the second TA carried in the first indication information, and then perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the determined first TA.

在一些实施例中,第一指示信息中可以携带第二TA,而不携带第一TA。也就是说,网络设备在接收到来自终端设备的用于请求第一TA的第一请求信息后,可将第二TA携带在第一指示信息中发送至终端设备。在该情况下,终端设备可基于该第一指示信息中携带的第二TA确定第一TA,进而基于确定的第一TA与第一小区执行UL同步。In some embodiments, the first indication information may carry the second TA instead of the first TA. That is, after receiving the first request information for requesting the first TA from the terminal device, the network device may carry the second TA in the first indication information and send it to the terminal device. In this case, the terminal device may determine the first TA based on the second TA carried in the first indication information, and then perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the determined first TA.

在第二种可能的方式中,第一TA是通过随机接入(Random Access,RA)过程(例如记为第一RA过程)得到的;其中,第一RA过程是终端设备在第一小区或第二小区上执行的。In a second possible manner, the first TA is obtained through a random access (RA) process (for example, recorded as a first RA process); wherein the first RA process is executed by the terminal device on the first cell or the second cell.

在一些实施例中,在终端设备执行第一RA过程之前,该方法还可以包括:终端设备获取第一参考信号的配置信息,第一参考信号是第一小区的参考信号或第二小区的参考信号,第一参考信号用于执行第一RA过程。In some embodiments, before the terminal device executes the first RA process, the method may also include: the terminal device obtains configuration information of a first reference signal, the first reference signal is a reference signal of the first cell or a reference signal of the second cell, and the first reference signal is used to execute the first RA process.

示例性地,终端设备获取第一参考信号的配置信息的方式举例如下:Exemplarily, the manner in which the terminal device obtains the configuration information of the first reference signal is exemplified as follows:

一示例,在终端设备执行第一RA过程之前,网络设备可向终端设备发送第一参考信号的配置信息,相应地,终端设备可接收来自网络设备的第一参考信号的配置信息。另一示例,在终端设备执行第一RA过程之前,终端设备可从第一小区或第二小区读取第一参考信号的配置信息。例如,终端设备可从第一小区读取第一小区的参考信号的配置信息;又例如,终端设备可从第二小区读取第二小区的参考信号的配置信息。又一示例,在终端设备执行第一RA过程之前,网络设备可向终端设备发送第一参考信号的至少部分配置信息,在该情况下,终端设备可从第一小区或第二小区读取第一参考信号的其余至少部分配置信息。In one example, before the terminal device performs the first RA process, the network device may send configuration information of the first reference signal to the terminal device, and accordingly, the terminal device may receive the configuration information of the first reference signal from the network device. In another example, before the terminal device performs the first RA process, the terminal device may read the configuration information of the first reference signal from the first cell or the second cell. For example, the terminal device may read the configuration information of the reference signal of the first cell from the first cell; for another example, the terminal device may read the configuration information of the reference signal of the second cell from the second cell. In another example, before the terminal device performs the first RA process, the network device may send at least part of the configuration information of the first reference signal to the terminal device, in which case the terminal device may read the remaining at least part of the configuration information of the first reference signal from the first cell or the second cell.

示例性地,第一小区的参考信号的类型例如可以为TRS或信道状态信息参考信号(Channel State Information Reference Signal,CSI-RS);第二小区的参考信号的类型例如可以为SSB、TRS、CSI-RS中的任一种。Exemplarily, the type of the reference signal of the first cell may be, for example, TRS or channel state information reference signal (Channel State Information Reference Signal, CSI-RS); the type of the reference signal of the second cell may be, for example, any one of SSB, TRS, and CSI-RS.

根据上述技术方案,终端设备可获取第一参考信号的配置信息,进而,终端设备可基于该配置信息所配置的第一参考信号在第一小区或第二小区上执行第一RA过程。举例来说,终端设备在获取到第一参考信号的配置信息后,可确定与第一参考信号对应的前导码(preamble)和/或RO,从而基于确定的前导码和/或RO执行第一RA过程。According to the above technical solution, the terminal device may obtain the configuration information of the first reference signal, and then the terminal device may perform the first RA process on the first cell or the second cell based on the first reference signal configured by the configuration information. For example, after obtaining the configuration information of the first reference signal, the terminal device may determine the preamble and/or RO corresponding to the first reference signal, and then perform the first RA process based on the determined preamble and/or RO.

通过第一RA过程,终端设备可获得第一TA。例如,在第一RA过程中,网络设备可将第一TA携带在RAR中发送至终端设备。在一些实施例中,网络设备还可以将第二TA携带在该RAR中发送至终端设备。这样,终端设备在接收到该RAR后,可基于其中携带的第一TA与第一小区执行UL同步,或者,可基于其中携带的第二TA确定第一TA,进而基于确定的第一TA与第一小区执行UL同步。在一些实施例中,该RAR中可以携带第二TA,而不携带第一TA。这样,终端设备在接收到该RAR后,可基于其中携带的第二TA确定第一TA,进而基于确定的第一TA与第一小区执行UL同步。Through the first RA process, the terminal device can obtain the first TA. For example, in the first RA process, the network device can carry the first TA in the RAR and send it to the terminal device. In some embodiments, the network device can also carry the second TA in the RAR and send it to the terminal device. In this way, after receiving the RAR, the terminal device can perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the first TA carried therein, or can determine the first TA based on the second TA carried therein, and then perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the determined first TA. In some embodiments, the RAR can carry the second TA but not the first TA. In this way, after receiving the RAR, the terminal device can determine the first TA based on the second TA carried therein, and then perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the determined first TA.

在一些实施例中,用于执行第一RA过程的参考信号的类型是由网络设备指示的。也即,终端设备在该执行第一RA过程时所使用的第一参考信号的类型是由网络设备指示的。换句话说,网络设备可向终端设备指示使用哪个(哪种)参考信号执行第一RA过程。例如,网络设备可向终端设备指示使用SSB还是TRS还是CSI-RS执行第一RA过程。In some embodiments, the type of reference signal used to perform the first RA process is indicated by the network device. That is, the type of the first reference signal used by the terminal device when performing the first RA process is indicated by the network device. In other words, the network device may indicate to the terminal device which reference signal (s) to use to perform the first RA process. For example, the network device may indicate to the terminal device whether to use SSB, TRS or CSI-RS to perform the first RA process.

在第三种可能的实现方式中,第一TA是基于第一小区的UL数据信号确定的。也就是说,终端设备可基于第一小区的UL数据信号获取第一TA,进而基于第一TA与第一小区执行UL同步。In a third possible implementation, the first TA is determined based on the UL data signal of the first cell. That is, the terminal device may acquire the first TA based on the UL data signal of the first cell, and then perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the first TA.

在第四种可能的实现方式中,第一TA是基于终端设备与第二小区之间的第二TA确定的。例如,终端设备可获取第二TA,进而基于获取的第二TA确定出第一TA。In a fourth possible implementation manner, the first TA is determined based on a second TA between the terminal device and the second cell. For example, the terminal device may obtain the second TA, and then determine the first TA based on the obtained second TA.

一示例,第一TA等于第二TA,也即,第二小区与第一小区具有相同的TA。在该情况下,终端设 备可将第二TA作为第一TA,也即,终端设备可基于第二TA与第一小区执行UL同步。In one example, the first TA is equal to the second TA, that is, the second cell has the same TA as the first cell. In this case, the terminal sets The terminal device may use the second TA as the first TA, that is, the terminal device may perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the second TA.

另一示例,第二小区与第一小区具有相似TA。在该情况下,终端设备可基于第二TA推导得到第一TA。例如,可在第二TA的基础上,加/减/乘/除一个偏置(offset),从而得到第一TA;又例如,第一TA是一个函数的结果,该函数的输入包括第二TA,如:第一TA=f(第二TA)。In another example, the second cell has a similar TA to the first cell. In this case, the terminal device can derive the first TA based on the second TA. For example, an offset can be added/subtracted/multiplied/divided based on the second TA to obtain the first TA; for another example, the first TA is the result of a function whose input includes the second TA, such as: first TA = f(second TA).

作为示例,下面介绍终端设备获取第二TA的几种可能的实现方式。As examples, several possible implementations of the terminal device obtaining the second TA are introduced below.

在第一种可能的方式中,第二TA可包含在来自网络设备的第二指示信息中。其中,第二指示信息是针对第二请求信息的响应,第二请求信息用于请求第二TA,或者说,第二请求信息是终端设备向网络设备发送的用于请求第二TA的请求信息。In a first possible manner, the second TA may be included in the second indication information from the network device, wherein the second indication information is a response to the second request information, and the second request information is used to request the second TA, or in other words, the second request information is request information sent by the terminal device to the network device to request the second TA.

示例性地,第二指示信息例如可以为以下任一项:RAR;TAC MAC CE;以及,携带第二TA的DL消息。其中,携带第二TA的DL消息,例如可以为除RAR和TAC MAC CE之外的某一种DL消息。Exemplarily, the second indication information may be, for example, any one of the following: RAR; TAC MAC CE; and, a DL message carrying the second TA. The DL message carrying the second TA may be, for example, a DL message other than RAR and TAC MAC CE.

示例性地,第二请求信息例如可以为以下任一项:SR(或专用SR);UCI(或专用UCI);UL MAC CE(可通过PUSCH携带);UL RRC消息(可通过PUSCH携带);第一小区的UL资源;以及,第二小区的UL资源。其中,UL资源例如可以指特定时频位置的PUSCH。Exemplarily, the second request information may be any one of the following: SR (or dedicated SR); UCI (or dedicated UCI); UL MAC CE (may be carried by PUSCH); UL RRC message (may be carried by PUSCH); UL resources of the first cell; and UL resources of the second cell. Among them, UL resources may refer to PUSCH at a specific time-frequency position, for example.

根据上述技术方案,终端设备可通过向网络设备发送第二请求信息的方式请求网络设备发送第二TA,从而,网络设备可基于来自终端设备的第二请求信息,将第二TA携带在第一指示信息中,发送至终端设备。According to the above technical solution, the terminal device can request the network device to send a second TA by sending a second request message to the network device. Thus, the network device can carry the second TA in the first indication message and send it to the terminal device based on the second request message from the terminal device.

在一些实施例中,第二指示信息中还可以携带第一TA。这样,终端设备在接收到来自网络设备的第二指示信息后,可基于该第二指示信息中携带的第一TA与第一小区执行UL同步,或者,可基于该第二指示信息中携带的第二TA确定第一TA,进而基于确定的第一TA与第一小区执行UL同步。In some embodiments, the second indication information may also carry the first TA. Thus, after receiving the second indication information from the network device, the terminal device may perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the first TA carried in the second indication information, or may determine the first TA based on the second TA carried in the second indication information, and then perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the determined first TA.

在一些实施例中,第二指示信息中可以携带第一TA,而不携带第二TA。也就是说,网络设备在接收到来自终端设备的用于请求第二TA的第二请求信息后,可将第一TA携带在第一指示信息中发送至终端设备。在该情况下,终端设备可基于该第二指示信息中携带的第一TA与第一小区执行UL同步。In some embodiments, the second indication information may carry the first TA but not the second TA. That is, after receiving the second request information for requesting the second TA from the terminal device, the network device may carry the first TA in the first indication information and send it to the terminal device. In this case, the terminal device may perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the first TA carried in the second indication information.

在第二种可能的方式中,第二TA是通过随机接入过程(例如记为第二RA过程)得到的;其中,第二RA过程是终端设备在第一小区或第二小区上执行的。In a second possible manner, the second TA is obtained through a random access process (for example, recorded as a second RA process); wherein the second RA process is executed by the terminal device on the first cell or the second cell.

在一些实施例中,在终端设备执行第二RA过程之前,该方法还可以包括:终端设备获取第一参考信号的配置信息,第一参考信号是第一小区的参考信号或第二小区的参考信号,第一参考信号用于执行第二RA过程。In some embodiments, before the terminal device executes the second RA process, the method may further include: the terminal device obtains configuration information of a first reference signal, the first reference signal is a reference signal of the first cell or a reference signal of the second cell, and the first reference signal is used to execute the second RA process.

其中,终端设备获取第一参考信号的配置信息的方式、第一小区的参考信号的类型、第二小区的参考信号的类型,可参考前述有关第一RA过程的描述,这里不再赘述。Among them, the way in which the terminal device obtains the configuration information of the first reference signal, the type of the reference signal of the first cell, and the type of the reference signal of the second cell can refer to the aforementioned description of the first RA process, which will not be repeated here.

根据上述技术方案,终端设备可获取第一参考信号的配置信息,进而,终端设备可基于该配置信息所配置的第一参考信号在第一小区或第二小区上执行第二RA过程。举例来说,终端设备在获取到第一参考信号的配置信息后,可确定与第一参考信号对应的前导码(preamble)和/或RO,从而基于确定的前导码和/或RO执行第二RA过程。According to the above technical solution, the terminal device may obtain the configuration information of the first reference signal, and then the terminal device may perform the second RA process on the first cell or the second cell based on the first reference signal configured by the configuration information. For example, after obtaining the configuration information of the first reference signal, the terminal device may determine the preamble and/or RO corresponding to the first reference signal, and then perform the second RA process based on the determined preamble and/or RO.

通过第二RA过程,终端设备可获得第二TA。例如,在第二RA过程中,网络设备可将第二TA携带在RAR中发送至终端设备。在一些实施例中,网络设备还可以将第一TA携带在该RAR中发送至终端设备。这样,终端设备在接收到该RAR后,可基于其中携带的第一TA与第一小区执行UL同步,或者,可基于其中携带的第二TA确定第一TA,进而基于确定的第一TA与第一小区执行UL同步。在一些实施例中,该RAR中可以携带第一TA,而不携带第二TA。这样,终端设备在接收到该RAR后,可基于其中携带的第一TA与第一小区执行UL同步。Through the second RA process, the terminal device can obtain the second TA. For example, in the second RA process, the network device can carry the second TA in the RAR and send it to the terminal device. In some embodiments, the network device can also carry the first TA in the RAR and send it to the terminal device. In this way, after receiving the RAR, the terminal device can perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the first TA carried therein, or can determine the first TA based on the second TA carried therein, and then perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the determined first TA. In some embodiments, the RAR can carry the first TA but not the second TA. In this way, after receiving the RAR, the terminal device can perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the first TA carried therein.

在一些实施例中,用于执行第二RA过程的参考信号的类型是由网络设备指示的。也即,终端设备在该执行第二RA过程时所使用的第一参考信号的类型是由网络设备指示的。换句话说,网络设备可向终端设备指示使用哪个(哪种)参考信号执行第二RA过程。例如,网络设备可向终端设备指示使用SSB还是TRS还是CSI-RS执行第二RA过程。In some embodiments, the type of reference signal used to perform the second RA process is indicated by the network device. That is, the type of the first reference signal used by the terminal device when performing the second RA process is indicated by the network device. In other words, the network device may indicate to the terminal device which reference signal (s) to use to perform the second RA process. For example, the network device may indicate to the terminal device whether to use SSB, TRS or CSI-RS to perform the second RA process.

在一些实施例中,网络设备可将第一TA和/或第二TA携带在第四指示信息中发送至终端设备。其中,第二TA用于确定第一TA,第一TA用于终端设备与第一小区执行UL同步。In some embodiments, the network device may carry the first TA and/or the second TA in the fourth indication information and send it to the terminal device, wherein the second TA is used to determine the first TA, and the first TA is used for the terminal device to perform UL synchronization with the first cell.

作为一示例,第四指示信息即为上述第一指示信息或第二指示信息。As an example, the fourth indication information is the above-mentioned first indication information or the second indication information.

作为另一示例,第四指示信息是针对第三请求信息的响应,第三请求信息用于请求第一TA和/或第二TA,或者说,第三请求信息是终端设备向网络设备发送的用于请求第一TA和/或第二TA的请求信息。As another example, the fourth indication information is a response to the third request information, and the third request information is used to request the first TA and/or the second TA, or in other words, the third request information is request information sent by the terminal device to the network device to request the first TA and/or the second TA.

示例性地,第四指示信息例如可以为以下任一项:RAR;TAC MAC CE;以及,携带第一TA和/或第二TA的DL消息。其中,携带第一TA和/或第二TA的DL消息,例如可以为除RAR和TAC MAC CE之外的某一种DL消息。 Exemplarily, the fourth indication information may be any one of the following: RAR; TAC MAC CE; and a DL message carrying the first TA and/or the second TA. The DL message carrying the first TA and/or the second TA may be, for example, a DL message other than RAR and TAC MAC CE.

示例性地,第三请求信息例如可以为以下任一项:SR(或专用SR);UCI(或专用UCI);UL MAC CE(可通过PUSCH携带);UL RRC消息(可通过PUSCH携带);第一小区的UL资源;以及,第二小区的UL资源。其中,UL资源例如可以指特定时频位置的PUSCH。Exemplarily, the third request information may be any one of the following: SR (or dedicated SR); UCI (or dedicated UCI); UL MAC CE (may be carried by PUSCH); UL RRC message (may be carried by PUSCH); UL resources of the first cell; and UL resources of the second cell. Among them, UL resources may refer to PUSCH at a specific time-frequency position, for example.

作为又一示例,第四指示信息是网络设备在RA过程中向终端设备发送的RAR。其中,该RA过程例如可以是上述第一RA过程或第二RA过程。也就是说,第四指示信息可以是第一RA过程中,网络设备向终端设备发送的RAR;或者,第四指示信息可以是第二RA过程中,网络设备向终端设备发送的RAR。As another example, the fourth indication information is a RAR sent by the network device to the terminal device during the RA process. The RA process may be, for example, the first RA process or the second RA process. That is, the fourth indication information may be a RAR sent by the network device to the terminal device during the first RA process; or, the fourth indication information may be a RAR sent by the network device to the terminal device during the second RA process.

下面对本实施例中的第二小区进行介绍。The second cell in this embodiment is introduced below.

在一些实施例中,第二小区是由网络设备指示的;或者,第二小区是终端设备预配置的;或者,第二小区是网络设备预配置的;或者,第二小区是预定义的(如协议预定义);或者,第二小区是由终端设备确定/选择的。换句话说,哪个小区是用于终端设备与第一小区执行UL同步的小区(或者说,哪个小区的TA可用于确定第一小区的TA,或者说,哪个小区与第一小区具有相同或相似的TA),是由网络设备指示的,或者,是终端设备或网络设备预配置的,或者,是预定义的(如协议预定义),或者,是由终端设备确定/选择的。In some embodiments, the second cell is indicated by the network device; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the terminal device; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the network device; or, the second cell is predefined (such as predefined by a protocol); or, the second cell is determined/selected by the terminal device. In other words, which cell is used for the terminal device to perform UL synchronization with the first cell (or, which cell's TA can be used to determine the TA of the first cell, or, which cell has the same or similar TA as the first cell) is indicated by the network device, or is preconfigured by the terminal device or the network device, or is predefined (such as predefined by a protocol), or is determined/selected by the terminal device.

根据上述技术方案,明确了第二小区的确定方式,也即,明确了哪个小区可用于终端设备与第一小区执行UL同步。According to the above technical solution, the method for determining the second cell is clarified, that is, it is clarified which cell can be used for the terminal device to perform UL synchronization with the first cell.

在一些实施例中,第二小区是基于第一信息确定/选择的。例如,第二小区是由终端设备基于网络设备发送的第一信息确定/选择的。第一信息例如可包括以下至少之一:该网络设备的位置信息;该网络设备的相邻网络设备(也即与该网络设备相邻的网络设备)的位置信息;该网络设备包括的第三小区的位置信息,第三小区为终端设备所在的小区;与第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;各个网络设备之间的共站址(co-located)信息;各个小区之间的共站址信息;参考信号之间的准共址(Quasi Co-Location,QCL)信息;信道之间的QCL信息;以及,定位信息。In some embodiments, the second cell is determined/selected based on the first information. For example, the second cell is determined/selected by the terminal device based on the first information sent by the network device. The first information may, for example, include at least one of the following: location information of the network device; location information of an adjacent network device of the network device (i.e., a network device adjacent to the network device); location information of a third cell included in the network device, the third cell being the cell where the terminal device is located; location information of a cell adjacent to the third cell; co-located information between each network device; co-located information between each cell; quasi co-location (QCL) information between reference signals; QCL information between channels; and positioning information.

以网络设备为基站为例,第一信息例如可包括以下至少之一:本基站的位置信息(即该网络设备的位置信息);邻基站的位置信息(即该网络设备的相邻网络设备的位置信息);终端设备所在的小区/本小区的位置信息(即该网络设备包括的第三小区的位置信息);邻区的位置信息(即,与第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息);哪些基站是共站址的基站的信息(即各个网络设备之间的共站址信息);哪些小区是共站址的小区的信息(即各个小区之间的共站址信息);参考信号之间的QCL信息;信道之间的QCL信息;以及,定位信息。Taking the network device as a base station as an example, the first information may, for example, include at least one of the following: location information of this base station (i.e., location information of the network device); location information of neighboring base stations (i.e., location information of neighboring network devices of the network device); location information of the cell where the terminal device is located/this cell (i.e., location information of the third cell included in the network device); location information of neighboring cells (i.e., location information of cells adjacent to the third cell); information on which base stations are co-located base stations (i.e., co-location information between various network devices); information on which cells are co-located cells (i.e., co-location information between various cells); QCL information between reference signals; QCL information between channels; and positioning information.

举例来说,第二小区例如可以为以下任一小区:PCell;PSCell;与第一小区在同一个小区组的PCell或PSCell;与第一小区在同一个小区组的任意一个小区;与第一小区在同一个小区组的小区索引(index)最小的小区;与第一小区在同一个小区组的小区索引最大的小区;与第一小区在同一个TA组的任意一个小区;与第一小区在同一个TA组的小区索引最小的小区;与第一小区在同一个TA组的小区索引最大的小区。For example, the second cell may be any of the following cells: PCell; PSCell; PCell or PSCell in the same cell group as the first cell; any cell in the same cell group as the first cell; the cell with the smallest cell index in the same cell group as the first cell; the cell with the largest cell index in the same cell group as the first cell; any cell in the same TA group as the first cell; the cell with the smallest cell index in the same TA group as the first cell; the cell with the largest cell index in the same TA group as the first cell.

在一些实施例中,第二小区是由网络设备通过第三指示信息指示的。例如,网络设备可向终端设备发送第三指示信息,相应地,终端设备可接收来自网络设备的第三指示信息,从而,终端设备可基于该第三指示信息获知第二小区即为用于终端设备与第一小区执行UL同步的小区。In some embodiments, the second cell is indicated by the network device through third indication information. For example, the network device may send the third indication information to the terminal device, and accordingly, the terminal device may receive the third indication information from the network device, so that the terminal device may know, based on the third indication information, that the second cell is the cell for the terminal device to perform UL synchronization with the first cell.

示例性地,第三指示信息例如可包括:第二小区的频点和/或小区标识。其中,频点可以是频点索引(index)如,SIB3/4/5中邻频点中的一个索引,又如SIB2的频点索引(服务小区的频点索引)。或者,频点可以是频点值(ARFCN-ValueNR),或者,频点为SIB2对应的频点值(服务小区的频点值)。小区标识例如可以是物理小区标识(Physical Cell Identity,PCI)或全球小区标识。在一些实施例中,频点值可以使用absoluteFrequencySSB提供,或,其他IE提供。在一些实施例中,在频点值可以使用absoluteFrequencySSB提供的情况下,所述频点,可以是当前服务小区的频点,也可以是参考小区或获取下行定时小区的频点(如SSB-less SCell从另一个小区获取下行定时,则给出另一个小区或小区的SSB的频点)。Exemplarily, the third indication information may include, for example, the frequency and/or cell identifier of the second cell. The frequency may be a frequency index (index), such as an index of an adjacent frequency in SIB3/4/5, or a frequency index of SIB2 (frequency index of the serving cell). Alternatively, the frequency may be a frequency value (ARFCN-ValueNR), or the frequency may be a frequency value corresponding to SIB2 (frequency value of the serving cell). The cell identifier may be, for example, a physical cell identifier (Physical Cell Identity, PCI) or a global cell identifier. In some embodiments, the frequency value may be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, or other IEs. In some embodiments, when the frequency value may be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, the frequency may be the frequency of the current serving cell, or the frequency of a reference cell or a cell for obtaining downlink timing (such as when an SSB-less SCell obtains downlink timing from another cell, the frequency of another cell or the SSB of the cell is given).

在一些实施例中,第三指示信息是在第一条件下配置的。第一条件例如可包括以下至少之一:SCellAdd的条件;SCellAddMod的条件;SCellOnly的条件;以及,SCelladdOnly的条件。也就是说,第三指示信息可在SCellAdd的条件下、SCellAddMod的条件下、SCellOnly的条件下、SCelladdOnly的条件下中的至少一个条件下配置。作为一种实现方式,第三指示信息可在SCellAdd的条件下配置,或者,可在SCellAddMod的条件下配置,或者,可在SCellOnly的条件下配置,或者,可在SCelladdOnly的条件下配置。对上述条件的说明可参见下文中的表1。In some embodiments, the third indication information is configured under the first condition. The first condition may, for example, include at least one of the following: the condition of SCellAdd; the condition of SCellAddMod; the condition of SCellOnly; and the condition of SCelladdOnly. That is, the third indication information may be configured under at least one of the conditions of SCellAdd, SCellAddMod, SCellOnly, and SCelladdOnly. As an implementation method, the third indication information may be configured under the condition of SCellAdd, or, may be configured under the condition of SCellAddMod, or, may be configured under the condition of SCellOnly, or, may be configured under the condition of SCelladdOnly. For a description of the above conditions, see Table 1 below.

在一些实施例中,若第三指示信息出现,或者说,若网络设备向终端设备发送了第三指示信息,那么,终端设备可基于该第三指示信息所指示的第二小区与第一小区执行UL同步;若第三指示信息未出 现,或者说,若网络设备未向终端设备发送第三指示信息,那么,终端设备可将默认小区(default cell)作为第二小区,并基于默认小区与第一小区执行UL同步;或者,终端设备可自主确定/选择一个小区作为第二小区,并基于该确定/选择的小区与第一小区执行UL同步。In some embodiments, if the third indication information appears, or in other words, if the network device sends the third indication information to the terminal device, then the terminal device may perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the second cell indicated by the third indication information; if the third indication information does not appear, In other words, if the network device does not send the third indication information to the terminal device, the terminal device may use the default cell as the second cell, and perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the default cell; or, the terminal device may autonomously determine/select a cell as the second cell, and perform UL synchronization with the first cell based on the determined/selected cell.

在一些实施例中,第一小区与第二小区属于同一个TA组(TA group)和/或小区组(cell group)。由于属于同一个TA组的各个小区的TA相同,属于同一个小区组的各个小区的TA之间存在关联关系,故在第一小区与第二小区属于同一个TA组和/或小区组的情况下,第二TA可用于确定第一TA。In some embodiments, the first cell and the second cell belong to the same TA group and/or cell group. Since the TAs of the cells belonging to the same TA group are the same and there is an association relationship between the TAs of the cells belonging to the same cell group, when the first cell and the second cell belong to the same TA group and/or cell group, the second TA can be used to determine the first TA.

在一种可能的方式中,该TA组和/或小区组是由网络设备基于第二信息确定的。示例性地,第二信息例如可包括以下至少之一:参考信号的测量结果;定位信息(如终端设备的位置信息,和/或,与终端设备相邻的网络设备的位置信息);终端设备的运动轨迹信息;该网络设备的位置信息;该网络设备的相邻网络设备的位置信息;该网络设备包括的第三小区的位置信息,第三小区为终端设备所在的小区;与第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;各个网络设备之间的共站址信息;以及,各个小区之间的共站址信息。In one possible manner, the TA group and/or cell group is determined by the network device based on the second information. Exemplarily, the second information may include at least one of the following: measurement results of reference signals; positioning information (such as location information of the terminal device, and/or location information of network devices adjacent to the terminal device); movement trajectory information of the terminal device; location information of the network device; location information of adjacent network devices of the network device; location information of a third cell included in the network device, the third cell being the cell where the terminal device is located; location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; and, co-site information between various cells.

其中,上述参考信号的测量结果、定位信息、终端设备的运动轨迹信息中的至少一项信息,例如可以是终端设备向网络设备发送的。也即,终端设备可向网络设备发送参考信号的测量结果、定位信息、终端设备的运动轨迹信息中的至少一项信息,以用于网络设备确定该TA组和/或小区组。Among them, at least one of the measurement result of the reference signal, the positioning information, and the movement trajectory information of the terminal device may be, for example, sent by the terminal device to the network device. That is, the terminal device may send at least one of the measurement result of the reference signal, the positioning information, and the movement trajectory information of the terminal device to the network device, so that the network device can determine the TA group and/or cell group.

在一些实施例中,第二小区是网络设备指示终端设备激活的;或者,第二小区是终端设备在第二条件下激活的。In some embodiments, the second cell is activated by the terminal device by instructing the network device to activate the second cell; or, the second cell is activated by the terminal device under the second condition.

一种可能的情况,第二小区是网络设备指示终端设备激活的。一示例,网络设备可通过RRC配置向终端设备指示激活第二小区。例如,网络设备可将RRC配置中的scellState(如在SCellConfig中)设置为激活(activated),以指示激活该第二小区。另一示例,网络设备可通过MAC CE(如SCell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE,enhanced Sell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE,或新的SCell激活/去激活MAC CE)向终端设备指示激活该第二小区。In one possible scenario, the second cell is activated by the terminal device by instructing the network device. In one example, the network device may instruct the terminal device to activate the second cell through RRC configuration. For example, the network device may set the scellState in the RRC configuration (such as in SCellConfig) to activated to indicate the activation of the second cell. In another example, the network device may instruct the terminal device to activate the second cell through MAC CE (such as SCell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE, enhanced Sell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE, or new SCell activation/deactivation MAC CE).

另一种可能的情况,第二小区是终端设备在第二条件下激活的。Another possible situation is that the second cell is activated by the terminal device under the second condition.

示例性地,第二条件例如可包括以下至少之一:第二小区的去激活定时器超时;第二小区的去激活定时器需启动;第二小区的去激活定时器需重启;终端设备获取到用于指示第二小区的指示信息;终端设备获取到第二小区的参考信号;终端设备执行与第一小区的上行同步或下行同步;终端设备获取到第一小区的配置;第一小区被激活;以及,第一小区需被激活。Exemplarily, the second condition may include at least one of the following: the deactivation timer of the second cell times out; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be started; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be restarted; the terminal device obtains indication information for indicating the second cell; the terminal device obtains the reference signal of the second cell; the terminal device performs uplink synchronization or downlink synchronization with the first cell; the terminal device obtains the configuration of the first cell; the first cell is activated; and, the first cell needs to be activated.

根据本实施例的方法,明确了终端设备如何与第一小区(SSB-less Scell)进行UL同步。According to the method of this embodiment, it is clarified how the terminal device performs UL synchronization with the first cell (SSB-less Scell).

为便于理解本申请的实施例,下面结合示例,介绍适用于图2所示方法的可能的实现方案(包括方案2A至方案2C)。其中,方案2A至方案2C例如可针对前述场景2a。To facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, possible implementation schemes (including schemes 2A to 2C) applicable to the method shown in Fig. 2 are introduced below in combination with examples. Among them, schemes 2A to 2C may be for example directed to the aforementioned scenario 2a.

方案2AOption 2A

在方案2A中,网络(网络设备)可配置SSB-less SCell(第一小区的一例)与特定小区(第二小区的一例)属于同一个小区组和/或TA组。在本实施例中,特定小区为用于UE与SSB-less SCell执行上行同步的小区,或者,该特定小区还可以理解为,与SSB-less SCell具有相同/相似TA的小区。UE与特定小区之间的TA(对应前述实施例中的第二TA)可以用于确定UE与SSB-less SCell之间的TA(对应前述实施例中的第一TA)。在本实施例中,特定小区例如可以为参考小区,或者说,特定小区还可以替换为参考小区。In scheme 2A, the network (network device) may configure the SSB-less SCell (an example of the first cell) and the specific cell (an example of the second cell) to belong to the same cell group and/or TA group. In this embodiment, the specific cell is a cell for the UE to perform uplink synchronization with the SSB-less SCell, or the specific cell may also be understood as a cell having the same/similar TA as the SSB-less SCell. The TA between the UE and the specific cell (corresponding to the second TA in the aforementioned embodiment) may be used to determine the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell (corresponding to the first TA in the aforementioned embodiment). In this embodiment, the specific cell may be, for example, a reference cell, or the specific cell may also be replaced by a reference cell.

示例性地,若UE获知该特定小区是哪个小区(如,获知该特定小区的小区标识、频点等),则UE可认为UE与该特定小区之间的UL定时同步(或TA)以及UE与SSB-less SCell的UL定时同步(或TA)相同/相似。在该情况下,UE可基于UE与特定小区之间的TA,确定UE与SSB-less SCell之间的TA,进而与SSB-less SCell执行UL同步。Exemplarily, if the UE knows which cell the specific cell is (e.g., knows the cell identifier, frequency, etc. of the specific cell), the UE may consider that the UL timing synchronization (or TA) between the UE and the specific cell and the UL timing synchronization (or TA) between the UE and the SSB-less SCell are the same/similar. In this case, the UE may determine the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell based on the TA between the UE and the specific cell, and then perform UL synchronization with the SSB-less SCell.

在一些实施例中,UE可上报以下信息中的至少一项给网络,用于网络配置一个小区组或TA组的小区:参考信号测量结果、定位信息(如UE的位置和/或与该UE相邻的基站的位置)、UE的运动轨迹信息。In some embodiments, the UE may report at least one of the following information to the network for the network to configure a cell group or a TA group of cells: reference signal measurement results, positioning information (such as the location of the UE and/or the location of the base station adjacent to the UE), and UE motion trajectory information.

在一些实施例中,特定小区是哪个小区,或者说,SSB-less SCell与哪个小区属于同一个小区组和/或TA组,或者说,UE可以使用哪个小区的TA确定UE与SSB-less SCell之间的TA,除了可以由网络指示给UE,还可以通过以下任一方式确定:预配置给UE;UE自己确定/选择;预定义(如协议预定义)。举例来说,特定小区例如可以是以下任一小区:与SSB-less SCell同一个小区组的PCell、PSCell、小区索引(cell index)最小的小区、小区索引最大的小区。In some embodiments, which cell is the specific cell, or which cell does the SSB-less SCell belong to in the same cell group and/or TA group as the SSB-less SCell, or which cell's TA can the UE use to determine the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell, can be indicated to the UE by the network or determined in any of the following ways: preconfigured to the UE; determined/selected by the UE itself; predefined (such as predefined by the protocol). For example, the specific cell can be any of the following cells: a PCell in the same cell group as the SSB-less SCell, a PSCell, a cell with the smallest cell index, and a cell with the largest cell index.

示例性地,网络例如可指示辅助信息(对应前述实施例中的第一信息)给UE,用于UE确定/选择特定小区,或者说,用于UE确定与SSB-less SCell具有相同/相似TA的小区。其中,辅助信息例如可包括以下至少之一:本基站(本网络/网络设备)的位置信息,邻基站(本网络/网络设备的相邻网络/ 网络设备)的位置信息;本区(UE所在小区)的位置信息;邻区(UE所在小区的相邻小区)的位置信息;本基站和哪些基站共站址的信息(或者说各个基站之间的共站址信息);哪些小区是共站址(co-located)的小区的信息;哪些基站是co-located的基站的信息;参考信号之间的QCL信息;信道之间的QCL信息;以及,定位信息。Exemplarily, the network may indicate auxiliary information (corresponding to the first information in the aforementioned embodiment) to the UE for the UE to determine/select a specific cell, or in other words, for the UE to determine a cell having the same/similar TA as the SSB-less SCell. The auxiliary information may include at least one of the following: location information of the base station (the network/network device), neighboring base stations (neighboring networks/network devices of the network/network device), network equipment); location information of this area (the cell where the UE is located); location information of neighboring cells (the adjacent cells of the cell where the UE is located); information on which base stations are co-located with this base station (or co-located information between base stations); information on which cells are co-located cells; information on which base stations are co-located base stations; QCL information between reference signals; QCL information between channels; and positioning information.

示例性地,UE可基于一些预设准则自主确定/选择特定小区,或者说,自主确定/选择与SSB-less SCell具有相同/相似TA的小区。一示例,UE可基于以下信息中的至少之一确定/选择特定小区:小区标识、UE位置信息、网络位置信息(例如可包括小区覆盖信息、准共址(Quasi-Co-Location,QCL信息)、定位信息、共站址信息,co-located信息。另一示例,UE可通过判断门限值确定/选择特定小区。例如,若UE与某个小区之间的距离小于预设阈值,则可将该小区确定/选择为特定小区;又例如,假设UE与SSB-less SCell之间的距离为d1,UE与另一个小区之间的距离为d2,那么,若d1和d2的差值小于预设阈值,则可将该另一个小区确定为特定小区。Exemplarily, the UE may autonomously determine/select a specific cell based on some preset criteria, or in other words, autonomously determine/select a cell having the same/similar TA as the SSB-less SCell. In one example, the UE may determine/select a specific cell based on at least one of the following information: cell identification, UE location information, network location information (for example, may include cell coverage information, quasi-co-location (QCL information), positioning information, co-site information, and co-located information. In another example, the UE may determine/select a specific cell by judging a threshold value. For example, if the distance between the UE and a certain cell is less than a preset threshold, the cell may be determined/selected as a specific cell; for another example, assuming that the distance between the UE and the SSB-less SCell is d1, and the distance between the UE and another cell is d2, then if the difference between d1 and d2 is less than a preset threshold, the other cell may be determined as a specific cell.

一种可能的情况,UE与SSB-less SCell之间的TA等于UE与特定小区之间的TA,也即,特定小区与SSB-less SCell具有相同TA,在该情况下,UE在基于特定小区的TA执行与SSB-less SCell的UL同步时,可将该UE与特定小区之间的TA作为该UE与SSB-less SCell之间的TA。One possible scenario is that the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell is equal to the TA between the UE and the specific cell, that is, the specific cell and the SSB-less SCell have the same TA. In this case, when the UE performs UL synchronization with the SSB-less SCell based on the TA of the specific cell, the TA between the UE and the specific cell may be used as the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell.

另一种可能的情况,特定小区与SSB-less SCell具有相似TA,在该情况下,UE在基于特定小区的TA执行与SSB-less SCell的UL同步时,可基于UE与特定小区之间的TA推导得到UE与SSB-less SCell之间的TA。例如,可在UE与特定小区之间的TA的基础上,加/减/乘/除一个偏置(offset),得到UE与SSB-less SCell之间的TA;又例如,UE与SSB-less SCell之间的TA是一个函数的结果,函数的输入包括UE与特定小区的之间的TA。Another possible situation is that the specific cell and the SSB-less SCell have similar TAs. In this situation, when the UE performs UL synchronization with the SSB-less SCell based on the TA of the specific cell, the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell can be derived based on the TA between the UE and the specific cell. For example, an offset can be added/subtracted/multiplied/divided based on the TA between the UE and the specific cell to obtain the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell; for another example, the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell is the result of a function whose input includes the TA between the UE and the specific cell.

在一些实施例中,当UE需要与SSB-less SCell执行UL同步时,UE可使用与特定小区之间的TA确定UE与SSB-less SCell之间的TA,进而基于UE与SSB-less SCell之间的TA执行与SSB-less SCell的UL同步。在一些实施例中,若特定小区尚未激活,则UE可请求激活特定小区。In some embodiments, when the UE needs to perform UL synchronization with the SSB-less SCell, the UE may use the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell to determine the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell, and then perform UL synchronization with the SSB-less SCell based on the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell. In some embodiments, if the specific cell has not been activated, the UE may request to activate the specific cell.

在一些实施例中,为了获得UE与特定小区之间的TA,UE可在特定小区执行UL同步过程,如:执行随机接入过程,或触发随机接入过程,或请求网络发送TAC MAC CE或RAR等。在一些实施例中,可增加新的随机接入触发条件,例如,在UE需要与SSB-less SCell执行UL同步的情况下,触发随机接入过程。通过随机接入过程,UE可获得UE与特定小区之间的TA,和/或,UE与SSB-less SCell之间的TA。In some embodiments, in order to obtain the TA between the UE and a specific cell, the UE may perform an UL synchronization process in the specific cell, such as performing a random access process, or triggering a random access process, or requesting the network to send a TAC MAC CE or RAR, etc. In some embodiments, a new random access triggering condition may be added, for example, when the UE needs to perform UL synchronization with the SSB-less SCell, the random access process is triggered. Through the random access process, the UE may obtain the TA between the UE and the specific cell, and/or the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell.

示例性地,在UE请求网络发送TAC MAC CE或RAR的情况下,所使用的请求消息可以是UL MAC CE、UL RRC消息或UCI。也就是说,UE可通过向网络发送UL MAC CE、UL RRC消息或UCI,以请求网络向UE发送TAC MAC CE或RAR。示例性地,TAC MAC CE或RAR中可携带UE与特定小区之间的TA,和/或,UE与SSB-less SCell之间的TA,Exemplarily, when the UE requests the network to send a TAC MAC CE or RAR, the request message used may be a UL MAC CE, a UL RRC message, or a UCI. That is, the UE may request the network to send a TAC MAC CE or a RAR to the UE by sending a UL MAC CE, a UL RRC message, or a UCI to the network. Exemplarily, the TAC MAC CE or the RAR may carry the TA between the UE and a specific cell, and/or the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell.

方案2BOption 2B

在方案2B中,在UE获知SSB-less SCell的特定小区的情况下,UE可基于特定小区的参考信号(如SSB/TRS/CSI-RS)的配置信息在特定小区或SSB-less SCell上执行RA。In Scheme 2B, when the UE learns about the specific cell of the SSB-less SCell, the UE can perform RA on the specific cell or SSB-less SCell based on the configuration information of the reference signal (such as SSB/TRS/CSI-RS) of the specific cell.

以参考信号为SSB/TRS/CSI-RS为例,UE可获取与特定小区的SSB-/TRS/CSI-RS对应的、针对SSB-less SCell的RACH/PRACH配置。其中,RACH/PRACH配置包括前导码(preamble)和/或RO。该前导码(preamble)和/或RO是UE在特定小区执行RA时使用的,针对SSB-less SCell的(也即,该RA过程是为获取UE与SSB-less SCell之间的TA而执行的);或者,该前导码和/或RO是UE在SSB-less SCell上执行RA时使用的。在一些实施例中,UE还可以获知通过SSB还是TRS还是CSI-RS执行UL同步(或DL同步,或RA)。在一些实施例中,UE可根据特定小区的SSB/TRS/CSI-RS,选择对应参考信号的前导码和/或RO。Taking the reference signal as SSB/TRS/CSI-RS as an example, the UE can obtain the RACH/PRACH configuration for the SSB-less SCell corresponding to the SSB-/TRS/CSI-RS of a specific cell. Among them, the RACH/PRACH configuration includes a preamble and/or RO. The preamble and/or RO are used by the UE when performing RA in a specific cell for the SSB-less SCell (that is, the RA process is performed to obtain the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell); or, the preamble and/or RO are used by the UE when performing RA on the SSB-less SCell. In some embodiments, the UE can also know whether to perform UL synchronization (or DL synchronization, or RA) through SSB, TRS or CSI-RS. In some embodiments, the UE can select the preamble and/or RO corresponding to the reference signal according to the SSB/TRS/CSI-RS of the specific cell.

UE通过使用RACH/PRACH资源在特定小区或SSB-less SCell执行RA过程,可得到UE与SSB-less SCell之间的TA,和/或,UE与特定小区之间的TA。例如,在该RA过程中,网络可将UE与SSB-less SCell之间的TA和/或UE与特定小区之间的TA携带在RAR中发送至UE。其中,UE与特定小区之间的TA可用于确定UE与SSB-less SCell之间的TA。一示例,UE与SSB-less SCell之间的TA等于UE与特定小区之间的TA;另一示例,UE与SSB-less SCell之间的TA是根据特定小区的TA推导出来的。在确定UE与SSB-less SCell之间的TA之后,UE可基于该TA执行与SSB-less SCell的UL同步。The UE may obtain the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell and/or the TA between the UE and the specific cell by performing the RA process in the specific cell or SSB-less SCell using RACH/PRACH resources. For example, in the RA process, the network may carry the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell and/or the TA between the UE and the specific cell in the RAR and send it to the UE. The TA between the UE and the specific cell may be used to determine the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell. In one example, the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell is equal to the TA between the UE and the specific cell; in another example, the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell is derived from the TA of the specific cell. After determining the TA between the UE and the SSB-less SCell, the UE may perform UL synchronization with the SSB-less SCell based on the TA.

方案2COption 2C

在方案2C中,当UE需要在SSB-less SCell上执行数据传输和/或UL同步的情况下,或者,UE在SSB-less SCell UL失步的情况下,UE可使用第一请求信息向网络请求TA。第一请求信息例如可以为UL资源或UL请求消息。In scheme 2C, when the UE needs to perform data transmission and/or UL synchronization on the SSB-less SCell, or when the UE is out of UL synchronization in the SSB-less SCell, the UE may request the network for TA using first request information. The first request information may be, for example, UL resources or a UL request message.

其中,UL资源可以是SSB-less SCell上的资源,或者也可以是特定小区上的资源。UL资源例如可 以为PUSCH(如特定时频位置的PUSCH)。UL请求消息例如可以为以下任一项:SR(或专用SR);PUSCH上携带的特定的UL MAC CE;PUSCH上承载的特定的RRC信令(signalling);UCI(或专用UCI)。The UL resources may be resources on the SSB-less SCell or resources on a specific cell. The UL request message may be, for example, any one of the following: SR (or dedicated SR); specific UL MAC CE carried on PUSCH; specific RRC signaling carried on PUSCH; UCI (or dedicated UCI).

示例性地,网络可根据第一请求信息,确定UE与SSB-less cell之间的TA和/或UE与特定小区之间的TA,进而,可向UE发送第一指示信息,以向UE指示TA信息(包括UE与SSB-less cell之间的TA和/或UE与特定小区之间的TA),进而,UE可基于第一指示信息执行与SSB-less SCell的UL同步。其中,第一指示信息例如可以为RAR、TAC MAC CE或其他携带TA的消息。在一些实施例中,网络可基于特定小区的DL信息(如DL边界)作为TA的参考。Exemplarily, the network may determine the TA between the UE and the SSB-less cell and/or the TA between the UE and the specific cell based on the first request information, and then send the first indication information to the UE to indicate the TA information (including the TA between the UE and the SSB-less cell and/or the TA between the UE and the specific cell) to the UE, and then the UE may perform UL synchronization with the SSB-less SCell based on the first indication information. The first indication information may be, for example, an RAR, a TAC MAC CE, or other message carrying the TA. In some embodiments, the network may use the DL information of the specific cell (such as a DL boundary) as a reference for the TA.

应理解,方案2A至方案2C中的特定小区例如可以为参考小区,也即,上述特定小区还可以替换为参考小区。It should be understood that the specific cell in Scheme 2A to Scheme 2C may be, for example, a reference cell, that is, the specific cell may also be replaced by a reference cell.

方案2A至方案2C的实现方式举例如下:Examples of implementation methods of Schemes 2A to 2C are as follows:

实现方式a:网络指示SSB-less SCell(记为小区#1)与小区#2(特定小区的一例)为同一个TA组的小区,则,UE可基于与小区#2的TA,与小区#1执行UL同步(或定时提前)。Implementation method a: The network indicates that the SSB-less SCell (denoted as cell #1) and cell #2 (an example of a specific cell) are cells of the same TA group. In this case, the UE can perform UL synchronization (or timing advance) with cell #1 based on the TA with cell #2.

一示例,若UE与小区#2有有效TA,则UE可使用与小区#2的有效TA,执行与小区#1的UL同步(或定时提前)。As an example, if the UE has a valid TA with cell #2, the UE may use the valid TA with cell #2 to perform UL synchronization (or timing advance) with cell #1.

另一示例,若UE与小区#2没有有效TA,则UE可在小区#2或小区#1向网络发送请求消息(如上述第一请求信息/第二请求信息/第三请求信息),以向网络请求有效TA。进而,网络可将有效TA指示给UE,用于UE执行与小区#1的UL同步(或定时提前)。In another example, if the UE does not have a valid TA with cell #2, the UE may send a request message (such as the first request message/the second request message/the third request message) to the network in cell #2 or cell #1 to request a valid TA from the network. Furthermore, the network may indicate the valid TA to the UE for the UE to perform UL synchronization (or timing advance) with cell #1.

又一示例,若UE与小区#2没有有效TA,则UE可在小区#2或小区#1触发RA过程,和/或,在小区#2或小区#1向网络发送msg1,以获取有效TA,进而基于该有效TA执行与小区#1的UL同步(或定时提前)。As another example, if the UE does not have a valid TA with cell #2, the UE may trigger a RA process in cell #2 or cell #1, and/or send msg1 to the network in cell #2 or cell #1 to obtain a valid TA, and then perform UL synchronization (or timing advance) with cell #1 based on the valid TA.

示例性地,小区#2可以为网络指示的特定小区,或者还可以为其他某个特定小区,如:与SSB-less SCell同一个小区组的小区。Exemplarily, cell #2 may be a specific cell indicated by the network, or may be another specific cell, such as a cell in the same cell group as the SSB-less SCell.

实现方式b:UE确定与SSB-less SCell(小区#1)使用/具有相同或相似TA的小区(小区#2)。确定方式包括以下任一项:UE自主确定/选择;UE预配置;预定义(如协议规定)。UE基于与小区#2的TA,与小区#1执行UL同步(或定时提前)。Implementation b: The UE determines a cell (cell #2) that uses/has the same or similar TA as the SSB-less SCell (cell #1). The determination method includes any of the following: UE autonomous determination/selection; UE pre-configuration; pre-definition (as specified in the protocol). The UE performs UL synchronization (or timing advance) with cell #1 based on the TA with cell #2.

一示例,若UE与小区#2有有效TA,则UE使用与小区#2的有效TA取值,执行与小区#1的UL同步(或定时提前)。As an example, if the UE has a valid TA with cell #2, the UE uses the valid TA value with cell #2 to perform UL synchronization (or timing advance) with cell #1.

另一示例,若UE与小区#2没有有效TA,则UE在小区#2或小区#1向网络发送请求消息(如上述第一请求信息/第二请求信息/第三请求信息),以向网络请求有效TA。进而,网络可将有效TA指示给UE,用于UE执行与小区#1的UL同步(或定时提前)。In another example, if the UE does not have a valid TA with cell #2, the UE sends a request message (such as the first request message/the second request message/the third request message) to the network in cell #2 or cell #1 to request a valid TA from the network. Then, the network may indicate the valid TA to the UE for the UE to perform UL synchronization (or timing advance) with cell #1.

又一示例,若UE与小区#2没有有效TA,则UE可在小区#2或小区#1触发RA过程,和/或,在小区#2或小区#1向网络发送msg1,以获取有效TA,进而基于该有效TA执行与小区#1的UL同步(或定时提前)。As another example, if the UE does not have a valid TA with cell #2, the UE may trigger a RA process in cell #2 or cell #1, and/or send msg1 to the network in cell #2 or cell #1 to obtain a valid TA, and then perform UL synchronization (or timing advance) with cell #1 based on the valid TA.

实现方式c:若UE在SSB-less SCell(小区#1)上行失步,或有UL数据要发送,或需要执行UL同步,则UE可使用特定资源或资源位置,向网络请求有效TA。相应地,网络向UE发送有效TA,用于UE执行与小区#1的UL同步(或定时提前)。Implementation c: If the UE is out of synchronization in the uplink of SSB-less SCell (cell #1), or has UL data to send, or needs to perform UL synchronization, the UE may request a valid TA from the network using specific resources or resource locations. Accordingly, the network sends a valid TA to the UE for the UE to perform UL synchronization (or timing advance) with cell #1.

实现方式d:若UE在SSB-less SCell(小区#1)上行失步,或有UL数据要发送,或需要执行UL同步,则UE可在小区#2或小区#1上触发RA过程。作为示例,UE可基于小区#2的参考信号(如SSB/TRS/CSI-RS)配置和/或参考信号的信道质量信息,选择使用的参考信号,并使用小区#1上的资源(如前导码和/或RO)执行RA过程。作为一种实现方式,UE在可在小区#1发送msg3/MSGA,在小区#2接收msg2或4。Implementation d: If the UE loses synchronization in the uplink of SSB-less SCell (cell #1), or has UL data to send, or needs to perform UL synchronization, the UE may trigger the RA process in cell #2 or cell #1. As an example, the UE may select the reference signal to be used based on the reference signal (such as SSB/TRS/CSI-RS) configuration of cell #2 and/or the channel quality information of the reference signal, and perform the RA process using the resources (such as preamble and/or RO) on cell #1. As an implementation, the UE may send msg3/MSG A in cell #1 and receive msg2 or 4 in cell #2.

实现方式e:若UE在SSB-less SCell(小区#1)上行失步,或有UL数据要发送,或需要执行UL同步,则UE在小区#2或小区#1上触发RA过程。Implementation method e: If the UE loses uplink synchronization in the SSB-less SCell (cell #1), or has UL data to send, or needs to perform UL synchronization, the UE triggers the RA process in cell #2 or cell #1.

一示例,UE通过该RA过程,可获取UE与小区#2之间的TA,UE与小区#2之间的TA可用于确定UE与小区#1之间的TA(UE与小区#1之间的TA等于UE与小区#2之间的TA,或者,UE与小区#1之间的TA基于UE与小区#2之间的TA推导得到)。In one example, the UE can obtain the TA between the UE and cell #2 through the RA process, and the TA between the UE and cell #2 can be used to determine the TA between the UE and cell #1 (the TA between the UE and cell #1 is equal to the TA between the UE and cell #2, or the TA between the UE and cell #1 is derived based on the TA between the UE and cell #2).

另一示例,UE通过该RA过程,可获取(如直接获取)UE与小区#1之间的TA。In another example, the UE may obtain (eg, directly obtain) the TA between the UE and cell #1 through the RA process.

又一示例,UE通过该RA过程,可同时获取UE与小区#2之间的TA,以及UE与小区#1之间的TA。As another example, through the RA process, the UE can simultaneously obtain the TA between the UE and cell #2, and the TA between the UE and cell #1.

在一些实施例中,UE在RA过程中,可向网络指示需要获取UE与小区#2之间的TA,或者与小区#2UL同步。作为一种实现方式,UE可通过msg1/msgA/msg3指示该信息。例如,通过特定的前导 码、RO、PUSCH中的信息(如无线网络临时标识(Radio Network Temporary Identifier,RNTI)、MAC CE等),携带或向网络指示该信息。In some embodiments, during the RA process, the UE may indicate to the network that it needs to obtain the TA between the UE and cell #2, or synchronize with the UL of cell #2. As an implementation method, the UE may indicate this information via msg1/msgA/msg3. For example, via a specific preamble The information in the code, RO, and PUSCH (such as Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI), MAC CE, etc.) is carried or indicated to the network.

上面介绍了针对前述场景2a的UL同步方案,在一些实施例中,针对前述场景1,UE在SSB-less SCell上执行UL同步的情况下,可基于SSB-less SCell的TRS/CSI-RS执行RA过程(如将针对SSB的相关操作替换为针对TRS的相关操作)。或者,UE在SSB-less SCell上执行UL同步的情况下,可基于SSB-less SCell的特定小区(如参考小区)的参考信号执行RA过程(类似方案2A至方案2C中针对场景2a的方式)。The UL synchronization scheme for the aforementioned scenario 2a is introduced above. In some embodiments, for the aforementioned scenario 1, when the UE performs UL synchronization on the SSB-less SCell, the RA process may be performed based on the TRS/CSI-RS of the SSB-less SCell (such as replacing the relevant operations for the SSB with the relevant operations for the TRS). Alternatively, when the UE performs UL synchronization on the SSB-less SCell, the RA process may be performed based on the reference signal of a specific cell (such as a reference cell) of the SSB-less SCell (similar to the methods for scenario 2a in schemes 2A to 2C).

在一些实施例中,针对前述场景2,对于SSB-less SCell,UE可基于SSB-less SCell的DL或UL数据信号做定时。例如,UE可基于SSB-less SCell的DL数据信号,做DL定时或DL同步;又例如,UE可基于SSB-less SCell的UL数据信号,做UL定时或获取TA。In some embodiments, for the aforementioned scenario 2, for the SSB-less SCell, the UE may perform timing based on the DL or UL data signal of the SSB-less SCell. For example, the UE may perform DL timing or DL synchronization based on the DL data signal of the SSB-less SCell; for another example, the UE may perform UL timing or obtain TA based on the UL data signal of the SSB-less SCell.

根据上述技术方案,明确了连接态或非连接态的UE如何与SSB-less SCell进行通信(如UL同步)。According to the above technical solution, it is clarified how the UE in connected or non-connected state communicates with the SSB-less SCell (such as UL synchronization).

下面结合图3介绍本申请实施例提供的另一种通信的方法。Another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application is introduced below in conjunction with FIG3 .

图3示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种通信的方法,该方法可以包括:FIG3 shows another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application, which may include:

S301,终端设备接收第二小区的参考信号或第一小区的DL数据信号,该参考信号或DL数据信号用于终端设备与第一小区执行DL同步或DL定时;其中,第二小区是用于终端设备与第一小区执行DL同步或DL定时的小区,第一小区为无SSB传输的辅小区。S301, the terminal device receives a reference signal of a second cell or a DL data signal of a first cell, and the reference signal or the DL data signal is used for the terminal device to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell; wherein the second cell is a cell used for the terminal device to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell, and the first cell is a secondary cell without SSB transmission.

在一种可能的方式中,终端设备可接收第一小区的DL数据信号(例如,接收来自网络设备的第一小区的DL数据信号),从而,终端设备可基于该DL数据信号与第一小区执行DL同步或DL定时。In one possible manner, the terminal device may receive a DL data signal of the first cell (eg, receive a DL data signal of the first cell from a network device), so that the terminal device may perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell based on the DL data signal.

在另一种可能的方式中,终端设备可接收第二小区的参考信号(例如,接收来自网络设备的第二小区的参考信号),从而,终端设备可基于该参考信号与第一小区执行DL同步或DL定时。In another possible manner, the terminal device may receive a reference signal of the second cell (for example, receive a reference signal of the second cell from a network device), so that the terminal device may perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell based on the reference signal.

示例性地,该参考信号的类型例如可以为SSB、TRS、CSI-RS中的任一种。也就是说,终端设备可使用SSB、TRS、CSI-RS中的任一种参考信号与第一小区执行DL同步或DL定时。Exemplarily, the type of the reference signal may be any one of SSB, TRS, and CSI-RS. That is, the terminal device may use any one of SSB, TRS, and CSI-RS reference signals to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell.

示例性地,该参考信号(也即,用于终端设备与第一小区执行DL同步或DL定时的参考信号)的至少部分配置信息可以是网络设备指示的;和/或,该参考信号的至少部分配置信息可以是终端设备从第二小区读取的。Exemplarily, at least part of the configuration information of the reference signal (i.e., a reference signal used for the terminal device to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell) may be indicated by the network device; and/or, at least part of the configuration information of the reference signal may be read by the terminal device from the second cell.

一示例,网络设备可向终端设备发送(指示)参考信号的至少部分配置信息,相应地,终端设备可接收来自网络设备的该至少部分配置信息。在该情况下,终端设备可以不需要从第二小区读取该至少部分配置信息。另一示例,终端设备可从第二小区读取参考信号的至少部分配置信息。又一示例,网络设备可向终端设备发送(指示)参考信号的至少部分配置信息,同时,终端设备可从第二小区读取该参考信号的其余至少部分配置信息。In one example, the network device may send (indicate) at least part of the configuration information of the reference signal to the terminal device, and accordingly, the terminal device may receive at least part of the configuration information from the network device. In this case, the terminal device may not need to read at least part of the configuration information from the second cell. In another example, the terminal device may read at least part of the configuration information of the reference signal from the second cell. In another example, the network device may send (indicate) at least part of the configuration information of the reference signal to the terminal device, and at the same time, the terminal device may read the remaining at least part of the configuration information of the reference signal from the second cell.

作为示例,当参考信号的类型为SSB时,SSB的至少部分配置信息例如可以为MIB和/或SIB1中的至少部分信息(例如:ssb-SubcarrierOffset和/或systemFrameNumber);当参考信号为CSI-RS或TRS时,CSI-RS或TRS的至少部分配置信息例如可以为CSI-RS或TRS的至少部分信息(例如:scellActivationRS-Id、SCellActivationRS-ConfigId-r17、resourceSet、NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId、gapBetweenBursts、qcl-Info-r17中至少之一)。As an example, when the type of the reference signal is SSB, at least part of the configuration information of SSB may be, for example, at least part of the information in MIB and/or SIB1 (for example, ssb-SubcarrierOffset and/or systemFrameNumber); when the reference signal is CSI-RS or TRS, at least part of the configuration information of CSI-RS or TRS may be, for example, at least part of the information of CSI-RS or TRS (for example, at least one of scellActivationRS-Id, SCellActivationRS-ConfigId-r17, resourceSet, NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId, gapBetweenBursts, and qcl-Info-r17).

在一些实施例中,在第二小区的参考信号用于终端设备与第一小区执行DL同步或DL定时的情况下,该参考信号的类型是由网络设备指示的。也就是说,终端设备在与第一小区执行DL同步或DL定时的过程中,终端设备所使用的参考信号的类型是由网络设备指示的。换句话说,网络设备可向终端设备指示使用哪个(哪种)参考信号与第一小区执行DL同步或DL定时。例如,网络设备可向终端设备指示使用SSB还是TRS还是CSI-RS与第一小区执行DL同步或DL定时。In some embodiments, when the reference signal of the second cell is used for the terminal device to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell, the type of the reference signal is indicated by the network device. That is, in the process of the terminal device performing DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell, the type of reference signal used by the terminal device is indicated by the network device. In other words, the network device may indicate to the terminal device which reference signal (which type) to use to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell. For example, the network device may indicate to the terminal device whether to use SSB, TRS or CSI-RS to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell.

下面对本实施例中的第二小区进行介绍。The second cell in this embodiment is introduced below.

在一些实施例中,第二小区是由网络设备指示的;或者,第二小区是终端设备或网络设备预配置的;或者,第二小区是预定义的(如协议预定义);或者,第二小区是由终端设备确定/选择的。换句话说,哪个小区是用于终端设备与第一小区执行DL同步或DL定时的小区,是由网络设备指示的,或者,是终端设备或网络设备预配置的,或者,是预定义的(如协议预定义),或者,是由终端设备确定/选择的。In some embodiments, the second cell is indicated by the network device; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the terminal device or the network device; or, the second cell is predefined (such as predefined by a protocol); or, the second cell is determined/selected by the terminal device. In other words, which cell is used for the terminal device to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell is indicated by the network device, or, is preconfigured by the terminal device or the network device, or, is predefined (such as predefined by a protocol), or, is determined/selected by the terminal device.

在一些实施例中,第二小区是由终端设备基于来自网络设备的第一信息确定/选择的,第一信息例如可包括以下至少之一:该网络设备的位置信息;该网络设备的相邻网络设备的位置信息;该网络设备包括的第三小区的位置信息,第三小区为终端设备所在的小区;与第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;各个网络设备之间的共站址(co-located)信息;各个小区之间的共站址信息;参考信号之间的QCL信息;信道之间的QCL信息;以及,定位信息。In some embodiments, the second cell is determined/selected by the terminal device based on first information from the network device, and the first information may, for example, include at least one of the following: location information of the network device; location information of adjacent network devices of the network device; location information of a third cell included in the network device, the third cell being the cell where the terminal device is located; location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; co-located information between various network devices; co-located information between various cells; QCL information between reference signals; QCL information between channels; and positioning information.

在一些实施例中,第二小区是由网络设备通过第三指示信息指示的。例如,网络设备可向终端设备发送第三指示信息,相应地,终端设备可接收来自网络设备的第三指示信息,从而,终端设备可基于该 第三指示信息获知第二小区即为用于终端设备与第一小区执行DL同步或DL定时的小区。In some embodiments, the second cell is indicated by the network device through third indication information. For example, the network device may send the third indication information to the terminal device, and accordingly, the terminal device may receive the third indication information from the network device, so that the terminal device may The third indication information indicates that the second cell is the cell used for the terminal device to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell.

示例性地,第三指示信息例如可包括:第二小区的频点和/或小区标识。其中,频点可以是频点索引(index)如,SIB3/4/5中邻频点中的一个索引,又如SIB2的频点索引(服务小区的频点索引)。或者,频点可以是频点值(ARFCN-ValueNR)。或者,频点可以是SIB2的频点值(服务小区的频点值)。小区标识例如可以是物理小区标识(Physical Cell Identity,PCI)或全球小区标识。在一些实施例中,频点值可以使用absoluteFrequencySSB提供,或,其他IE提供。在一些实施例中,在频点值可以使用absoluteFrequencySSB提供的情况下,所述频点,可以是当前服务小区的频点,也可以是参考小区或获取下行定时小区的频点(如SSB-less SCell从另一个小区获取下行定时,则给出另一个小区或小区的SSB的频点)。Exemplarily, the third indication information may include, for example, the frequency and/or cell identifier of the second cell. The frequency may be a frequency index (index), such as an index of an adjacent frequency in SIB3/4/5, or a frequency index of SIB2 (frequency index of the serving cell). Alternatively, the frequency may be a frequency value (ARFCN-ValueNR). Alternatively, the frequency may be a frequency value of SIB2 (frequency value of the serving cell). The cell identifier may be, for example, a physical cell identifier (Physical Cell Identity, PCI) or a global cell identifier. In some embodiments, the frequency value may be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, or other IEs. In some embodiments, when the frequency value may be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, the frequency may be the frequency of the current serving cell, or the frequency of a reference cell or a cell for obtaining downlink timing (such as when an SSB-less SCell obtains downlink timing from another cell, the frequency of another cell or the SSB of the cell is given).

在一些实施例中,第三指示信息是在第一条件下配置的。第一条件例如可包括以下至少之一:SCellAdd的条件;SCellAddMod的条件;SCellOnly的条件;以及,SCelladdOnly的条件。也就是说,第三指示信息可在SCellAdd的条件下、SCellAddMod的条件下、SCellOnly的条件下、SCelladdOnly的条件下中的至少一个条件下配置。作为一种实现方式,第三指示信息可在SCellAdd的条件下配置,或者,可在SCellAddMod的条件下配置,或者,可在SCellOnly的条件下配置,或者,可在SCelladdOnly的条件下配置。对上述条件的说明可参见下文中的表1。In some embodiments, the third indication information is configured under the first condition. The first condition may, for example, include at least one of the following: the condition of SCellAdd; the condition of SCellAddMod; the condition of SCellOnly; and the condition of SCelladdOnly. That is, the third indication information may be configured under at least one of the conditions of SCellAdd, SCellAddMod, SCellOnly, and SCelladdOnly. As an implementation method, the third indication information may be configured under the condition of SCellAdd, or, may be configured under the condition of SCellAddMod, or, may be configured under the condition of SCellOnly, or, may be configured under the condition of SCelladdOnly. For a description of the above conditions, see Table 1 below.

在一些实施例中,第三指示信息是在SCell添加的情况下可选配置的。In some embodiments, the third indication information is optionally configured when an SCell is added.

在一些实施例中,若第三指示信息出现,或者说,若网络设备向终端设备发送了第三指示信息,那么,终端设备可基于该第三指示信息所指示的第二小区与第一小区执行DL同步或DL定时;若第三指示信息未出现,或者说,若网络设备未向终端设备发送第三指示信息,那么,终端设备可将默认小区(default cell)作为第二小区,并基于默认小区与第一小区执行DL同步或DL定时;或者,终端设备可自主确定/选择一个小区作为第二小区,并基于该确定/选择的小区与第一小区执行DL同步或DL定时。In some embodiments, if the third indication information appears, or in other words, if the network device sends the third indication information to the terminal device, the terminal device may perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell based on the second cell indicated by the third indication information; if the third indication information does not appear, or in other words, if the network device does not send the third indication information to the terminal device, the terminal device may use the default cell as the second cell, and perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell based on the default cell; or, the terminal device may autonomously determine/select a cell as the second cell, and perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell based on the determined/selected cell.

在一些实施例中,第一小区与第二小区属于同一个TA组和/或小区组。In some embodiments, the first cell and the second cell belong to the same TA group and/or cell group.

在一种可能的方式中,该TA组和/或小区组是由网络设备基于第二信息确定的。示例性地,第二信息例如可包括以下至少之一:参考信号的测量结果;定位信息(如终端设备的位置信息,和/或,与终端设备相邻的网络设备的位置信息);终端设备的运动轨迹信息;该网络设备的位置信息;该网络设备的相邻网络设备的位置信息;该网络设备包括的第三小区的位置信息,第三小区为终端设备所在的小区;与第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;各个网络设备之间的共站址信息;以及,各个小区之间的共站址信息。In one possible manner, the TA group and/or cell group is determined by the network device based on the second information. Exemplarily, the second information may include at least one of the following: measurement results of reference signals; positioning information (such as location information of the terminal device, and/or location information of network devices adjacent to the terminal device); movement trajectory information of the terminal device; location information of the network device; location information of adjacent network devices of the network device; location information of a third cell included in the network device, the third cell being the cell where the terminal device is located; location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; and, co-site information between various cells.

其中,上述参考信号的测量结果、定位信息、终端设备的运动轨迹信息中的至少一项信息,例如可以是终端设备向网络设备发送的。也即,终端设备可向网络设备发送参考信号的测量结果、定位信息、终端设备的运动轨迹信息中的至少一项信息,以用于网络设备确定该TA组和/或小区组。Among them, at least one of the measurement result of the reference signal, the positioning information, and the movement trajectory information of the terminal device may be, for example, sent by the terminal device to the network device. That is, the terminal device may send at least one of the measurement result of the reference signal, the positioning information, and the movement trajectory information of the terminal device to the network device, so that the network device can determine the TA group and/or cell group.

在一些实施例中,第二小区是网络设备指示终端设备激活的;或者,第二小区是终端设备在第二条件下激活的。In some embodiments, the second cell is activated by the terminal device by instructing the network device to activate the second cell; or, the second cell is activated by the terminal device under the second condition.

一种可能的情况,第二小区是网络设备指示终端设备激活的。一示例,网络设备可通过RRC配置向终端设备指示激活第二小区。例如,网络设备可将RRC配置中的scellState(如在SCellConfig中)设置为激活(activated),以指示激活该第二小区。另一示例,网络设备可通过MAC CE(如SCell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE,enhanced Sell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE,或新的SCell激活/去激活MAC CE)向终端设备指示激活该第二小区。In one possible scenario, the second cell is activated by the terminal device by instructing the network device. In one example, the network device may instruct the terminal device to activate the second cell through RRC configuration. For example, the network device may set the scellState in the RRC configuration (such as in SCellConfig) to activated to indicate the activation of the second cell. In another example, the network device may instruct the terminal device to activate the second cell through MAC CE (such as SCell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE, enhanced Sell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE, or new SCell activation/deactivation MAC CE).

另一种可能的情况,第二小区是终端设备在第二条件下激活的。Another possible situation is that the second cell is activated by the terminal device under the second condition.

示例性地,第二条件例如可包括以下至少之一:第二小区的去激活定时器超时;第二小区的去激活定时器需启动;第二小区的去激活定时器需重启;终端设备获取到用于指示第二小区的指示信息;终端设备获取到第二小区的参考信号;终端设备执行与第一小区的上行同步或下行同步;终端设备获取到第一小区的配置;第一小区被激活;以及,第一小区需被激活。Exemplarily, the second condition may include at least one of the following: the deactivation timer of the second cell times out; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be started; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be restarted; the terminal device obtains indication information for indicating the second cell; the terminal device obtains the reference signal of the second cell; the terminal device performs uplink synchronization or downlink synchronization with the first cell; the terminal device obtains the configuration of the first cell; the first cell is activated; and, the first cell needs to be activated.

根据本实施例的方法,明确了终端设备如何与第一小区(SSB-less Scell)进行DL同步或DL定时。According to the method of this embodiment, it is clarified how the terminal device performs DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell (SSB-less Scell).

为便于理解本申请的实施例,下面结合示例,介绍适用于图3所示方法的可能的实现方案,例如可针对前述场景2a。To facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, a possible implementation scheme applicable to the method shown in FIG. 3 is introduced below with reference to examples, for example, for the aforementioned scenario 2a.

在一些实施例中,为实现UE与SSB-less SCell的DL同步或DL定时,需激活特定小区。其中,特定小区为用于UE与第一小区执行DL同步或DL定时的小区。在本实施例中,特定小区例如可以为参考小区,或者说,特定小区还可以替换为参考小区。In some embodiments, in order to achieve DL synchronization or DL timing between the UE and the SSB-less SCell, a specific cell needs to be activated. The specific cell is a cell used for the UE to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the first cell. In this embodiment, the specific cell can be, for example, a reference cell, or the specific cell can also be replaced by a reference cell.

作为示例,针对特定小区,网络可将scellState(如在SCellConfig中)设置为激活(activated),以激活该特定小区;或者,网络可通过MAC CE(如SCell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE,enhanced Sell  Activation/Deactivation MAC CE,或新的SCell激活/去激活MAC CE)激活该特定小区;或者,UE可在获取到特定小区为某个SCell的情况下,或在基于特定小区执行与SSB-less SCell的同步的情况下,UE可启动或重启sCellDeactivationTimer;或者,UE可在第二条件下激活特定小区。其中,第二条件例如可包括以下至少之一:获取到用于指示特定小区的指示信息;获取到特定小区的参考信号(如SSB/CSI-RS/TRS);UE执行与SSB-less SCell的上行同步或下行同步;获取到SSB-less SCell的配置;SSB-less SCell被激活或需要激活。As an example, for a specific cell, the network may set scellState (such as in SCellConfig) to activated to activate the specific cell; or the network may use MAC CE (such as SCell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE, enhanced Sell Activation/Deactivation MAC CE, or new SCell activation/deactivation MAC CE) activates the specific cell; or, the UE may start or restart sCellDeactivationTimer when it is obtained that the specific cell is a certain SCell, or when synchronization with the SSB-less SCell is performed based on the specific cell; or, the UE may activate the specific cell under the second condition. The second condition may, for example, include at least one of the following: obtaining indication information for indicating the specific cell; obtaining a reference signal (such as SSB/CSI-RS/TRS) of the specific cell; the UE performs uplink synchronization or downlink synchronization with the SSB-less SCell; obtaining the configuration of the SSB-less SCell; the SSB-less SCell is activated or needs to be activated.

应理解,上述激活特定小区的方案还可以适用于本申请实施例中的其他各个实施例。It should be understood that the above-mentioned solution for activating a specific cell may also be applicable to other embodiments in the embodiments of the present application.

在一些实施例中,对于SSB-less SCell,网络可指示UE哪个小区(如指示小区标识、SSB频点等)为SSB-less SCell的特定小区。从而,UE可根据特定小区的SSB执行与SSB-less SCell的DL同步或DL定时。在一些实施例中,网络可同时指示UE该特定小区的SSB配置信息,如MIB和/或SIB1中的至少部分信息(例如:ssb-SubcarrierOffset和/或systemFrameNumber)。可以理解的是,若网络指示了特定小区的SSB配置信息,则UE可以不需要从特定小区读取该特定小区的SSB配置信息(如MIB和/或SIB1)。In some embodiments, for an SSB-less SCell, the network may indicate to the UE which cell (such as indicating a cell identifier, SSB frequency, etc.) is a specific cell of the SSB-less SCell. Thus, the UE may perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the SSB-less SCell according to the SSB of the specific cell. In some embodiments, the network may simultaneously indicate to the UE the SSB configuration information of the specific cell, such as at least part of the information in the MIB and/or SIB1 (for example, ssb-SubcarrierOffset and/or systemFrameNumber). It is understandable that if the network indicates the SSB configuration information of a specific cell, the UE may not need to read the SSB configuration information of the specific cell (such as MIB and/or SIB1) from the specific cell.

在一些实施例中,对于SSB-less SCell,网络可指示UE哪个小区(如指示小区标识、SSB频点等)为SSB-less SCell的特定小区。从而,UE可根据特定小区的CSI-RS或TRS执行与SSB-less SCell的DL同步或DL定时。在一些实施例中,网络可同时指示UE该特定小区的至少部分CSI-RS或TRS的配置信息,如CSI-RS或TRS的至少部分信息(例如:scellActivationRS-Id、SCellActivationRS-ConfigId-r17、resourceSet、NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId、gapBetweenBursts、qcl-Info-r17中至少之一)。可以理解的是,若网络指示了特定小区的CSI-RS或TRS的配置信息,则UE可以不需要接入该特定小区以获取CSI-RS或TRS的配置信息。In some embodiments, for an SSB-less SCell, the network may indicate to the UE which cell (such as indicating a cell identifier, SSB frequency, etc.) is a specific cell of the SSB-less SCell. Thus, the UE may perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the SSB-less SCell according to the CSI-RS or TRS of the specific cell. In some embodiments, the network may simultaneously indicate to the UE at least part of the configuration information of the CSI-RS or TRS of the specific cell, such as at least part of the information of the CSI-RS or TRS (for example, at least one of scellActivationRS-Id, SCellActivationRS-ConfigId-r17, resourceSet, NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId, gapBetweenBursts, and qcl-Info-r17). It is understandable that if the network indicates the configuration information of the CSI-RS or TRS of a specific cell, the UE may not need to access the specific cell to obtain the configuration information of the CSI-RS or TRS.

在一些实施例中,对于SSB-less SCell,若网络未指示UE哪个小区(如未指示小区标识、SSB频点等)为SSB-less SCell的特定小区,则UE可基于默认小区(default cell)的参考信号(如SSB/CSI-RS/TRS)执行与SSB-less SCell的DL同步或DL定时,也即,UE可将该默认小区作为SSB-less SCell的特定小区。示例性地,UE例如可通过以下任一方式获知哪个小区为默认小区:网络指示;UE自主确定/选择;预定义(如协议预定义);UE预配置。作为示例,默认小区例如可以为以下任一小区:PCell;PSCell;与SSB-less SCell在同一个小区组的PCell或PSCell;与SSB-less SCell在同一个小区组的任意一个小区;与SSB-less SCell在同一个小区组的小区索引(index)最小的小区;与SSB-less SCell在同一个小区组的小区索引最大的小区;与SSB-less SCell在同一个TA组的任意一个小区;与SSB-less SCell在同一个TA组的小区索引最小的小区;与SSB-less SCell在同一个TA组的小区索引最大的小区。In some embodiments, for an SSB-less SCell, if the network does not indicate to the UE which cell (such as the cell identifier, SSB frequency, etc.) is a specific cell of the SSB-less SCell, the UE may perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the SSB-less SCell based on the reference signal (such as SSB/CSI-RS/TRS) of the default cell, that is, the UE may use the default cell as a specific cell of the SSB-less SCell. Exemplarily, the UE may learn which cell is the default cell by any of the following methods: network indication; UE autonomous determination/selection; pre-definition (such as protocol pre-definition); UE pre-configuration. As an example, the default cell may be any of the following cells: PCell; PSCell; PCell or PSCell in the same cell group as the SSB-less SCell; any cell in the same cell group as the SSB-less SCell; the cell with the smallest cell index in the same cell group as the SSB-less SCell; the cell with the largest cell index in the same cell group as the SSB-less SCell; any cell in the same TA group as the SSB-less SCell; the cell with the smallest cell index in the same TA group as the SSB-less SCell; the cell with the largest cell index in the same TA group as the SSB-less SCell.

在一些实施例中,网络可指示UE默认小区的参考信号(如SSB/CSI-RS/TRS)的配置信息。例如,针对SSB,网络可指示MIB和/或SIB1中的至少部分信息(例如:ssb-SubcarrierOffset和/或systemFrameNumber)。在该情况下,UE可以不需要从默认小区读取该默认小区的SSB配置信息(如MIB和/或SIB1)。例如,针对CSI-RS或TRS,网络可指示CSI-RS或TRS的至少部分信息(例如:scellActivationRS-Id、SCellActivationRS-ConfigId-r17、resourceSet、NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId、gapBetweenBursts、qcl-Info-r17中至少之一)。在该情况下,UE可以不需要接入该默认小区以获取CSI-RS或TRS的配置信息。In some embodiments, the network may indicate the configuration information of the reference signal (such as SSB/CSI-RS/TRS) of the default cell of the UE. For example, for SSB, the network may indicate at least part of the information in MIB and/or SIB1 (for example: ssb-SubcarrierOffset and/or systemFrameNumber). In this case, the UE may not need to read the SSB configuration information (such as MIB and/or SIB1) of the default cell from the default cell. For example, for CSI-RS or TRS, the network may indicate at least part of the information of CSI-RS or TRS (for example: at least one of scellActivationRS-Id, SCellActivationRS-ConfigId-r17, resourceSet, NZP-CSI-RS-ResourceSetId, gapBetweenBursts, qcl-Info-r17). In this case, the UE may not need to access the default cell to obtain the configuration information of CSI-RS or TRS.

在一些实施例中,UE可根据特定小区/默认小区的SSB/CSI-RS/TRS,与SSB-less SCell进行DL同步或DL定时。例如,UE可接收或测量特定小区/默认小区的SSB/CSI-RS/TRS,以获取同步信息,并可认为该同步信息也是SSB-less SCell的同步信息,进而,UE可基于该同步信息与SSB-less SCell执行DL同步或DL定时。In some embodiments, the UE may perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the SSB-less SCell based on the SSB/CSI-RS/TRS of the specific cell/default cell. For example, the UE may receive or measure the SSB/CSI-RS/TRS of the specific cell/default cell to obtain synchronization information, and may consider that the synchronization information is also the synchronization information of the SSB-less SCell, and then, the UE may perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the SSB-less SCell based on the synchronization information.

在一些实施例中,对于特定小区/默认小区,网络可指示UE是基于特定小区/默认小区的哪个(哪种)参考信号执行与SSB-less SCell的DL同步或DL定时。例如,网络可指示UE根据SSB还是CSI-RS还是TRS进行DL同步或DL定时。In some embodiments, for a specific cell/default cell, the network may instruct the UE on which reference signal(s) of the specific cell/default cell to perform DL synchronization or DL timing with the SSB-less SCell. For example, the network may instruct the UE to perform DL synchronization or DL timing based on SSB, CSI-RS, or TRS.

上述DL同步或DL定时方案的实现方式举例如下:The implementation of the above DL synchronization or DL timing solution is exemplified as follows:

作为示例,网络配置SSB-less SCell(记为小区#1)的配置给UE,和/或,指示SCell(记为小区#2)为小区#1的特定小区,则网络可通过MAC CE或RRC配置(如scellState)向UE指示激活小区#2。相应地,UE可激活小区#2,并根据小区#2的SSB配置(如网络指示UE基于小区#2的SSB执行DL同步或DL定时),执行与小区#1的DL同步或DL定时。As an example, the network configures the configuration of the SSB-less SCell (denoted as cell #1) to the UE, and/or indicates that the SCell (denoted as cell #2) is a specific cell of cell #1, then the network may indicate to the UE via MAC CE or RRC configuration (such as scellState) to activate cell #2. Accordingly, the UE may activate cell #2 and perform DL synchronization or DL timing with cell #1 according to the SSB configuration of cell #2 (such as the network instructing the UE to perform DL synchronization or DL timing based on the SSB of cell #2).

上面介绍了针对前述场景2a的DL同步/DL定时方案,在一些实施例中,针对前述场景2,对于SSB-less SCell,UE可基于SSB-less SCell的DL或UL数据信号做定时。例如,UE可基于SSB-less SCell的DL数据信号,做DL定时或DL同步;又例如,UE可基于SSB-less SCell的UL数据信号,做UL定时或获取TA。 The DL synchronization/DL timing scheme for the aforementioned scenario 2a is introduced above. In some embodiments, for the aforementioned scenario 2, for the SSB-less SCell, the UE may perform timing based on the DL or UL data signal of the SSB-less SCell. For example, the UE may perform DL timing or DL synchronization based on the DL data signal of the SSB-less SCell; for another example, the UE may perform UL timing or obtain TA based on the UL data signal of the SSB-less SCell.

在一些实施例中,网络可通过第一参数(对应前述实施例中的第三指示信息)向UE指示特定小区和/或默认小区。也即,第一参数可用于指示特定小区和/或默认小区是哪个小区。作为示例,第一参数例如可以包括特定小区和/或默认小区的信息(如频点,小区标识等)。也就是说,网络可通过指示特定小区和/或默认小区的信息(如频点,小区标识等)从而向UE指示特定小区和/或默认小区。其中,频点可以是频点索引(index)如,SIB3/4/5中邻频点中的一个索引,又如SIB2的频点索引(服务小区的频点索引)。或者,频点可以是频点值(ARFCN-ValueNR)。或者,频点可以是SIB2的频点值(服务小区的频点值)。小区标识例如可以是PCI,或,全球小区标识。在一些实施例中,频点值可以使用absoluteFrequencySSB提供,或,其他IE提供。在一些实施例中,在频点值可以使用absoluteFrequencySSB提供的情况下,所述频点,可以是当前服务小区的频点,也可以是参考小区或获取下行定时小区的频点(如SSB-less SCell从另一个小区获取下行定时,则给出另一个小区或小区的SSB的频点)。In some embodiments, the network may indicate a specific cell and/or a default cell to the UE through a first parameter (corresponding to the third indication information in the aforementioned embodiment). That is, the first parameter may be used to indicate which cell the specific cell and/or the default cell is. As an example, the first parameter may include information about the specific cell and/or the default cell (such as frequency, cell identifier, etc.). That is, the network may indicate the specific cell and/or the default cell to the UE by indicating information about the specific cell and/or the default cell (such as frequency, cell identifier, etc.). Among them, the frequency may be a frequency index (index), such as an index of an adjacent frequency in SIB3/4/5, or a frequency index of SIB2 (frequency index of the serving cell). Alternatively, the frequency may be a frequency value (ARFCN-ValueNR). Alternatively, the frequency may be a frequency value of SIB2 (frequency value of the serving cell). The cell identifier may be, for example, a PCI, or a global cell identifier. In some embodiments, the frequency value may be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, or provided by other IEs. In some embodiments, when the frequency value can be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, the frequency may be the frequency of the current serving cell, or the frequency of the reference cell or the cell for obtaining downlink timing (if the SSB-less SCell obtains downlink timing from another cell, the frequency of another cell or the SSB of the cell is given).

示例性地,第一参数例如可在第一条件下配置。第一条件例如可包括以下至少之一:SCellAdd的条件;SCellAddMod的条件;SCellOnly的条件;以及,SCelladdOnly的条件。也就是说,第一参数可在SCellAdd的条件下、SCellAddMod的条件下、SCellOnly的条件下、SCelladdOnly的条件下中的至少一个条件下配置。作为一种实现方式,第一参数可在SCellAdd的条件下配置,或者,可在SCellAddMod的条件下配置,或者,可在SCellOnly的条件下配置,或者,可在SCelladdOnly的条件下配置。上述条件的说明可参见表1。Exemplarily, the first parameter may be configured under a first condition, for example. The first condition may include, for example, at least one of the following: a condition of SCellAdd; a condition of SCellAddMod; a condition of SCellOnly; and a condition of SCelladdOnly. That is, the first parameter may be configured under at least one of the conditions of SCellAdd, SCellAddMod, SCellOnly, and SCelladdOnly. As an implementation, the first parameter may be configured under the condition of SCellAdd, or, may be configured under the condition of SCellAddMod, or, may be configured under the condition of SCellOnly, or, may be configured under the condition of SCelladdOnly. For a description of the above conditions, see Table 1.

表1
Table 1

示例性地,第一参数例如可包括在以下至少一项信息中:RRC重配置,ReconfigurationWithSync;ScellConfig;ServingCellConfigCommon;downlinkConfigCommon;FrequencyInfoDL。Exemplarily, the first parameter may be included in at least one of the following information: RRC reconfiguration, ReconfigurationWithSync; ScellConfig; ServingCellConfigCommon; downlinkConfigCommon; FrequencyInfoDL.

在一种可能的方式中,第一参数用于指示特定小区。在该情况下,若第一参数出现,或者说,若网络向UE指示了第一参数,则UE可基于该第一参数所指示的特定小区获取定时参考(timing reference);若第一参数未出现,或者说,若网络未向UE指示第一参数,则UE可基于默认小区或UE自主确定的小区获取定时参考。In one possible manner, the first parameter is used to indicate a specific cell. In this case, if the first parameter appears, or in other words, if the network indicates the first parameter to the UE, the UE may obtain a timing reference based on the specific cell indicated by the first parameter; if the first parameter does not appear, or in other words, if the network does not indicate the first parameter to the UE, the UE may obtain a timing reference based on a default cell or a cell determined autonomously by the UE.

在另一种可能的方式中,第一参数用于指示默认小区。在该情况下,若第一参数出现,或者说,若网络向UE指示了第一参数,则UE可基于该第一参数所指示的默认小区获取定时参考;若第一参数未出现,或者说,若网络未向UE指示第一参数,则UE可基于UE自主确定的小区获取定时参考。In another possible manner, the first parameter is used to indicate a default cell. In this case, if the first parameter appears, or if the network indicates the first parameter to the UE, the UE may acquire a timing reference based on the default cell indicated by the first parameter; if the first parameter does not appear, or if the network does not indicate the first parameter to the UE, the UE may acquire a timing reference based on a cell autonomously determined by the UE.

在一些实施例中,上述UE对第一参数的使用方式,可在UE获得定时参考的SCell与UE获得定时参考的cell处于不同频带的情况下支持(only supported in case the SCell for which the UE obtains the timing reference is in the different frequency band as the cell from which the UE obtains the timing reference);和/或;可在UE获得定时参考的SCell与UE获得定时参考的cell为不同频带且共站址的情况下支持(only supported in case the SCell for which the UE obtains the timing reference is in the inter-band and co-located as the cell from which the UE obtains the timing reference) In some embodiments, the above-mentioned use of the first parameter by the UE may be supported in the case where the SCell for which the UE obtains the timing reference and the cell from which the UE obtains the timing reference are in different frequency bands (only supported in case the SCell for which the UE obtains the timing reference is in the different frequency band as the cell from which the UE obtains the timing reference); and/or; may be supported in the case where the SCell for which the UE obtains the timing reference and the cell from which the UE obtains the timing reference are in different frequency bands and co-located (only supported in case the SCell for which the UE obtains the timing reference is in the inter-band and co-located as the cell from which the UE obtains the timing reference)

在一些实施例中,当将SSB-less SCell配置给UE时,并且在UE需要从不同频带上的另一个小区获得该SCell的定时参考的情况下,网络可在FrequencyInfoDL IE中添加新的指示,以指示哪个小区是该SCell的特定小区(或参考小区)。在一些实施例中,特定小区(或参考小区)的信息至少包括SSB频率和/或PCI。SSB频率可表示为ARFCN ValueNR,PCI可表示为PhysCellId。在一些实施例中,特定小区(或参考小区)的信息,可以只给SSB频率,也可以给SSB频率和PCI。在一些实施例中,SSB频率或频点值可以使用absoluteFrequencySSB提供,或,其他IE提供。在一些实施例中,在频点值可以使用absoluteFrequencySSB提供的情况下,所述频点,可以是当前服务小区的频点,也可以是参考小区或获取下行定时小区的频点(如SSB-less SCell从另一个小区获取下行定时,则给出另一个小区或小区的SSB的频点)。在一些实施例中,在absoluteFrequencySSB出现的情况下,或absoluteFrequencySSB出现且PCI配置的情况下,UE从另一个小区(如特定小区或参考小区)获取该SSB-less SCell的定时参考。在一些实施例中,在添加新的SCell时,特定小区(或参考小区)的信息存在。(例如:When configuring the SSB-less SCell to a UE and in the case that UE needs to obtain the timing reference for this SCell from another cell on the different frequency band,the network would add the new indication in FrequencyInfoDL IE to indicate which is the reference cell of this SCell.As required by RAN4,the information of the reference cell would at least include SSB frequency and PCI.In our view,SSB frequency would be represent as ARFCN-ValueNR and PCI would be represented as PhysCellId.Similarly,the information of the reference cell would be optionally present upon adding a new SCell.)In some embodiments, when an SSB-less SCell is configured for a UE, and in the case where the UE needs to obtain a timing reference for the SCell from another cell on a different frequency band, the network may add a new indication in the FrequencyInfoDL IE to indicate which cell is the specific cell (or reference cell) for the SCell. In some embodiments, the information of the specific cell (or reference cell) includes at least the SSB frequency and/or the PCI. The SSB frequency may be represented as ARFCN ValueNR, and the PCI may be represented as PhysCellId. In some embodiments, the information of the specific cell (or reference cell) may be given only the SSB frequency, or the SSB frequency and the PCI. In some embodiments, the SSB frequency or frequency point value may be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, or provided by other IEs. In some embodiments, in the case where the frequency point value may be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, the frequency point may be the frequency point of the current serving cell, or the frequency point of the reference cell or the cell for obtaining downlink timing (e.g., if the SSB-less SCell obtains downlink timing from another cell, the frequency point of the SSB of another cell or cell is given). In some embodiments, in the presence of absoluteFrequencySSB, or in the presence of absoluteFrequencySSB and PCI configuration, the UE obtains the timing reference for this SSB-less SCell from another cell (such as a specific cell or a reference cell). In some embodiments, when adding a new SCell, the information of the specific cell (or reference cell) exists. (For example: When configuring the SSB-less SCell to a UE and in the case that UE needs to obtain the timing reference for this SCell from another cell on the different frequency band, the network would add the new indication in FrequencyInfoDL IE to indicate which is the reference cell of this SCell. As required ed by RAN4,the information of the reference cell would at least include SSB frequency and PCI.In our view,SSB frequency would be represent as ARFCN-Va lueNR and PCI would be represented as PhysCellId.Similarly, the information of the reference cell would be optionally present upon adding a new SCell.)

在一些实施例中,在absoluteFrequencySSB不存在和/或UE从不同频带上的特定小区(或参考小区)获得SSB-less SCell的定时参考的情况下,FrequencyInfoDL IE被扩展以指示特定小区(或参考小区)的信息。在一些实施例中,特定小区(或参考小区)的信息包括特定小区(或参考小区)的ARFCN ValueNR和/或PhysCellId。在一些实施例中,特定小区(或参考小区)的信息,可以只给SSB频率,也可以给SSB频率和PCI。在一些实施例中,SSB频率或频点值可以使用absoluteFrequencySSB提供,或,其他IE提供。在一些实施例中,在频点值可以使用absoluteFrequencySSB提供的情况下,所述频点,可以是当前服务小区的频点,也可以是参考小区或获取下行定时小区的频点(如SSB-less SCell从另一个小区获取下行定时,则给出另一个小区或小区的SSB的频点)。在一些实施例中,在absoluteFrequencySSB出现的情况下,或absoluteFrequencySSB出现且PCI配置的情况下,UE从另一个小区(如特定小区或参考小区)获取该SSB-less SCell的定时参考。(例如:In the case that absoluteFrequencySSB is absent and/or the UE obtains the timing reference for SSB-less SCell from the reference cell that is on the different frequency band,FrequencyInfoDL IE is extended to indicate the information of the reference cell.Optionally,the information of the reference cell includes ARFCN-ValueNR and PhysCellId of the reference cell.)In some embodiments, when absoluteFrequencySSB does not exist and/or the UE obtains the timing reference of the SSB-less SCell from a specific cell (or reference cell) on a different frequency band, the FrequencyInfoDL IE is extended to indicate the information of the specific cell (or reference cell). In some embodiments, the information of the specific cell (or reference cell) includes the ARFCN ValueNR and/or PhysCellId of the specific cell (or reference cell). In some embodiments, the information of the specific cell (or reference cell) may be given only the SSB frequency, or the SSB frequency and PCI. In some embodiments, the SSB frequency or frequency point value may be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, or other IEs. In some embodiments, when the frequency point value may be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, the frequency point may be the frequency point of the current serving cell, or the frequency point of the reference cell or the cell that obtains the downlink timing (if the SSB-less SCell obtains the downlink timing from another cell, the frequency point of the SSB of another cell or cell is given). In some embodiments, in the case that absoluteFrequencySSB is absent, or in the case that absoluteFrequencySSB is present and PCI is configured, the UE obtains the timing reference for the SSB-less SCell from another cell (such as a specific cell or a reference cell). (For example: In the case that absoluteFrequencySSB is absent and/or the UE obtains the timing reference for SSB-less SCell from the reference cell that is on the different frequency band, FrequencyInfoDL IE is extended to indicate the information of the reference cell. Optionally, the information of the reference cell includes ARFCN-ValueNR and PhysCellId of the reference cell.)

在一些实施例中,在absoluteFrequencySSB不存在和/或UE被配置特定小区(或参考小区)的情况下,或者,在absoluteFrequencySSB不存在和/或UE被配置特定小区(或参考小区)获得SSB-less SCell的定时参考的情况下,UE通过特定小区(或参考小区)获取定时参考,或者,获取SSB-less Scell的定时参考。在一些实施例中,特定小区(或参考小区)的信息包括在FrequencyInfoDL IE中。在一些实施例中,特定小区(或参考小区)的信息包括特定小区(或参考小区)的ARFCN ValueNR和/或PhysCellId。In some embodiments, when absoluteFrequencySSB does not exist and/or the UE is configured with a specific cell (or reference cell), or when absoluteFrequencySSB does not exist and/or the UE is configured with a specific cell (or reference cell) to obtain a timing reference for an SSB-less SCell, the UE obtains a timing reference through the specific cell (or reference cell), or obtains a timing reference for an SSB-less SCell. In some embodiments, the information of the specific cell (or reference cell) is included in the FrequencyInfoDL IE. In some embodiments, the information of the specific cell (or reference cell) includes the ARFCN ValueNR and/or PhysCellId of the specific cell (or reference cell).

在一些实施例中,如果absoluteFrequencySSB不存在和/或存在特定小区(或参考小区)的信息,则UE从特定小区(或参考小区)获得SSB-less SCell的定时参考。在一些实施例中,该方案可在UE获得定时参考的SCell与UE获得定时参考的小区(即特定小区)处于不同频带的情况下支持。在一些实施例中,特定小区(或参考小区)的信息,可以只给SSB频率,也可以给SSB频率和PCI。在一些实施例中,SSB频率或频点值可以使用absoluteFrequencySSB提供,或,其他IE提供。在一些实施例中,在频点值可以使用absoluteFrequencySSB提供的情况下,所述频点,可以是当前服务小区的频点,也可以是参考小区或获取下行定时小区的频点(如SSB-less SCell从另一个小区获取下行定时,则给出另一个小区或小区的SSB的频点)。在一些实施例中,在absoluteFrequencySSB出现的情况下,或absoluteFrequencySSB出现且PCI配置的情况下,UE从另一个小区(如特定小区或参考小区)获取该SSB-less scell的定时参考。(例如:If absoluteFrequencySSB is absent and/or the information of the reference cell is present,the UE obtains the timing reference for SSB-less SCell from the reference cell.Optionally,This is only supported in case the SCell for which the UE obtains the timing reference is in the different frequency band as the cell(i.e.the reference cell)from which the UE obtains the timing reference.)In some embodiments, if absoluteFrequencySSB does not exist and/or information of a specific cell (or reference cell) exists, the UE obtains the timing reference of the SSB-less SCell from the specific cell (or reference cell). In some embodiments, this scheme can be supported when the SCell from which the UE obtains the timing reference and the cell from which the UE obtains the timing reference (i.e., the specific cell) are in different frequency bands. In some embodiments, the information of the specific cell (or reference cell) can be given only the SSB frequency, or the SSB frequency and PCI. In some embodiments, the SSB frequency or frequency point value can be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, or other IEs. In some embodiments, when the frequency point value can be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, the frequency point can be the frequency point of the current serving cell, or the frequency point of the reference cell or the cell for obtaining downlink timing (such as when the SSB-less SCell obtains downlink timing from another cell, the frequency point of the SSB of another cell or cell is given). In some embodiments, in the presence of absoluteFrequencySSB, or in the presence of absoluteFrequencySSB and PCI configuration, the UE obtains the timing reference for the SSB-less SCell from another cell (e.g., a specific cell or a reference cell). (For example: If absoluteFrequencySSB is absent and/or the information of the reference cell is present, the UE obtains the timing reference for SSB-less SCell from the reference cell. Optionally, This is only supported in case the SCell for which the UE obtains the timing reference is in the different frequency band as the cell (i.e. the reference cell) from which the UE obtains the timing reference.)

在一些实施例中,如果absoluteFrequencySSB不存在和/或特定小区(或参考小区)的信息不存在,则UE遵循传统行为,即UE从SpCell或SCell获得定时参考(如果适用的话)。在一些实施例中,该方案可在UE获得定时参考的SCell与UE获得定时参考的cell(即,分别为SpCell或SCell)处于相同频带的情况下支持。在一些实施例中,特定小区(或参考小区)的信息,可以只给SSB频率,也可以给SSB频率和PCI。在一些实施例中,SSB频率或频点值可以使用absoluteFrequencySSB提供,或,其 他IE提供。在一些实施例中,在频点值可以使用absoluteFrequencySSB提供的情况下,所述频点,可以是当前服务小区的频点,也可以是参考小区或获取下行定时小区的频点(如SSB-less SCell从另一个小区获取下行定时,则给出另一个小区或小区的SSB的频点)。在一些实施例中,在absoluteFrequencySSB出现的情况下,或absoluteFrequencySSB出现且PCI配置的情况下,UE从另一个小区(如特定小区或参考小区)获取该SSB-less SCell的定时参考。(例如:If absoluteFrequencySSB is absent and/or the information of the reference cell is absent,the UE follows the legacy behaviour,i.e.the UE obtains timing reference from the SpCell or an SCell if applicable.Optionally,This is only supported in case the SCell for which the UE obtains the timing reference is in the same frequency band as the cell(i.e.the SpCell or the SCell,respectively)from which the UE obtains the timing reference.)In some embodiments, if the absoluteFrequencySSB does not exist and/or the information of the specific cell (or reference cell) does not exist, the UE follows the traditional behavior, that is, the UE obtains the timing reference from the SpCell or SCell (if applicable). In some embodiments, this scheme can be supported when the SCell from which the UE obtains the timing reference is in the same frequency band as the cell from which the UE obtains the timing reference (i.e., the SpCell or SCell, respectively). In some embodiments, the information of the specific cell (or reference cell) can be given only the SSB frequency, or the SSB frequency and PCI. In some embodiments, the SSB frequency or frequency point value can be provided using the absoluteFrequencySSB, or its In some embodiments, when the frequency value can be provided using absoluteFrequencySSB, the frequency can be the frequency of the current serving cell, or the frequency of the reference cell or the cell for obtaining downlink timing (such as when the SSB-less SCell obtains downlink timing from another cell, the frequency of the other cell or the SSB of the cell is given). In some embodiments, when absoluteFrequencySSB appears, or when absoluteFrequencySSB appears and PCI is configured, the UE obtains the timing reference of the SSB-less SCell from another cell (such as a specific cell or a reference cell). (For example: If absoluteFrequencySSB is absent and/or the information of the reference cell is absent, the UE follows the legacy behavior,iethe UE obtains timing reference from the SpCell or an SCell if applicable.Optionally, This is only supported in case the SCell for which the UE obtains the timing reference is in the same frequency band as the cell(iethe SpCell or the SCell,respectively)from which the UE obtains the timing reference.)

在一些实施例中,如果absoluteFrequencySSB不存在和/或特定小区(或参考小区)的信息不存在,则UE从带内小区或Pcell或默认小区获取SSB-less SCell的定时参考。在一些实施例中,是从带内小区还是Pcell或默认小区获取,取决于UE实现或网络指示。(例如:If absoluteFrequencySSB is absent and/or the information of the reference cell is absent,the UE obtains the timing reference for SSB-less SCell from the intra-band cell or Pcell or default cell.Optionally,Whether the obtaining is from the intra-band cell or Pcell or default cell depends on the UE implementation or the network indication.)In some embodiments, if absoluteFrequencySSB is absent and/or the information of the reference cell is absent, the UE obtains the timing reference for SSB-less SCell from the intra-band cell or Pcell or default cell. Optionally, Whether the obtaining is from the intra-band cell or Pcell or default cell depends on the UE implementation or the network indication.

在一些实施例中,如果absoluteFrequencySSB不存在和/或特定小区(或参考小区)的信息未配置,则UE从带内小区或Pcell或其他Scell或默认小区获取SSB-less SCell的定时参考。在一些实施例中,UE从哪个cell获取定时参考,是由UE实现决定的,或者,是预定义的,或者,是网络预配置的,或者,是网络另外指示的。In some embodiments, if absoluteFrequencySSB does not exist and/or information of a specific cell (or reference cell) is not configured, the UE obtains the timing reference of the SSB-less SCell from an in-band cell or Pcell or other Scell or a default cell. In some embodiments, the cell from which the UE obtains the timing reference is determined by the UE implementation, or is predefined, or is preconfigured by the network, or is otherwise indicated by the network.

根据上述技术方案,明确了UE如何与SSB-less SCell进行DL同步或DL定时。According to the above technical solution, it is clarified how the UE performs DL synchronization or DL timing with the SSB-less SCell.

应理解,上述有关第三指示信息(第一参数)的方案,例如可适用于UE如何确定DL定时,或UE如何确定定时参考的场景;或者,可适用于如何指示或确定特定小区或定时参考小区的场景。It should be understood that the above-mentioned scheme regarding the third indication information (first parameter), for example, can be applicable to a scenario of how the UE determines DL timing, or how the UE determines a timing reference; or, can be applicable to a scenario of how to indicate or determine a specific cell or a timing reference cell.

还应理解,上述有关第三指示信息(第一参数)的方案例如可适用于前述的场景1、场景2和场景2a。It should also be understood that the above-mentioned solution regarding the third indication information (first parameter) can be applied to the aforementioned scenario 1, scenario 2 and scenario 2a, for example.

还应理解,上述有关UE如何确定DL定时,或UE如何确定定时参考的场景;或者,可适用于如何指示或确定特定小区或定时参考小区的场景,可适用于前述的场景1、场景2和场景2a。It should also be understood that the above-mentioned scenarios regarding how the UE determines DL timing, or how the UE determines a timing reference; or, may be applicable to scenarios regarding how to indicate or determine a specific cell or a timing reference cell, and may be applicable to the aforementioned scenarios 1, 2, and 2a.

还应理解,上述有关第三指示信息(第一参数)的方案可以和图2或图3所示的方法结合实施,或者也可以单独实施,本申请实施例对此不予限定。也即,本申请实施例还提供一种通信的方法,在该方法中,可采用第三指示信息(第一参数)指示第二小区(如特定小区和/或默认小区)。其中,有关第三指示信息(第一参数)的介绍可参见前述实施例中的描述,这里不再赘述。It should also be understood that the above-mentioned scheme regarding the third indication information (first parameter) can be implemented in combination with the method shown in Figure 2 or Figure 3, or can also be implemented separately, and the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this. That is, the embodiments of the present application also provide a method of communication, in which the third indication information (first parameter) can be used to indicate the second cell (such as a specific cell and/or a default cell). Among them, the introduction of the third indication information (first parameter) can be found in the description in the aforementioned embodiment, and will not be repeated here.

图4示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种通信的方法,该方法可以包括:FIG. 4 shows another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application, which may include:

S401,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第一MAC CE,第一MAC CE用于指示有子上报配置的第一CSI报告的上报方式。S401, the terminal device receives a first MAC CE from the network device, and the first MAC CE is used to indicate the reporting method of the first CSI report with sub-reporting configuration.

其中,上报方式还可以称为激活方式。Among them, the reporting method can also be called an activation method.

在本实施例中,网络设备可向终端设备发送第一MAC CE,相应地,终端设备可接收来自网络设备的第一MAC CE。其中,第一MAC CE至少用于指示有子上报配置的第一CSI报告的上报方式。In this embodiment, the network device may send a first MAC CE to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the terminal device may receive the first MAC CE from the network device. The first MAC CE is at least used to indicate a reporting method of a first CSI report with a sub-reporting configuration.

作为一种实现方式,第一MAC CE例如可包括第一CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置,在其中任一子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活的情况下,第一MAC CE指示终端设备上报该第一CSI报告。举例来说,假设第一MAC CE包括第一CSI报告对应的4个子上报配置的指示或位置,那么,在该4个子上报配置的指示或位置中,若存在任意一个子上报配置的指示或位置(如第1个至第4个子上报配置的指示或位置中的任意一个子上报配置的指示或位置)被设置为激活,则表示终端设备需上报该第一CSI报告。As an implementation method, the first MAC CE may, for example, include indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report, and when any indication or position of the sub-reporting configuration is set to activated, the first MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the first CSI report. For example, assuming that the first MAC CE includes indications or positions of 4 sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report, then, among the indications or positions of the 4 sub-reporting configurations, if any one of the indications or positions of the sub-reporting configurations (such as any one of the indications or positions of the 1st to 4th sub-reporting configurations) is set to activated, it means that the terminal device needs to report the first CSI report.

在一种可能的方式中,当某个子上报配置的指示或位置(如bitmap位置)上的取值被设置为第一特定值(如1)时,表示该子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活;当某个子上报配置的指示或位置上的取值被设置为第二特定值(如0)时,表示该子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为去激活。In one possible manner, when the value of an indication or position (such as a bitmap position) of a sub-reporting configuration is set to a first specific value (such as 1), it indicates that the indication or position of the sub-reporting configuration is set to activation; when the value of an indication or position of a sub-reporting configuration is set to a second specific value (such as 0), it indicates that the indication or position of the sub-reporting configuration is set to deactivation.

示例性地,在第一MAC CE指示终端设备上报第一CSI报告的情况下,第一CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置中,被设置为激活的子上报配置的指示或位置的数量大于或等于1。例如,假设第一MAC CE包括第一CSI报告对应的4个子上报配置的指示或位置,那么,若该MAC CE指示终端设备需上报第一CSI报告,则该4个子上报配置的指示或位置中,可存在至少1个子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活,例如,第1个和第4个子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活。Exemplarily, in the case where the first MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the first CSI report, among the indications or positions of the multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report, the number of indications or positions of the sub-reporting configurations set to be activated is greater than or equal to 1. For example, assuming that the first MAC CE includes indications or positions of 4 sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report, then, if the MAC CE indicates that the terminal device needs to report the first CSI report, then among the indications or positions of the 4 sub-reporting configurations, there may be at least 1 indication or position of the sub-reporting configuration set to be activated, for example, the indications or positions of the 1st and 4th sub-reporting configurations are set to be activated.

在一些实施例中,若第一CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置中,被设置为激活的子上报配置的指示或位置的数量大于1,则可知该第一CSI报告是一个有子上报配置的CSI报告。 In some embodiments, if the number of indications or positions of sub-reporting configurations set to be activated among the indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report is greater than 1, it can be known that the first CSI report is a CSI report with sub-reporting configurations.

在一些实施例中,对于第一CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置中的每一子上报配置,在该子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活的情况下,第一MAC CE还用于指示终端设备上报第一CSI报告中与该子上报配置对应的子上报的报告。举例来说,假设第一MAC CE包括第一CSI报告对应的4个子上报配置的指示或位置,那么,若其中第1个子上报配置的指示或位置和第3个子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活,则第一MAC CE除了可指示终端设备需上报第一CSI报告之外,还用于进一步指示终端设备需上报第一CSI报告中与第1个子上报配置和第3个子上报配置对应的子上报的报告。In some embodiments, for each of the multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report, when the indication or position of the sub-reporting configuration is set to activated, the first MAC CE is also used to instruct the terminal device to report the sub-report report corresponding to the sub-reporting configuration in the first CSI report. For example, assuming that the first MAC CE includes indications or positions of 4 sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report, then, if the indication or position of the first sub-reporting configuration and the indication or position of the third sub-reporting configuration are set to activated, the first MAC CE can not only indicate that the terminal device needs to report the first CSI report, but also be used to further indicate that the terminal device needs to report the sub-report reports corresponding to the first sub-reporting configuration and the third sub-reporting configuration in the first CSI report.

在一些实施例中,第一MAC CE还用于指示没有子上报配置的第二CSI报告的上报方式。也就是说,第一MAC CE既可以用于指示有子上报配置的第一CSI报告的上报方式,还可以用于指示没有子上报配置的第二CSI报告的上报方式。In some embodiments, the first MAC CE is also used to indicate the reporting method of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration. That is, the first MAC CE can be used to indicate the reporting method of the first CSI report with sub-reporting configuration, and can also be used to indicate the reporting method of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration.

作为一种实现方式,第一MAC CE例如可包括第二CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置,在其中任一子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活的情况下,第一MAC CE指示终端设备上报该第二CSI报告。举例来说,假设第一MAC CE包括第二CSI报告对应的4个子上报配置的指示或位置,那么,在该4个子上报配置的指示或位置中,若存在任意一个子上报配置的指示或位置(如第1个至第4个子上报配置的指示或位置中的任意一个子上报配置的指示或位置)被设置为激活,则表示终端设备需上报该第二CSI报告。As an implementation method, the first MAC CE may, for example, include indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the second CSI report, and when any indication or position of the sub-reporting configuration is set to activated, the first MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the second CSI report. For example, assuming that the first MAC CE includes indications or positions of 4 sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the second CSI report, then, among the indications or positions of the 4 sub-reporting configurations, if any one of the indications or positions of the sub-reporting configurations (such as any one of the indications or positions of the 1st to 4th sub-reporting configurations) is set to activated, it means that the terminal device needs to report the second CSI report.

示例性地,在第一MAC CE指示终端设备上报第二CSI报告的情况下,第二CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置中,被设置为激活的子上报配置的指示或位置的数量为1。例如,假设第一MAC CE包括第二CSI报告对应的4个子上报配置的指示或位置,那么,若该MAC CE指示终端设备需上报第二CSI报告,则该4个子上报配置中,存在1个子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活,例如,第1个子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活,此时,其他3个子上报配置的指示或位置可以不需要进行配置。Exemplarily, in the case where the first MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the second CSI report, among the indications or positions of the multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the second CSI report, the number of indications or positions of the sub-reporting configurations set to be activated is 1. For example, assuming that the first MAC CE includes indications or positions of 4 sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the second CSI report, then, if the MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the second CSI report, among the 4 sub-reporting configurations, there is an indication or position of 1 sub-reporting configuration that is set to be activated, for example, the indication or position of the 1st sub-reporting configuration is set to be activated, at this time, the indications or positions of the other 3 sub-reporting configurations may not need to be configured.

在一种可能的方式中,在第一MAC CE既用于指示有子上报配置的第一CSI报告的上报方式,又用于指示没有子上报配置的第二CSI报告的上报方式的情况下,第一MAC CE的长度固定,如此,终端设备可以不需要再对第一MAC CE的长度进行确定,以便于实现。In one possible manner, when the first MAC CE is used to indicate both the reporting method of the first CSI report with a sub-reporting configuration and the reporting method of the second CSI report without a sub-reporting configuration, the length of the first MAC CE is fixed. In this way, the terminal device may no longer need to determine the length of the first MAC CE, for ease of implementation.

在一些实施例中,第一MAC CE不用于指示没有子上报配置的第二CSI报告的上报方式。也就是说,第一MAC CE可用于指示有子上报配置的第一CSI报告的上报方式,而不用于指示没有子上报配置的第二CSI报告的上报方式。In some embodiments, the first MAC CE is not used to indicate the reporting method of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration. That is, the first MAC CE can be used to indicate the reporting method of the first CSI report with sub-reporting configuration, but not to indicate the reporting method of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration.

在一些实施例中,在第一MAC CE不用于指示没有子上报配置的第二CSI报告的上报方式的情况下,第二CSI报告可由第二MAC CE指示。其中,第二MAC CE例如可以为现有MAC CE,如:SP CSI reporting on PUCCH Activation/Deactivation MAC CE。该第二MAC CE至少用于指示没有子上报配置的第二CSI报告的上报方式。In some embodiments, when the first MAC CE is not used to indicate the reporting mode of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration, the second CSI report may be indicated by a second MAC CE. The second MAC CE may be, for example, an existing MAC CE, such as: SP CSI reporting on PUCCH Activation/Deactivation MAC CE. The second MAC CE is at least used to indicate the reporting mode of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration.

在一种可能的方式中,在第一MAC CE用于指示有子上报配置的第一CSI报告的上报方式,而不用于指示没有子上报配置的第二CSI报告的上报方式的情况下,第一MAC CE的长度固定或可变。在第一MAC CE的长度固定的情况下,终端设备可以不需要再对第一MAC CE的长度进行确定,如此可便于实现。在第一MAC CE的长度可变的情况下,可实现对第一MAC CE的长度的灵活调整。In one possible manner, when the first MAC CE is used to indicate a reporting mode of a first CSI report with a sub-reporting configuration, but not used to indicate a reporting mode of a second CSI report without a sub-reporting configuration, the length of the first MAC CE is fixed or variable. When the length of the first MAC CE is fixed, the terminal device may no longer need to determine the length of the first MAC CE, which is convenient for implementation. When the length of the first MAC CE is variable, the length of the first MAC CE can be flexibly adjusted.

在一些实施例中,可使用新的逻辑通道标识(Logical Channel ID,LCID)来标识该MAC CE,如E-LCID。In some embodiments, a new logical channel identifier (Logical Channel ID, LCID) can be used to identify the MAC CE, such as E-LCID.

在一些实施例中,在网络设备向终端设备发送了第一MAC CE的情况下,终端设备不使用传统的MAC CE。其中,传统MAC CE用于指示有上报配置的CSI报告的上报方式,但不用于指示有子上报配置的CSI报告的上报方式。In some embodiments, when the network device sends a first MAC CE to the terminal device, the terminal device does not use a conventional MAC CE, wherein the conventional MAC CE is used to indicate a reporting method of a CSI report with a reporting configuration, but is not used to indicate a reporting method of a CSI report with a sub-reporting configuration.

在一些实施例中,在网络设备向终端设备发送了第一MAC CE的情况下,终端设备仍可使用传统的MAC CE。此时,若传统的MAC CE中包含的某个上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活,则认为该上报配置对应的所有子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活。In some embodiments, when the network device sends the first MAC CE to the terminal device, the terminal device can still use the traditional MAC CE. At this time, if the indication or position of a reporting configuration included in the traditional MAC CE is set to activated, it is considered that the indication or position of all sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the reporting configuration is set to activated.

根据本实施例的方法,明确了网络设备如何通过MAC CE向终端设备指示CSI报告的上报方式。在本实施例中,CSI报告(如第一CSI报告;又如第二CSI报告)例如可以是半持续(Semi-Persistent,SP)CSI报告。According to the method of this embodiment, it is clarified how the network device indicates the reporting method of the CSI report to the terminal device through the MAC CE. In this embodiment, the CSI report (such as the first CSI report; and the second CSI report) can be, for example, a semi-persistent (SP) CSI report.

为便于理解本申请的实施例,下面结合示例,介绍适用于图4所示方法的可能的实现方案(包括方案4A和方案4B)。To facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, possible implementation schemes (including scheme 4A and scheme 4B) applicable to the method shown in FIG. 4 are introduced below in combination with examples.

方案4AOption 4A

MAC CE包括:针对有子配置(sub-config)(即前述子上报配置)的CSI报告(CSI report)(对应前述实施例中的第一CSI报告)的指示信息,以及针对没有子配置的CSI报告(对应前述实施例中的第二CSI报告)的指示信息。其中,针对有子配置的CSI报告的指示信息,用于向UE指示有子配置的 CSI报告是否需要上报;针对没有子配置的CSI报告的指示信息,用于向UE指示没有子配置的CSI报告是否需要上报。也就是说,MAC CE可用于向UE指示有子配置的CSI报告是否需要上报,并可用于向UE指示没有子配置的CSI报告是否需要上报。The MAC CE includes: indication information for a CSI report with a sub-config (i.e., the aforementioned sub-reporting configuration) (corresponding to the first CSI report in the aforementioned embodiment), and indication information for a CSI report without a sub-configuration (corresponding to the second CSI report in the aforementioned embodiment). Among them, the indication information for a CSI report with a sub-configuration is used to indicate to the UE that there is a sub-configuration. Whether the CSI report needs to be reported; the indication information for the CSI report without sub-configuration is used to indicate to the UE whether the CSI report without sub-configuration needs to be reported. In other words, the MAC CE can be used to indicate to the UE whether the CSI report with sub-configuration needs to be reported, and can be used to indicate to the UE whether the CSI report without sub-configuration needs to be reported.

作为一种实现方式,MAC CE中可以不需要显示区分一个CSI报告是否有子配置。在该情况下,若一个CSI报告有子配置,其子配置对应的位图(bitmap)位置上的取值为特定值(如1)的位置可以多于1个;若一个CSI报告没有子配置,其子配置对应的bitmap位置上的取值为特定值(如1)的位置可以为0个或1个。其中,0个表示不需要上报该CSI报告,1个表示需要上报该CSI报告。As an implementation method, the MAC CE may not need to explicitly distinguish whether a CSI report has a sub-configuration. In this case, if a CSI report has a sub-configuration, the number of positions corresponding to the bitmap position of the sub-configuration that have a specific value (such as 1) may be more than one; if a CSI report has no sub-configuration, the number of positions corresponding to the bitmap position of the sub-configuration that have a specific value (such as 1) may be 0 or 1. Among them, 0 indicates that the CSI report does not need to be reported, and 1 indicates that the CSI report needs to be reported.

在方案4A中,MAC CE的长度例如可以为固定长度。In Scheme 4A, the length of the MAC CE may be, for example, a fixed length.

在一些实施例中,可使用新的LCID标识该MAC CE,如E-LCID。In some embodiments, a new LCID can be used to identify the MAC CE, such as E-LCID.

方案4BOption 4B

MAC CE包括针对有子配置的CSI报告(对应前述实施例中的第一CSI报告)的指示信息,不包括针对没有子配置的CSI报告(对应前述实施例中的第二CSI报告)的指示信息。其中,针对有子配置的CSI报告的指示信息,用于向UE指示有子配置的CSI报告是否需要上报。也就是说,MAC CE可用于向UE指示有子配置的CSI报告是否需要上报,而不用于向UE指示没有子配置的CSI报告是否需要上报。The MAC CE includes indication information for a CSI report with sub-configuration (corresponding to the first CSI report in the aforementioned embodiment), but does not include indication information for a CSI report without sub-configuration (corresponding to the second CSI report in the aforementioned embodiment). Among them, the indication information for the CSI report with sub-configuration is used to indicate to the UE whether the CSI report with sub-configuration needs to be reported. In other words, the MAC CE can be used to indicate to the UE whether a CSI report with sub-configuration needs to be reported, but not to indicate to the UE whether a CSI report without sub-configuration needs to be reported.

作为一种实现方式,若一个CSI报告有子配置,其子配置对应的bitmap位置上的取值为特定值(如1)的位置可以多于1个。As an implementation manner, if a CSI report has a sub-configuration, there may be more than one position whose value on the bitmap position corresponding to the sub-configuration is a specific value (such as 1).

在方案4B中,MAC CE的长度例如可以为固定长度,或者可以为可变长度。In Scheme 4B, the length of the MAC CE may be, for example, a fixed length or a variable length.

在一些实施例中,可使用新的LCID标识该MAC CE,如E-LCID。In some embodiments, a new LCID can be used to identify the MAC CE, such as E-LCID.

在一些实施例中,由于该MAC CE不包括针对没有子配置的CSI报告的指示信息,因此,可使用另一个MAC CE(对应前述实施例中的第二MAC CE),至少携带针对有子配置的CSI报告的指示信息。该另一个MAC CE例如可以为现有MAC CE,如:SP CSI reporting on PUCCH Activation/Deactivation MAC CE。In some embodiments, since the MAC CE does not include indication information for CSI reporting without sub-configuration, another MAC CE (corresponding to the second MAC CE in the aforementioned embodiment) may be used to carry at least indication information for CSI reporting with sub-configuration. The other MAC CE may be, for example, an existing MAC CE, such as: SP CSI reporting on PUCCH Activation/Deactivation MAC CE.

方案4A和方案4B的实现方式举例如下:Examples of implementation methods of Solution 4A and Solution 4B are as follows:

参见表2和表3,其示出了网络通过MAC CE向UE指示CSI报告的上报方式的示例。其中,表2例如可适用于方案4A和方案4B;表3例如可适用于方案4B。See Table 2 and Table 3, which show examples of the reporting method of the network indicating the CSI report to the UE through the MAC CE. Among them, Table 2, for example, can be applied to Scheme 4A and Scheme 4B; Table 3, for example, can be applied to Scheme 4B.

表2
Table 2

表3
Table 3

在表2和表3中,R表示保留位(bit);Serving Cell ID用于指示MAC CE所应用的服务小区的标识;BWP ID用于指示MAC CE所应用的UL BWP的标识;Si用于指示csi-ReportConfigToAddModList内半持续CSI报告配置的激活/去激活状态(activation/deactivation status);Ni,x用于指示CSI-ReportConfigId为i的csi-ReportSubConfigList内半持续CSI报告子配置(SubConfiguration)x的激活/去激活状态。In Table 2 and Table 3, R represents a reserved bit; Serving Cell ID is used to indicate the identifier of the serving cell applied by MAC CE; BWP ID is used to indicate the identifier of the UL BWP applied by MAC CE; S i is used to indicate the activation/deactivation status of the semi-persistent CSI report configuration in csi-ReportConfigToAddModList; Ni ,x is used to indicate the activation/deactivation status of the semi-persistent CSI report subconfiguration (SubConfiguration) x in csi-ReportSubConfigList where CSI-ReportConfigId is i.

在一些实施例中,Si用于指示csi-ReportConfigToAddModList内半持续CSI报告配置的激活/去激活状态。S0是指在BWP中包括用于SP CSI报告的PUCCH资源,并且在类型设置为semi-PersistentONPUCCH的列表中具有最低CSI ReportConfigId的报告配置(S0refers to the report configuration which includes PUCCH resources for SP CSI reporting in the indicated BWP and has the lowest CSI-ReportConfigId within the list with type set to semiPersistentOnPUCCH);S1是指在BWP中包括用于SP CSI报告的PUCCH资源,并且具有第二低CSI ReportConfigId的报告配置,以此类推。In some embodiments, S i is used to indicate the activation/deactivation status of the semi-persistent CSI reporting configuration within csi-ReportConfigToAddModList. S 0 refers to the report configuration which includes PUCCH resources for SP CSI reporting in the indicated BWP and has the lowest CSI-ReportConfigId within the list with type set to semi-PersistentOnPUCCH; S 1 refers to the report configuration which includes PUCCH resources for SP CSI reporting in the indicated BWP and has the second lowest CSI ReportConfigId, and so on.

如果BWP中类型设置为semi-PersistentOnPUCCH的列表中的报告配置数量小于i+1,则MAC实 体(entity)应忽略该Si字段。Si字段设置为1时,用于指示激活相应的半持续CSI报告配置;Si字段设置为0时,用于指示相应的半持续CSI报告配置被去激活。在一些实施例中,如果Si字段设置为1,则UE可以进一步检查Ni,x。在一些实施例中,如果Si字段设置为0,则UE不检查Ni,x,或认为此Si不存在Ni,x。在一些实施例中,若Si字段设置成0,则不包括相应的Ni,x字段。在一些实施例中,如果Si字段设置为0,则不包括相应的Ni,x字段。If the number of report configurations in the list of type semi-PersistentOnPUCCH in the BWP is less than i+1, the MAC implements The entity should ignore the Si field. When the Si field is set to 1, it is used to indicate that the corresponding semi-persistent CSI reporting configuration is activated; when the Si field is set to 0, it is used to indicate that the corresponding semi-persistent CSI reporting configuration is deactivated. In some embodiments, if the Si field is set to 1, the UE may further check Ni ,x . In some embodiments, if the Si field is set to 0, the UE does not check Ni ,x , or considers that Ni ,x does not exist for this Si . In some embodiments, if the Si field is set to 0, the corresponding Ni ,x field is not included. In some embodiments, if the Si field is set to 0, the corresponding Ni ,x field is not included.

在一些实施例中,Ni,x用于指示CSI-ReportConfigId为i的csi-ReportSubConfigList内半持续CSI报告子配置(SubConfiguration)x的激活/去激活状态。In some embodiments, Ni ,x is used to indicate the activation/deactivation status of the semi-persistent CSI reporting subconfiguration (SubConfiguration) x in the csi-ReportSubConfigList with CSI-ReportConfigId i.

在一种可能的方式中,N0,0是指报告子配置,其包括BWP中的激活的SP CSI报告的PUCCH资源,并且在类型设置为CSI ReportSubConfigList的列表内具有最低CSI ReportSubConfigID(N0,0refers to the report SubConfiguration which includes PUCCH resources for the activated SP CSI reporting in the indicated BWP and has the lowest csi-ReportSubConfigID within the list with type set to csi-ReportSubConfigList);N0,1是指报告子配置,其包括BWP中的激活的SP CSI报告的PUCCH资源,并且具有第二低的CSI ReportSubConfigID,以此类推。In one possible approach, N 0,0 refers to the report SubConfiguration which includes PUCCH resources for the activated SP CSI reporting in the indicated BWP and has the lowest csi-ReportSubConfigID within the list with type set to csi-ReportSubConfigList; N 0,1 refers to the report SubConfiguration which includes PUCCH resources for the activated SP CSI reporting in the indicated BWP and has the second lowest CSI ReportSubConfigID, and so on.

在一种可能的方式中,N0,0是指报告子配置,其包括BWP中的SP CSI报告的PUCCH资源,并且在类型设置为CSI ReportSubConfigList的列表内具有最低CSI ReportSubConfigID;N0,1是指报告子配置,其包括BWP中的SP CSI报告的PUCCH资源,并且具有第二低的CSI ReportSubConfigID,以此类推。In one possible approach, N 0,0 refers to the reporting subconfiguration that includes the PUCCH resources for SP CSI reporting in the BWP and has the lowest CSI ReportSubConfigID in the list with type set to CSI ReportSubConfigList; N 0,1 refers to the reporting subconfiguration that includes the PUCCH resources for SP CSI reporting in the BWP and has the second lowest CSI ReportSubConfigID, and so on.

在一些实施例中,如果BWP中类型设置为csi-ReportSubConfigList的列表中的报告配置数量大于4,则MAC实体忽略Ni,x字段。In some embodiments, if the number of report configurations in the list with type set to csi-ReportSubConfigList in the BWP is greater than 4, the MAC entity ignores the Ni ,x field.

在一些实施例中,如果BWP中类型设置为csi-ReportSubConfigList的列表中的报告配置数量大于4,则MAC实体忽略x大于或等于4的Ni,x字段。In some embodiments, if the number of report configurations in the list with type set to csi-ReportSubConfigList in the BWP is greater than 4, the MAC entity ignores the N i,x field where x is greater than or equal to 4.

可选的,如果BWP中类型设置为csi-ReportSubConfigList的列表中的报告配置数量小于x+1,则MAC实体应忽略Ni,x字段。Optionally, if the number of report configurations in the list with type set to csi-ReportSubConfigList in the BWP is less than x+1, the MAC entity shall ignore the Ni ,x field.

Ni,x字段设置为1时,用于指示激活半持续CSI报告i中的相应子配置x;Ni,x字段设置为0时,用于指示半持续CSI报告i中相应的子配置x被去激活When the Ni ,x field is set to 1, it indicates that the corresponding sub-configuration x in the semi-persistent CSI report i is activated; when the Ni ,x field is set to 0, it indicates that the corresponding sub-configuration x in the semi-persistent CSI report i is deactivated.

根据上述技术方案,明确了网络如何通过MAC CE向UE指示CSI报告的上报方式,并明确了MAC CE的设计细节。According to the above technical solution, it is clarified how the network instructs the UE on the reporting method of the CSI report through MAC CE, and the design details of MAC CE are clarified.

图5示出了本申请实施例提供的另一种通信的方法,该方法可以包括:FIG. 5 shows another communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application, which may include:

S501,终端设备接收来自网络设备的第五指示信息;其中,第五指示信息用于指示第一操作;或者,第五指示信息在满足第三条件的情况下用于指示第一操作。S501, the terminal device receives fifth indication information from the network device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate a first operation; or, the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation when a third condition is met.

在本实施例中,网络设备可向终端设备发送第五指示信息,相应地,终端设备可接收来自网络设备的第五指示信息。其中,第五指示信息可用于指示第一操作;或者,第五指示信息可在满足第三条件的情况下用于指示第一操作。In this embodiment, the network device may send the fifth indication information to the terminal device, and accordingly, the terminal device may receive the fifth indication information from the network device. The fifth indication information may be used to indicate the first operation; or the fifth indication information may be used to indicate the first operation when the third condition is met.

在一些实施例中。第五指示信息例如可以是下行控制信息(Downlink Control Information,DCI)或MAC CE。其中,DCI例如可以是特定RNTI(如NES RNTI)或特定DCI格式(format)(如DCI format 2_9)的DCI。In some embodiments, the fifth indication information may be, for example, downlink control information (DCI) or MAC CE. The DCI may be, for example, a DCI of a specific RNTI (such as NES RNTI) or a specific DCI format (such as DCI format 2_9).

在一些实施例中,第一操作例如可包括以下至少之一:终端设备的源小区(source cell)进入网络节能(Network Energy Saving,NES);终端设备执行条件切换(Conditional Handover,CHO);终端设备开始执行CHO;以及,终端设备评估CHO的执行条件。In some embodiments, the first operation may, for example, include at least one of the following: a source cell of the terminal device enters Network Energy Saving (NES); the terminal device executes Conditional Handover (CHO); the terminal device starts to execute CHO; and the terminal device evaluates the execution conditions of CHO.

在一些实施例中,在第五指示信息用于指示第一操作的情况下(也即,在终端设备收到第五指示信息的情况下,或者,在终端设备收到满足第三条件的第五指示信息的情况下),该方法还可以包括:终端设备基于第五指示信息,执行CHO;或者,终端设备基于第五指示信息,开始执行CHO;或者,终端设备基于第五指示信息,评估CHO的执行条件;或者,终端设备确定/认为候选目标小区满足CHO切换条件;或者,终端设备在第一CHO事件(如A3或A4或A5)满足的情况下,确定/认为候选目标小区满足CHO切换条件;或者,终端设备在第一CHO事件满足的情况下,确定/认为CHO执行条件满足;或者,终端设备在第一CHO事件满足的情况下,确定/认为CHO事件满足;或者,终端设备在第一CHO事件满足的情况下,确定/认为候选目标小区是触发的小区。In some embodiments, when the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation (that is, when the terminal device receives the fifth indication information, or when the terminal device receives the fifth indication information that satisfies the third condition), the method may further include: the terminal device executes CHO based on the fifth indication information; or, the terminal device starts to execute CHO based on the fifth indication information; or, the terminal device evaluates the execution condition of CHO based on the fifth indication information; or, the terminal device determines/believes that the candidate target cell satisfies the CHO switching condition; or, when the first CHO event (such as A3 or A4 or A5) is satisfied, the terminal device determines/believes that the candidate target cell satisfies the CHO switching condition; or, when the first CHO event is satisfied, the terminal device determines/believes that the CHO execution condition is satisfied; or, when the first CHO event is satisfied, the terminal device determines/believes that the CHO event is satisfied; or, when the first CHO event is satisfied, the terminal device determines/believes that the candidate target cell is a triggered cell.

在一些实施例中,该方法还可以包括:在第五指示信息用于指示第一操作的情况下,在第一时长内,终端设备进行以下任一操作:终端设备不期待收到新的第五指示信息;终端设备不期待收到不满足第三条件的新的第五指示信息;在终端设备收到新的第五指示信息的情况下,忽略新的第五指示信息;在终端设备收到不满足第三条件的新的第五指示信息的情况下,忽略新的第五指示信息。In some embodiments, the method may also include: when the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation, within the first time period, the terminal device performs any of the following operations: the terminal device does not expect to receive new fifth indication information; the terminal device does not expect to receive new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition; when the terminal device receives new fifth indication information, ignores the new fifth indication information; when the terminal device receives new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition, ignores the new fifth indication information.

其中,第一时长例如可以是一个定时器时长。The first duration may be, for example, a timer duration.

在一些实施例中,第一时长的起始时刻为终端设备收到第五指示信息的时刻;或者,第一时长的起 始时刻为终端设备收到满足第三条件的第五指示信息的时刻;或者,第一时长的起始时刻为终端设备收到第五指示信息的时刻与第一偏移相加的结果(也即,第一时长的起始时刻=终端设备收到第五指示信息的时刻+第一偏移);或者,第一时长的起始时刻为终端设备收到满足第三条件的第五指示信息的时刻与第一偏移相加的结果(也即,第一时长的起始时刻=终端设备收到满足第三条件的第五指示信息的时刻+第一偏移)。In some embodiments, the starting time of the first duration is the time when the terminal device receives the fifth indication information; or The starting time is the time when the terminal device receives the fifth indication information that satisfies the third condition; or, the starting time of the first duration is the result of adding the time when the terminal device receives the fifth indication information and the first offset (that is, the starting time of the first duration = the time when the terminal device receives the fifth indication information + the first offset); or, the starting time of the first duration is the result of adding the time when the terminal device receives the fifth indication information that satisfies the third condition and the first offset (that is, the starting time of the first duration = the time when the terminal device receives the fifth indication information that satisfies the third condition + the first offset).

其中,第一时长和/或第一偏移,例如可以是预定义或预配置的;或者,第一时长和/或第一偏移可以是网络设备配置的;或者,第一时长和/或第一偏移可以是RRC配置的;或者,第一时长和/或第一偏移包含在第五指示信息中。换句话说,第一时长是预定义的、预配置的、网络设备配置的、基于无线资源控制配置的或者包含在第五指示信息中;第一偏移是预定义的、预配置的、网络设备配置的、基于无线资源控制配置的或者包含在第五指示信息中。Among them, the first duration and/or the first offset, for example, may be predefined or preconfigured; or, the first duration and/or the first offset may be configured by the network device; or, the first duration and/or the first offset may be configured by the RRC; or, the first duration and/or the first offset are included in the fifth indication information. In other words, the first duration is predefined, preconfigured, configured by the network device, based on the radio resource control configuration, or included in the fifth indication information; the first offset is predefined, preconfigured, configured by the network device, based on the radio resource control configuration, or included in the fifth indication information.

在一些实施例中,该方法还可以包括:网络设备向终端设备发送新的第五指示信息,新的第五指示信息用于指示第三操作,或者,新的第五指示信息在不满足第三条件的情况下用于指示第三操作。In some embodiments, the method may further include: the network device sends new fifth indication information to the terminal device, the new fifth indication information is used to indicate the third operation, or the new fifth indication information is used to indicate the third operation when the third condition is not met.

在一些实施例中,第三操作例如可包括以下至少之一:终端设备的源小区离开NES;停止执行CHO;确定/认为候选目标小区不满足CHO切换条件;确定/认为CHO执行条件不满足;确定/认为CHO事件不满足;确定/认为CHO执行条件不可用;确定/认为候选目标小区不是触发的小区;以及,停止CHO评估。In some embodiments, the third operation may, for example, include at least one of the following: the source cell of the terminal device leaves the NES; stops executing CHO; determines/considers that the candidate target cell does not meet the CHO switching conditions; determines/considers that the CHO execution conditions are not met; determines/considers that the CHO event is not met; determines/considers that the CHO execution conditions are not available; determines/considers that the candidate target cell is not a triggered cell; and stops CHO evaluation.

在一些实施例中,在终端设备收到新的第五指示信息的情况下,或者,在终端设备收到不满足第三条件的新的第五指示信息的情况下,可执行第二操作。In some embodiments, when the terminal device receives new fifth indication information, or when the terminal device receives new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition, the second operation may be performed.

在一些实施例中,第二操作例如可包括以下至少之一:停止执行CHO;停止CHO评估;删除CHO配置;向网络设备指示CHO停止;向网络设备指示切换停止;确定/认为候选目标小区不满足CHO切换条件;确定/认为CHO执行条件不满足;确定/认为CHO事件不满足;确定/认为候选目标小区不是触发的小区;以及,确定/认为源小区离开NES。In some embodiments, the second operation may, for example, include at least one of the following: stop executing CHO; stop CHO evaluation; delete CHO configuration; indicate CHO stop to the network device; indicate switching stop to the network device; determine/believe that the candidate target cell does not meet the CHO switching condition; determine/believe that the CHO execution condition is not met; determine/believe that the CHO event is not met; determine/believe that the candidate target cell is not a triggered cell; and determine/believe that the source cell leaves the NES.

在一些实施例中,上述第二操作例如是在第一时长之后执行。也即,在第一时长之后,在终端设备收到新的第五指示信息的情况下,或者,在终端设备收到不满足第三条件的新的第五指示信息的情况下,可执行上述第二操作。In some embodiments, the second operation is performed, for example, after the first time period. That is, after the first time period, when the terminal device receives new fifth indication information, or when the terminal device receives new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition, the second operation may be performed.

在一些实施例中,第三条件例如可包括:指示为特定值(也即,第五指示信息中的第一比特位被设置为特定值)。也就是说,在第五指示信息(或新的第五指示信息)指示为特定值的情况下,表示该第五指示信息(或新的第五指示信息)满足第三条件,否则,表示该第五指示信息(或新的第五指示信息)不满足第三条件。In some embodiments, the third condition may include, for example: indicating a specific value (that is, the first bit in the fifth indication information is set to a specific value). That is, when the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) indicates a specific value, it indicates that the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) satisfies the third condition, otherwise, it indicates that the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) does not satisfy the third condition.

作为一示例,该特定值例如可以为1。在该情况下,若第五指示信息(或新的第五指示信息)指示为1,则表示该第五指示信息(或新的第五指示信息)满足第三条件;若第五指示信息(或新的第五指示信息)指示为非特定值(如0),则表示该第五指示信息(或新的第五指示信息)不满足第三条件。As an example, the specific value may be 1. In this case, if the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) indicates 1, it indicates that the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) satisfies the third condition; if the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) indicates a non-specific value (such as 0), it indicates that the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) does not satisfy the third condition.

作为另一示例,该特定值例如可以为0。在该情况下,若第五指示信息(或新的第五指示信息)指示为0,则表示该第五指示信息(或新的第五指示信息)满足第三条件;若第五指示信息(或新的第五指示信息)指示为非特定值(如1),则表示该第五指示信息(或新的第五指示信息)不满足第三条件。As another example, the specific value may be 0. In this case, if the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) indicates 0, it indicates that the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) satisfies the third condition; if the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) indicates a non-specific value (such as 1), it indicates that the fifth indication information (or new fifth indication information) does not satisfy the third condition.

在一些实施例中,若同时配置与NES相关的CHO事件(event)和与NES不相关的CHO事件,在其中一个CHO事件满足的情况下,终端设备执行CHO。在一些实施例中,与NES相关的CHO事件和与NES不相关的CHO事件关联同一个CondReconfigId。即,若满足NES相关的CHO事件(包括收到第五指示信息,或收到满足第三条件的第五指示信息),则终端设备认为目标候选小区为触发的小区,和/或,执行CHO。若满足NES不相关的CHO事件,或者,满足NES不相关的CHO事件(不管是否收到第五指示信息,或不管是否收到满足第三条件的第五指示信息),则终端设备认为目标候选小区为触发的小区,和/或,执行CHO。In some embodiments, if a CHO event related to NES and a CHO event not related to NES are configured at the same time, if one of the CHO events is satisfied, the terminal device performs CHO. In some embodiments, the CHO event related to NES and the CHO event not related to NES are associated with the same CondReconfigId. That is, if the CHO event related to NES is satisfied (including receiving the fifth indication information, or receiving the fifth indication information that satisfies the third condition), the terminal device considers the target candidate cell to be a triggered cell, and/or performs CHO. If the CHO event not related to NES is satisfied, or the CHO event not related to NES is satisfied (regardless of whether the fifth indication information is received, or regardless of whether the fifth indication information that satisfies the third condition is received), the terminal device considers the target candidate cell to be a triggered cell, and/or performs CHO.

一示例,如果与存储的condRRCReconfig内的目标候选小区的condTriggerConfig内的measIds相关联的事件之一不关联(或不配)nesEvent配置并被满足,并且与存储的condRRCReconfig内的目的候选小区的condTriggerConfig中的measIds相关联的另一事件用nesEvent进行配置(例如,可以满足或不满足于nes事件关联的measIDs)(例如:if one of the events associated to the measIds within condTriggerConfig for a target candidate cell within the stored condRRCReconfig is not configured with nesEvent and fulfilled,and the other event associated to the measIds within condTriggerConfig for a target candidate cell within the stored condRRCReconfig is configured with nesEvent),则执行以下1)或2):As an example, if one of the events associated to the measIds within condTriggerConfig for the target candidate cell in the stored condRRCReconfig is not associated with (or does not match) the nesEvent configuration and is satisfied, and another event associated with the measIds in the condTriggerConfig for the target candidate cell in the stored condRRCReconfig is configured with nesEvent (e.g., may or may not satisfy the measIDs associated with the nes event) (e.g., if one of the events associated to the measIds within condTriggerConfig for the target candidate cell in the stored condRRCReconfig is not associated with (or does not match) the nesEvent configuration and is satisfied, and another event associated with the measIds in the condTriggerConfig for the target candidate cell in the stored condRRCReconfig is configured with nesEvent (e.g., may or may not satisfy the measIDs associated with the nes event). a target candidate cell within the stored condRRCReconfig is not configured with nesEvent and fulfilled,and the other event associated to the measIds within condTriggerConfig for a target candidate cell within the stored condRRCReconfig is configured with nesEvent), then perform the following 1) or 2):

1)将存储的condRRCReconfig中与condReconfigId相关联的目标候选小区视为触发小区(consider the target candidate cell within the stored condRRCReconfig,associated to that condReconfigId,as a triggered cell); 1) consider the target candidate cell within the stored condRRCReconfig, associated to that condReconfigId, as a triggered cell;

2)启动条件重配置执行(initiate the conditional reconfiguration execution,as specified in 5.3.5.13.5)。2) initiate the conditional reconfiguration execution (as specified in 5.3.5.13.5).

另一示例,如果与存储的condRRCReconfig内的目标候选小区的condTriggerConfig内的measIds相关联的事件之一被配置为nesEvent并被满足,并且与存储的condRRCReconfig内的目的候选小区的condTriggerConfig中的measIds相关联的另一事件未被配置或未被关联nesEvent(if one of the events associated to the measIds within condTriggerConfig for a target candidate cell within the stored condRRCReconfig is configured with nesEvent and fulfilled,and the other event associated to the measIds within condTriggerConfig for a target candidate cell within the stored condRRCReconfig is not configured with nesEvent),则执行以下3)或4):As another example, if one of the events associated to the measIds within condTriggerConfig for a target candidate cell in a stored condRRCReconfig is configured as nesEvent and satisfied, and another event associated to the measIds in condTriggerConfig for a target candidate cell in a stored condRRCReconfig is not configured or is not associated nesEvent. te cell within the stored condRRCReconfig is configured with nesEvent and fulfilled, and the other event associated to the measIds within condTriggerConfig for a target candidate cell within the stored condRRCReconfig is not configured with nesEvent), then perform the following 3) or 4):

3)将存储的condRRCReconfig中与condReconfigId相关联的目标候选小区视为触发小区(consider the target candidate cell within the stored condRRCReconfig,associated to that condReconfigId,as a triggered cell);3) consider the target candidate cell within the stored condRRCReconfig, associated to that condReconfigId, as a triggered cell;

4)启动条件重配置执行(initiate the conditional reconfiguration execution,as specified in 5.3.5.13.5)。4) initiate the conditional reconfiguration execution (as specified in 5.3.5.13.5).

根据本实施例的方法,明确了终端设备如何使用CHO切换命令。According to the method of this embodiment, it is clarified how the terminal device uses the CHO switching command.

需要说明的是,本申请实施例中图2、图3、图4和图5所示的方法可以单独实施,或者也可以两个或两个以上方法结合实施,本申请实施例对此不予限定。It should be noted that the methods shown in Figures 2, 3, 4 and 5 in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented individually, or two or more methods can be implemented in combination, and the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this.

以上结合附图详细描述了本申请的优选实施方式,但是,本申请并不限于上述实施方式中的具体细节,在本申请的技术构思范围内,可以对本申请的技术方案进行多种简单变型,这些简单变型均属于本申请的保护范围。例如,在上述具体实施方式中所描述的各个具体技术特征,在不矛盾的情况下,可以通过任何合适的方式进行组合,为了避免不必要的重复,本申请对各种可能的组合方式不再另行说明。又例如,本申请的各种不同的实施方式之间也可以进行任意组合,只要其不违背本申请的思想,其同样应当视为本申请所公开的内容。又例如,在不冲突的前提下,本申请描述的各个实施例和/或各个实施例中的技术特征可以和现有技术任意的相互组合,组合之后得到的技术方案也应落入本申请的保护范围。The preferred embodiments of the present application are described in detail above in conjunction with the accompanying drawings. However, the present application is not limited to the specific details in the above embodiments. Within the technical concept of the present application, the technical solution of the present application can be subjected to a variety of simple modifications, and these simple modifications all belong to the protection scope of the present application. For example, the various specific technical features described in the above specific embodiments can be combined in any suitable manner without contradiction. In order to avoid unnecessary repetition, the present application will not further explain various possible combinations. For another example, the various different embodiments of the present application can also be arbitrarily combined, as long as they do not violate the idea of the present application, they should also be regarded as the contents disclosed in the present application. For another example, under the premise of no conflict, the various embodiments and/or the technical features in the various embodiments described in the present application can be arbitrarily combined with the prior art, and the technical solution obtained after the combination should also fall within the protection scope of the present application.

还应理解,在本申请的各种方法实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。此外,在本申请实施例中,术语“下行”、“上行”和“侧行”用于表示信号或数据的传输方向,其中,“下行”用于表示信号或数据的传输方向为从站点发送至小区的用户设备的第一方向,“上行”用于表示信号或数据的传输方向为从小区的用户设备发送至站点的第二方向,“侧行”用于表示信号或数据的传输方向为从用户设备1发送至用户设备2的第三方向。例如,“下行信号”表示该信号的传输方向为第一方向。另外,本申请实施例中,术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系。具体地,A和/或B可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。It should also be understood that in various method embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence number of each process does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiment of the present application. In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, the terms "downlink", "uplink" and "side" are used to indicate the transmission direction of the signal or data, wherein "downlink" is used to indicate that the transmission direction of the signal or data is the first direction sent from the site to the user equipment of the cell, "uplink" is used to indicate that the transmission direction of the signal or data is the second direction sent from the user equipment of the cell to the site, and "side" is used to indicate that the transmission direction of the signal or data is the third direction sent from user equipment 1 to user equipment 2. For example, "downlink signal" indicates that the transmission direction of the signal is the first direction. In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, the term "and/or" is only a description of the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that three relationships can exist. Specifically, A and/or B can represent: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. In addition, the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the front and back associated objects are in an "or" relationship.

基于前述的实施例,本申请实施例提供相应的通信的装置。Based on the foregoing embodiments, the embodiments of the present application provide corresponding communication devices.

图6是本申请实施例提供的通信的装置的结构组成示意图一,应用于终端设备,如图6所示,所述通信的装置600(下文中简称为装置600)包括:FIG6 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application, which is applied to a terminal device. As shown in FIG6 , the communication device 600 (hereinafter referred to as the device 600) includes:

第一获取单元601,被配置为获取装置600与第一小区之间的第一定时提前TA,第一TA用于装置600与第一小区执行上行同步;其中,第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。The first acquisition unit 601 is configured to acquire a first timing advance TA between the device 600 and a first cell, where the first TA is used for the device 600 to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell; wherein the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.

在一些实施例中,第一TA包含在来自网络设备的第一指示信息中,第一指示信息是针对第一请求信息的响应,第一请求信息用于请求第一TA。In some embodiments, the first TA is included in first indication information from the network device, the first indication information is a response to first request information, and the first request information is used to request the first TA.

在一些实施例中,第一指示信息为以下任一项:随机接入响应;定时提前命令媒体接入控制控制单元;以及,携带第一TA的下行消息。In some embodiments, the first indication information is any one of the following: a random access response; a timing advance command media access control control unit; and a downlink message carrying the first TA.

在一些实施例中,第一请求信息为以下任一项:调度请求;上行控制信息;上行媒体接入控制控制单元;上行无线资源控制消息;第一小区的上行资源;以及,第二小区的上行资源,第二小区是用于装置600与第一小区执行上行同步的小区。In some embodiments, the first request information is any one of the following: a scheduling request; uplink control information; an uplink media access control control unit; an uplink wireless resource control message; uplink resources of the first cell; and, uplink resources of the second cell, the second cell being a cell used for the device 600 to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell.

在一些实施例中,第一TA是通过随机接入过程得到的;其中,随机接入过程是装置600在第一小区或第二小区上执行的;第二小区是用于装置600与第一小区执行上行同步的小区。In some embodiments, the first TA is obtained through a random access process; wherein the random access process is performed by the device 600 on the first cell or the second cell; and the second cell is a cell used for the device 600 to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell.

在一些实施例中,第一TA基于装置600与第二小区之间的第二TA确定;第二小区是用于装置600与第一小区执行上行同步的小区。In some embodiments, the first TA is determined based on a second TA between the apparatus 600 and a second cell; the second cell is a cell used for the apparatus 600 to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell.

在一些实施例中,第二TA包含在来自网络设备的第二指示信息中,第二指示信息是针对第二请求信息的响应,第二请求信息用于请求第二TA。In some embodiments, the second TA is included in second indication information from the network device, the second indication information is a response to second request information, and the second request information is used to request the second TA.

在一些实施例中,第二指示信息为以下任一项:随机接入响应;定时提前命令媒体接入控制控制单元;以及,携带第二TA的下行消息。In some embodiments, the second indication information is any one of the following: a random access response; a timing advance command media access control control unit; and a downlink message carrying a second TA.

在一些实施例中,第二请求信息为以下任一项:调度请求;上行控制信息;上行媒体接入控制控制 单元;上行无线资源控制消息;第一小区的上行资源;以及,第二小区的上行资源。In some embodiments, the second request information is any one of the following: scheduling request; uplink control information; uplink media access control control unit; uplink radio resource control message; uplink resources of the first cell; and, uplink resources of the second cell.

在一些实施例中,第二TA是通过随机接入过程得到的;其中,随机接入过程是装置600在第一小区或第二小区上执行的。In some embodiments, the second TA is obtained through a random access procedure; wherein the random access procedure is performed by the apparatus 600 on the first cell or the second cell.

在一些实施例中,装置600还包括:第二获取单元,被配置为获取第一参考信号的配置信息,第一参考信号是第一小区的参考信号或第二小区的参考信号,第一参考信号用于执行随机接入过程。In some embodiments, the apparatus 600 further includes: a second acquisition unit configured to acquire configuration information of a first reference signal, where the first reference signal is a reference signal of the first cell or a reference signal of the second cell, and the first reference signal is used to perform a random access process.

在一些实施例中,第一小区的参考信号的类型为跟踪参考信号或信道状态信息参考信号;第二小区的参考信号的类型为同步信号块、跟踪参考信号、信道状态信息参考信号中的任一种。In some embodiments, the type of the reference signal of the first cell is a tracking reference signal or a channel state information reference signal; the type of the reference signal of the second cell is any one of a synchronization signal block, a tracking reference signal, and a channel state information reference signal.

在一些实施例中,第一参考信号的类型是由网络设备指示的。In some embodiments, the type of the first reference signal is indicated by the network device.

在一些实施例中,第二小区是由网络设备指示的;或者,第二小区是装置600预配置的;或者,第二小区是网络设备预配置的;或者,第二小区是预定义的;或者,第二小区是由装置600确定的。In some embodiments, the second cell is indicated by the network device; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the apparatus 600; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the network device; or, the second cell is predefined; or, the second cell is determined by the apparatus 600.

在一些实施例中,第二小区是由装置600基于来自网络设备的第一信息确定的,第一信息包括以下至少之一:该网络设备的位置信息;与该网络设备相邻的网络设备的位置信息;该网络设备包括的第三小区的位置信息,第三小区为装置600所在的小区;与第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;各个网络设备之间的共站址信息;各个小区之间的共站址信息;参考信号之间的准共址信息;信道之间的准共址信息;以及,定位信息。In some embodiments, the second cell is determined by the device 600 based on first information from a network device, the first information including at least one of the following: location information of the network device; location information of a network device adjacent to the network device; location information of a third cell included in the network device, the third cell being the cell where the device 600 is located; location information of a cell adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; co-site information between various cells; quasi-co-site information between reference signals; quasi-co-site information between channels; and positioning information.

在一些实施例中,第二小区是由网络设备通过第三指示信息指示的;第三指示信息包括:第二小区的频点和/或小区标识。In some embodiments, the second cell is indicated by the network device through third indication information; the third indication information includes: the frequency point and/or cell identifier of the second cell.

在一些实施例中,第三指示信息是在第一条件下配置的。In some embodiments, the third indication information is configured under the first condition.

在一些实施例中,第一小区与第二小区属于同一个定时提前组和/或小区组。In some embodiments, the first cell and the second cell belong to the same timing advance group and/or cell group.

在一些实施例中,定时提前组和/或小区组是由网络设备基于第二信息确定的,第二信息包括以下至少之一:参考信号的测量结果;定位信息;装置600的运动轨迹信息;该网络设备的位置信息;与该网络设备相邻的网络设备的位置信息;该网络设备包括的第三小区的位置信息,第三小区为装置600所在的小区;与第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;各个网络设备之间的共站址信息;以及,各个小区之间的共站址信息。In some embodiments, the timing advance group and/or cell group is determined by the network device based on second information, and the second information includes at least one of the following: measurement results of the reference signal; positioning information; movement trajectory information of the device 600; location information of the network device; location information of network devices adjacent to the network device; location information of a third cell included in the network device, the third cell being the cell where the device 600 is located; location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; and co-site information between various cells.

在一些实施例中,第二小区是网络设备指示装置600激活的;或者,第二小区是装置600在第二条件下激活的。In some embodiments, the second cell is activated by the apparatus 600 instructed by the network device; or, the second cell is activated by the apparatus 600 under the second condition.

在一些实施例中,第二条件包括以下至少之一:第二小区的去激活定时器超时;第二小区的去激活定时器需启动;第二小区的去激活定时器需重启;获取到用于指示第二小区的指示信息;获取到第二小区的参考信号;执行与第一小区的上行同步或下行同步;获取到第一小区的配置;第一小区被激活;以及,第一小区需被激活。In some embodiments, the second condition includes at least one of the following: the deactivation timer of the second cell times out; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be started; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be restarted; indication information for indicating the second cell is obtained; a reference signal of the second cell is obtained; uplink synchronization or downlink synchronization with the first cell is performed; the configuration of the first cell is obtained; the first cell is activated; and the first cell needs to be activated.

在一些实施例中,第一TA是基于第一小区的上行数据信号确定的。In some embodiments, the first TA is determined based on an uplink data signal of the first cell.

图7是本申请实施例提供的通信的装置的结构组成示意图二,应用于网络设备,如图7所示,所述通信的装置700(下文中简称为装置700)包括:FIG. 7 is a second schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application, which is applied to a network device. As shown in FIG. 7 , the communication device 700 (hereinafter referred to as the device 700) includes:

第一发送单元701,被配置为向终端设备发送第四指示信息,第四指示信息包括终端设备与第一小区之间的第一定时提前TA,和/或,终端设备与第二小区之间的第二TA,第二小区是用于终端设备与第一小区执行上行同步的小区,第二TA用于确定第一TA,第一TA用于终端设备与第一小区执行上行同步;其中,第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。The first sending unit 701 is configured to send fourth indication information to the terminal device, the fourth indication information including a first timing advance TA between the terminal device and the first cell, and/or a second TA between the terminal device and the second cell, the second cell is a cell used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell, the second TA is used to determine the first TA, and the first TA is used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell; wherein the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.

在一些实施例中,第四指示信息是针对第三请求信息的响应,第三请求信息用于请求第一TA和/或第二TA。In some embodiments, the fourth indication information is a response to the third request information, where the third request information is used to request the first TA and/or the second TA.

在一些实施例中,第四指示信息为以下任一项:随机接入响应;定时提前命令媒体接入控制控制单元;以及,携带第一TA和/或第二TA的下行消息。In some embodiments, the fourth indication information is any one of the following: a random access response; a timing advance command media access control control unit; and a downlink message carrying the first TA and/or the second TA.

在一些实施例中,第三请求信息为以下任一项:调度请求;上行控制信息;上行媒体接入控制控制单元;上行无线资源控制消息;第一小区的上行资源;以及,第二小区的上行资源。In some embodiments, the third request information is any one of the following: a scheduling request; uplink control information; an uplink media access control control unit; an uplink radio resource control message; an uplink resource of the first cell; and an uplink resource of the second cell.

在一些实施例中,第四指示信息是在随机接入过程中向终端设备发送的随机接入响应,随机接入过程是终端设备在第一小区或第二小区上执行的。In some embodiments, the fourth indication information is a random access response sent to the terminal device during a random access procedure, and the random access procedure is performed by the terminal device on the first cell or the second cell.

在一些实施例中,装置700还包括:第二发送单元,被配置为向终端设备发送第一参考信号的配置信息,第一参考信号是第一小区的参考信号或第二小区的参考信号,第一参考信号用于执行随机接入过程。In some embodiments, the apparatus 700 further includes: a second sending unit configured to send configuration information of a first reference signal to the terminal device, the first reference signal being a reference signal of the first cell or a reference signal of the second cell, and the first reference signal being used to perform a random access process.

在一些实施例中,第一小区的参考信号的类型为跟踪参考信号或信道状态信息参考信号;第二小区的参考信号的类型为同步信号块、跟踪参考信号、信道状态信息参考信号中的任一种。In some embodiments, the type of the reference signal of the first cell is a tracking reference signal or a channel state information reference signal; the type of the reference signal of the second cell is any one of a synchronization signal block, a tracking reference signal, and a channel state information reference signal.

在一些实施例中,第一参考信号的类型是由装置700指示的。 In some embodiments, the type of the first reference signal is indicated by the apparatus 700 .

在一些实施例中,第二小区是由装置700指示的;或者,第二小区是终端设备预配置的;或者,第二小区是装置700预配置的;或者,第二小区是预定义的;或者,第二小区是由终端设备确定的。In some embodiments, the second cell is indicated by the apparatus 700; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the terminal device; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the apparatus 700; or, the second cell is predefined; or, the second cell is determined by the terminal device.

在一些实施例中,第二小区基于第一信息确定的,第一信息包括以下至少之一:装置700的位置信息;与装置700相邻的网络设备的位置信息;装置700包括的第三小区的位置信息,第三小区为终端设备所在的小区;与第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;各个网络设备之间的共站址信息;各个小区之间的共站址信息;参考信号之间的准共址信息;信道之间的准共址信息;以及,定位信息。In some embodiments, the second cell is determined based on the first information, and the first information includes at least one of the following: location information of the device 700; location information of a network device adjacent to the device 700; location information of a third cell included in the device 700, the third cell being the cell where the terminal device is located; location information of a cell adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; co-site information between various cells; quasi-co-site information between reference signals; quasi-co-site information between channels; and positioning information.

在一些实施例中,第二小区是由装置700通过第三指示信息指示的;第三指示信息包括:第二小区的频点和/或小区标识。In some embodiments, the second cell is indicated by the apparatus 700 through third indication information; the third indication information includes: a frequency point and/or a cell identifier of the second cell.

在一些实施例中,第三指示信息是在第一条件下配置的。In some embodiments, the third indication information is configured under the first condition.

在一些实施例中,第一小区与第二小区属于同一个定时提前组和/或小区组。In some embodiments, the first cell and the second cell belong to the same timing advance group and/or cell group.

在一些实施例中,定时提前组和/或小区组是由装置700基于第二信息确定的,第二信息包括以下至少之一:参考信号的测量结果;定位信息;终端设备的运动轨迹信息;装置700的位置信息;与装置700相邻的网络设备的位置信息;装置700包括的第三小区的位置信息,第三小区为终端设备所在的小区;与第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;各个网络设备之间的共站址信息;以及,各个小区之间的共站址信息。In some embodiments, the timing advance group and/or cell group is determined by the device 700 based on second information, and the second information includes at least one of the following: measurement results of reference signals; positioning information; movement trajectory information of the terminal device; location information of the device 700; location information of network devices adjacent to the device 700; location information of a third cell included in the device 700, the third cell being the cell where the terminal device is located; location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; and co-site information between various cells.

在一些实施例中,第二小区是装置700指示终端设备激活的;或者,第二小区是终端设备在第二条件下激活的。In some embodiments, the second cell is activated by the terminal device as instructed by the apparatus 700; or, the second cell is activated by the terminal device under the second condition.

在一些实施例中,第二条件包括以下至少之一:第二小区的去激活定时器超时;第二小区的去激活定时器需启动;第二小区的去激活定时器需重启;获取到用于指示第二小区的指示信息;获取到第二小区的参考信号;执行与第一小区的上行同步或下行同步;获取到第一小区的配置;第一小区被激活;以及,第一小区需被激活。In some embodiments, the second condition includes at least one of the following: the deactivation timer of the second cell times out; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be started; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be restarted; indication information for indicating the second cell is obtained; a reference signal of the second cell is obtained; uplink synchronization or downlink synchronization with the first cell is performed; the configuration of the first cell is obtained; the first cell is activated; and the first cell needs to be activated.

图8是本申请实施例提供的通信的装置的结构组成示意图三,应用于终端设备,如图8所示,所述通信的装置800(下文中简称为装置800)包括:FIG8 is a third schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application, which is applied to a terminal device. As shown in FIG8 , the communication device 800 (hereinafter referred to as the device 800) includes:

第一接收单元801,被配置为接收第二小区的参考信号或第一小区的下行数据信号,参考信号或下行数据信号用于装置800与第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时;其中,第二小区是用于装置800与第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时的小区,第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。The first receiving unit 801 is configured to receive a reference signal of a second cell or a downlink data signal of a first cell, where the reference signal or the downlink data signal is used for the device 800 to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell; wherein the second cell is a cell used for the device 800 to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell, and the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.

在一些实施例中,参考信号的类型为同步信号块、跟踪参考信号、信道状态信息参考信号中的任一种。In some embodiments, the type of the reference signal is any one of a synchronization signal block, a tracking reference signal, and a channel state information reference signal.

在一些实施例中,参考信号的至少部分配置信息是网络设备指示的;和/或,参考信号的至少部分配置信息是装置800从第二小区读取的。In some embodiments, at least part of the configuration information of the reference signal is indicated by the network device; and/or, at least part of the configuration information of the reference signal is read by the apparatus 800 from the second cell.

在一些实施例中,在参考信号用于装置800与第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时的情况下,参考信号的类型是由网络设备指示的。In some embodiments, when the reference signal is used for the apparatus 800 to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell, the type of the reference signal is indicated by the network device.

在一些实施例中,第二小区是由网络设备指示的;或者,第二小区是装置800预配置的;或者,第二小区是网络设备预配置的;或者,第二小区是预定义的;或者,第二小区是由装置800确定的。In some embodiments, the second cell is indicated by the network device; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the apparatus 800; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the network device; or, the second cell is predefined; or, the second cell is determined by the apparatus 800.

在一些实施例中,第二小区基于第一信息确定,第一信息包括以下至少之一:该网络设备的位置信息;与该网络设备相邻的网络设备的位置信息;该网络设备包括的第三小区的位置信息,第三小区为装置800所在的小区;与第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;各个网络设备之间的共站址信息;各个小区之间的共站址信息;参考信号之间的准共址信息;信道之间的准共址信息;以及,定位信息。In some embodiments, the second cell is determined based on the first information, and the first information includes at least one of the following: location information of the network device; location information of a network device adjacent to the network device; location information of a third cell included in the network device, the third cell being the cell where the device 800 is located; location information of a cell adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between each network device; co-site information between each cell; quasi-co-site information between reference signals; quasi-co-site information between channels; and positioning information.

在一些实施例中,第二小区是由网络设备通过第三指示信息指示的;第三指示信息包括:第二小区的频点和/或小区标识。In some embodiments, the second cell is indicated by the network device through third indication information; the third indication information includes: the frequency point and/or cell identifier of the second cell.

在一些实施例中,第三指示信息是在第一条件下配置的。In some embodiments, the third indication information is configured under the first condition.

在一些实施例中,第一小区与第二小区属于同一个定时提前组和/或小区组。In some embodiments, the first cell and the second cell belong to the same timing advance group and/or cell group.

在一些实施例中,定时提前组和/或小区组是由网络设备基于第二信息确定的,第二信息包括以下至少之一:参考信号的测量结果;定位信息;装置800的运动轨迹信息;该网络设备的位置信息;该网络设备的相邻网络设备的位置信息;该网络设备包括的第三小区的位置信息,第三小区为装置800所在的小区;与第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;各个网络设备之间的共站址信息;以及,各个小区之间的共站址信息。In some embodiments, the timing advance group and/or cell group is determined by the network device based on second information, and the second information includes at least one of the following: measurement results of the reference signal; positioning information; movement trajectory information of the device 800; location information of the network device; location information of adjacent network devices of the network device; location information of a third cell included in the network device, the third cell being the cell where the device 800 is located; location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; and, co-site information between various cells.

在一些实施例中,第二小区是网络设备指示装置800激活的;或者,第二小区是装置800在第二条件下激活的。In some embodiments, the second cell is activated by the apparatus 800 instructing the network device to do so; or, the second cell is activated by the apparatus 800 under a second condition.

在一些实施例中,第二条件包括以下至少之一:第二小区的去激活定时器超时;第二小区的去激活定时器需启动;第二小区的去激活定时器需重启;获取到用于指示第二小区的指示信息;获取到第二小区的参考信号;执行与第一小区的上行同步或下行同步;获取到第一小区的配置;以及,第一小区被激 活或需要被激活。In some embodiments, the second condition includes at least one of the following: the deactivation timer of the second cell times out; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be started; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be restarted; the indication information for indicating the second cell is obtained; the reference signal of the second cell is obtained; uplink synchronization or downlink synchronization with the first cell is performed; the configuration of the first cell is obtained; and the first cell is activated active or needs to be activated.

图9是本申请实施例提供的通信的装置的结构组成示意图四,应用于网络设备,如图9所示,所述通信的装置900(下文中简称为装置900)包括:FIG. 9 is a fourth schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application, which is applied to a network device. As shown in FIG. 9 , the communication device 900 (hereinafter referred to as the device 900) includes:

第二发送单元901,被配置为向终端设备发送第二小区的参考信号或第一小区的下行数据信号,参考信号或下行数据信号用于终端设备与第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时;其中,第二小区是用于终端设备与第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时的小区,第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。The second sending unit 901 is configured to send a reference signal of the second cell or a downlink data signal of the first cell to the terminal device, where the reference signal or the downlink data signal is used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell; wherein the second cell is a cell used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell, and the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission.

在一些实施例中,参考信号的类型为同步信号块、跟踪参考信号、信道状态信息参考信号中的任一种。In some embodiments, the type of the reference signal is any one of a synchronization signal block, a tracking reference signal, and a channel state information reference signal.

在一些实施例中,用于终端设备与第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时的参考信号的至少部分配置信息是装置900指示的;和/或,用于终端设备与第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时的参考信号的至少部分配置信息是终端设备从第二小区读取的。In some embodiments, at least part of the configuration information of the reference signal used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell is indicated by the device 900; and/or, at least part of the configuration information of the reference signal used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell is read by the terminal device from the second cell.

在一些实施例中,在参考信号用于终端设备与第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时的情况下,参考信号的类型是由装置900指示的。In some embodiments, when the reference signal is used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell, the type of the reference signal is indicated by the apparatus 900 .

在一些实施例中,第二小区是由装置900指示的;或者,第二小区是终端设备或装置900预配置的;或者,第二小区是预定义的;或者,第二小区是由终端设备确定的。In some embodiments, the second cell is indicated by the apparatus 900; or, the second cell is preconfigured by the terminal device or the apparatus 900; or, the second cell is predefined; or, the second cell is determined by the terminal device.

在一些实施例中,第二小区基于第一信息确定,第一信息包括以下至少之一:装置900的位置信息;与装置900相邻的网络设备的位置信息;装置900包括的第三小区的位置信息,第三小区为终端设备所在的小区;与第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;各个网络设备之间的共站址信息;各个小区之间的共站址信息;参考信号之间的准共址信息;信道之间的准共址信息;以及,定位信息。In some embodiments, the second cell is determined based on the first information, and the first information includes at least one of the following: location information of the device 900; location information of a network device adjacent to the device 900; location information of a third cell included in the device 900, the third cell being the cell where the terminal device is located; location information of a cell adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; co-site information between various cells; quasi-co-site information between reference signals; quasi-co-site information between channels; and positioning information.

在一些实施例中,第二小区是由装置900通过第三指示信息指示的;第三指示信息包括:第二小区的频点和/或小区标识。In some embodiments, the second cell is indicated by the apparatus 900 through third indication information; the third indication information includes: a frequency point and/or a cell identifier of the second cell.

在一些实施例中,第三指示信息是在第一条件下配置的。In some embodiments, the third indication information is configured under the first condition.

在一些实施例中,第一小区与第二小区属于同一个定时提前组和/或小区组。In some embodiments, the first cell and the second cell belong to the same timing advance group and/or cell group.

在一些实施例中,定时提前组和/或小区组是由装置900基于第二信息确定的,第二信息包括以下至少之一:参考信号的测量结果;定位信息;终端设备的运动轨迹信息;装置900的位置信息;装置900的相邻网络设备的位置信息;装置900包括的第三小区的位置信息,第三小区为终端设备所在的小区;与第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;各个网络设备之间的共站址信息;以及,各个小区之间的共站址信息。In some embodiments, the timing advance group and/or cell group is determined by the device 900 based on second information, and the second information includes at least one of the following: measurement results of reference signals; positioning information; movement trajectory information of the terminal device; location information of the device 900; location information of adjacent network devices of the device 900; location information of a third cell included in the device 900, where the third cell is where the terminal device is located; location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; co-site information between various network devices; and co-site information between various cells.

在一些实施例中,第二小区是装置900指示终端设备激活的;或者,第二小区是终端设备在第二条件下激活的。In some embodiments, the second cell is activated by the terminal device as instructed by the apparatus 900; or, the second cell is activated by the terminal device under the second condition.

在一些实施例中,第二条件包括以下至少之一:第二小区的去激活定时器超时;第二小区的去激活定时器需启动;第二小区的去激活定时器需重启;获取到用于指示第二小区的指示信息;获取到第二小区的参考信号;执行与第一小区的上行同步或下行同步;获取到第一小区的配置;第一小区被激活;以及,第一小区需被激活。In some embodiments, the second condition includes at least one of the following: the deactivation timer of the second cell times out; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be started; the deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be restarted; indication information for indicating the second cell is obtained; a reference signal of the second cell is obtained; uplink synchronization or downlink synchronization with the first cell is performed; the configuration of the first cell is obtained; the first cell is activated; and the first cell needs to be activated.

图10是本申请实施例提供的通信的装置的结构组成示意图五,应用于终端设备,如图10所示,所述通信的装置1000(下文中简称为装置1000)包括:FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application, which is applied to a terminal device. As shown in FIG. 10 , the communication device 1000 (hereinafter referred to as the device 1000) includes:

第二接收单元1001,被配置为接收来自网络设备的第一媒体接入控制控制单元MAC CE,第一MAC CE用于指示有子上报配置的第一CSI报告的上报方式。The second receiving unit 1001 is configured to receive a first media access control control unit MAC CE from a network device, where the first MAC CE is used to indicate a reporting method of a first CSI report with a sub-reporting configuration.

在一些实施例中,第一MAC CE包括第一CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置,在其中任一子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活的情况下,第一MAC CE指示装置1000上报第一CSI报告。In some embodiments, the first MAC CE includes indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report, and when the indications or positions of any of the sub-reporting configurations are set to activated, the first MAC CE instructs device 1000 to report the first CSI report.

在一些实施例中,在第一MAC CE指示装置1000上报第一CSI报告的情况下,第一CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置中,被设置为激活的子上报配置的指示或位置的数量大于1。In some embodiments, when the first MAC CE indication device 1000 reports the first CSI report, among the indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report, the number of indications or positions of sub-reporting configurations set to be activated is greater than 1.

在一些实施例中,对于第一CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置中的每一子上报配置,在子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活的情况下,第一MAC CE还用于指示装置1000上报第一CSI报告中与子上报配置对应的子上报的报告。In some embodiments, for each sub-reporting configuration of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report, when the indication or position of the sub-reporting configuration is set to activated, the first MAC CE is also used to instruct device 1000 to report the sub-report corresponding to the sub-reporting configuration in the first CSI report.

在一些实施例中,第一MAC CE还用于指示没有子上报配置的第二CSI报告的上报方式。In some embodiments, the first MAC CE is also used to indicate the reporting method of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration.

在一些实施例中,第一MAC CE包括第二CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置,在其中任一子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活的情况下,第一MAC CE指示装置1000上报第二CSI报告。In some embodiments, the first MAC CE includes indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the second CSI report, and when the indications or positions of any of the sub-reporting configurations are set to activated, the first MAC CE instructs device 1000 to report the second CSI report.

在一些实施例中,在第一MAC CE指示装置1000上报第二CSI报告的情况下,第二CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置中,被设置为激活的子上报配置的指示或位置的数量为1。In some embodiments, when the first MAC CE indication device 1000 reports the second CSI report, among the indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the second CSI report, the number of indications or positions of sub-reporting configurations set to be activated is 1.

在一些实施例中,第一MAC CE的长度固定。In some embodiments, the length of the first MAC CE is fixed.

在一些实施例中,第一MAC CE不用于指示没有子上报配置的第二CSI报告的上报方式。 In some embodiments, the first MAC CE is not used to indicate the reporting mode of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration.

在一些实施例中,第二CSI报告由第二MAC CE指示。In some embodiments, the second CSI report is indicated by a second MAC CE.

在一些实施例中,第一MAC CE的长度固定或可变。In some embodiments, the length of the first MAC CE is fixed or variable.

图11是本申请实施例提供的通信的装置的结构组成示意图六,应用于网络设备,如图11所示,通信的装置1100(下文中简称为装置1100)包括:FIG. 11 is a sixth structural diagram of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application, which is applied to a network device. As shown in FIG. 11 , a communication device 1100 (hereinafter referred to as device 1100 ) includes:

第三发送单元1101,被配置为向终端设备发送第一媒体接入控制控制单元MAC CE,第一MAC CE用于指示有子上报配置的第一CSI报告的上报方式。The third sending unit 1101 is configured to send a first media access control control unit MAC CE to the terminal device, and the first MAC CE is used to indicate a reporting method of a first CSI report with a sub-reporting configuration.

在一些实施例中,第一MAC CE包括第一CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置,在其中任一子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活的情况下,第一MAC CE指示终端设备上报第一CSI报告。In some embodiments, the first MAC CE includes indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report, and when the indications or positions of any of the sub-reporting configurations are set to activated, the first MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the first CSI report.

在一些实施例中,在第一MAC CE指示终端设备上报第一CSI报告的情况下,第一CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置中,被设置为激活的子上报配置的指示或位置的数量大于1。In some embodiments, when the first MAC CE indicates that the terminal device reports the first CSI report, among the indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report, the number of indications or positions of sub-reporting configurations set to be activated is greater than 1.

在一些实施例中,对于第一CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置中的每一子上报配置,在子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活的情况下,第一MAC CE还用于指示终端设备上报第一CSI报告中与子上报配置对应的子上报的报告。In some embodiments, for each sub-reporting configuration of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report, when the indication or position of the sub-reporting configuration is set to activated, the first MAC CE is also used to instruct the terminal device to report the sub-reporting report corresponding to the sub-reporting configuration in the first CSI report.

在一些实施例中,第一MAC CE还用于指示没有子上报配置的第二CSI报告的上报方式。In some embodiments, the first MAC CE is also used to indicate the reporting method of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration.

在一些实施例中,第一MAC CE包括第二CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置,在其中任一子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活的情况下,第一MAC CE指示终端设备上报第二CSI报告。In some embodiments, the first MAC CE includes indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the second CSI report, and when the indications or positions of any of the sub-reporting configurations are set to activated, the first MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the second CSI report.

在一些实施例中,在第一MAC CE指示终端设备上报第二CSI报告的情况下,第二CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置中,被设置为激活的子上报配置的指示或位置的数量为1。In some embodiments, when the first MAC CE indicates that the terminal device reports a second CSI report, among the indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the second CSI report, the number of indications or positions of sub-reporting configurations set to be activated is 1.

在一些实施例中,第一MAC CE的长度固定。In some embodiments, the length of the first MAC CE is fixed.

在一些实施例中,第一MAC CE不用于指示没有子上报配置的第二CSI报告的上报方式。In some embodiments, the first MAC CE is not used to indicate the reporting method of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration.

在一些实施例中,第二CSI报告由第二MAC CE指示。In some embodiments, the second CSI report is indicated by a second MAC CE.

在一些实施例中,第一MAC CE的长度固定或可变。In some embodiments, the length of the first MAC CE is fixed or variable.

图12是本申请实施例提供的通信的装置的结构组成示意图七,应用于终端设备,如图12所示,所述通信的装置1200(下文中简称为装置1200)包括:FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application, which is applied to a terminal device. As shown in FIG. 12 , the communication device 1200 (hereinafter referred to as the device 1200 ) includes:

第三接收单元1201,被配置为接收来自网络设备的第五指示信息;其中,第五指示信息用于指示第一操作;或者,第五指示信息在满足第三条件的情况下用于指示第一操作;第一操作包括以下至少之一:装置1200的源小区进入网络节能NES;装置1200执行条件切换CHO;装置1200开始执行CHO;以及,装置1200评估CHO的执行条件。The third receiving unit 1201 is configured to receive fifth indication information from the network device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation; or, the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation when the third condition is met; the first operation includes at least one of the following: the source cell of the device 1200 enters the network energy saving NES; the device 1200 executes the conditional switching CHO; the device 1200 starts to execute CHO; and the device 1200 evaluates the execution conditions of CHO.

在一些实施例中,装置1200还包括:第一处理单元,被配置为在第五指示信息用于指示第一操作的情况下,基于第五指示信息,执行CHO;基于第五指示信息,开始执行CHO;或者,基于第五指示信息,评估CHO的执行条件;或者,确定候选目标小区满足CHO切换条件;或者,在第一CHO事件满足的情况下,确定候选目标小区满足CHO切换条件;或者,在第一CHO事件满足的情况下,确定CHO执行条件满足;或者,在第一CHO事件满足的情况下,确定CHO事件满足;或者,在第一CHO事件满足的情况下,确定候选目标小区是触发的小区。In some embodiments, the device 1200 also includes: a first processing unit, configured to, when the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation, execute CHO based on the fifth indication information; start executing CHO based on the fifth indication information; or, based on the fifth indication information, evaluate the execution condition of CHO; or, determine that the candidate target cell satisfies the CHO switching condition; or, when the first CHO event is satisfied, determine that the candidate target cell satisfies the CHO switching condition; or, when the first CHO event is satisfied, determine that the CHO execution condition is satisfied; or, when the first CHO event is satisfied, determine that the CHO event is satisfied; or, when the first CHO event is satisfied, determine that the candidate target cell is a triggered cell.

在一些实施例中,装置1200还包括:第二处理单元,被配置为在第五指示信息用于指示第一操作的情况下,在第一时长内,装置1200不期待收到新的第五指示信息;或者,在第一时长内,装置1200不期待收到不满足第三条件的新的第五指示信息;或者,在第一时长内,在装置1200收到新的第五指示信息的情况下,忽略新的第五指示信息;或者,在第一时长内,在装置1200收到不满足第三条件的新的第五指示信息的情况下,忽略新的第五指示信息。In some embodiments, the device 1200 also includes: a second processing unit, configured to, when the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation, within a first time period, the device 1200 does not expect to receive new fifth indication information; or, within the first time period, the device 1200 does not expect to receive new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition; or, within the first time period, when the device 1200 receives new fifth indication information, ignore the new fifth indication information; or, within the first time period, when the device 1200 receives new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition, ignore the new fifth indication information.

在一些实施例中,第一时长的起始时刻为装置1200收到第五指示信息的时刻;或者,第一时长的起始时刻为装置1200收到满足第三条件的第五指示信息的时刻;或者,第一时长的起始时刻为装置1200收到第五指示信息的时刻与第一偏移相加的结果;或者,第一时长的起始时刻为装置1200收到满足第三条件的第五指示信息的时刻与第一偏移相加的结果。In some embodiments, the starting moment of the first time length is the moment when the device 1200 receives the fifth indication information; or, the starting moment of the first time length is the moment when the device 1200 receives the fifth indication information that satisfies the third condition; or, the starting moment of the first time length is the result of adding the moment when the device 1200 receives the fifth indication information and the first offset; or, the starting moment of the first time length is the result of adding the moment when the device 1200 receives the fifth indication information that satisfies the third condition and the first offset.

在一些实施例中,第一时长是预定义的、预配置的、网络设备配置的、基于无线资源控制配置的或者包含在第五指示信息中;第一偏移是预定义的、预配置的、网络设备配置的、基于无线资源控制配置的或者包含在第五指示信息中。In some embodiments, the first duration is predefined, preconfigured, configured by the network device, based on the wireless resource control configuration, or included in the fifth indication information; the first offset is predefined, preconfigured, configured by the network device, based on the wireless resource control configuration, or included in the fifth indication information.

在一些实施例中,装置1200还包括:第三处理单元,被配置为在装置1200收到新的第五指示信息的情况下,或者,在装置1200收到不满足第三条件的新的第五指示信息的情况下,执行第二操作,第二操作包括以下至少之一:停止执行CHO;停止CHO评估;删除CHO配置;向网络设备指示CHO停止;向网络设备指示切换停止;确定候选目标小区不满足CHO切换条件;确定CHO执行条件不满足;确定CHO事件不满足;确定候选目标小区不是触发的小区;以及,确定源小区离开NES。In some embodiments, the device 1200 also includes: a third processing unit, configured to perform a second operation when the device 1200 receives new fifth indication information, or when the device 1200 receives new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition, the second operation includes at least one of the following: stop executing CHO; stop CHO evaluation; delete CHO configuration; indicate CHO stop to the network device; indicate switching stop to the network device; determine that the candidate target cell does not meet the CHO switching condition; determine that the CHO execution condition is not met; determine that the CHO event is not met; determine that the candidate target cell is not a triggered cell; and determine that the source cell leaves the NES.

在一些实施例中,装置1200还包括:第四处理单元,被配置为在第一时长之后,在装置1200收到 新的第五指示信息的情况下,或者,在装置1200收到不满足第三条件的新的第五指示信息的情况下,执行第二操作,第二操作包括以下至少之一:停止执行CHO;停止CHO评估;删除CHO配置;向网络设备指示CHO停止;向网络设备指示切换停止;确定候选目标小区不满足CHO切换条件;确定CHO执行条件不满足;确定CHO事件不满足;确定候选目标小区不是触发的小区;以及,确定源小区离开NES。In some embodiments, the apparatus 1200 further includes: a fourth processing unit configured to, after the first time period, receive a In the case of new fifth indication information, or in the case that the device 1200 receives new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition, a second operation is performed, and the second operation includes at least one of the following: stop executing CHO; stop CHO evaluation; delete CHO configuration; indicate CHO stop to the network device; indicate switching stop to the network device; determine that the candidate target cell does not meet the CHO switching condition; determine that the CHO execution condition is not met; determine that the CHO event is not met; determine that the candidate target cell is not a triggered cell; and determine that the source cell leaves the NES.

在一些实施例中,新的第五指示信用于指示第三操作,或者,新的第五指示信息在不满足第三条件的情况下用于指示第三操作;第三操作包括以下至少之一:装置1200的源小区离开NES;停止执行CHO;确定候选目标小区不满足CHO切换条件;确定CHO执行条件不满足;确定CHO事件不满足;确定CHO执行条件不可用;确定候选目标小区不是触发的小区;以及,停止CHO评估。In some embodiments, the new fifth indication signal is used to indicate a third operation, or the new fifth indication signal is used to indicate the third operation when the third condition is not met; the third operation includes at least one of the following: the source cell of the device 1200 leaves the NES; stops executing CHO; determines that the candidate target cell does not meet the CHO switching condition; determines that the CHO execution condition is not met; determines that the CHO event is not met; determines that the CHO execution condition is not available; determines that the candidate target cell is not a triggered cell; and stops CHO evaluation.

在一些实施例中,第三条件包括:第五指示信息中的第一比特位被设置为特定值。In some embodiments, the third condition includes: the first bit in the fifth indication information is set to a specific value.

图13是本申请实施例提供的通信的装置的结构组成示意图八,应用于网络设备,如图13所示,所述通信的装置1300(下文中简称为装置1300)包括:FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device provided in an embodiment of the present application, which is applied to a network device. As shown in FIG. 13 , the communication device 1300 (hereinafter referred to as the device 1300 ) includes:

第四发送单元1301,被配置为向终端设备发送第五指示信息;其中,第五指示信息用于指示第一操作;或者,第五指示信息在满足第三条件的情况下用于指示第一操作;第一操作包括以下至少之一:终端设备的源小区进入网络节能NES;终端设备执行条件切换CHO;终端设备开始执行条件切换CHO;以及,终端设备评估CHO的执行条件。The fourth sending unit 1301 is configured to send fifth indication information to the terminal device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation; or, the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation when the third condition is met; the first operation includes at least one of the following: the source cell of the terminal device enters the network energy saving NES; the terminal device executes the conditional switching CHO; the terminal device starts to execute the conditional switching CHO; and the terminal device evaluates the execution conditions of CHO.

在一些实施例中,装置1200还包括:第五发送单元,被配置为向终端设备发送新的第五指示信息,新的第五指示信息用于指示第三操作,或者,新的第五指示信息在不满足第三条件的情况下用于指示第三操作;第三操作包括以下至少之一:终端设备的源小区离开NES;停止执行CHO;确定候选目标小区不满足CHO切换条件;确定CHO执行条件不满足;确定CHO事件不满足;确定为CHO执行条件不可用;确定候选目标小区不是触发的小区;以及,停止CHO评估。In some embodiments, the apparatus 1200 further includes: a fifth sending unit, configured to send new fifth indication information to the terminal device, the new fifth indication information being used to indicate a third operation, or the new fifth indication information being used to indicate a third operation when the third condition is not met; the third operation includes at least one of the following: the source cell of the terminal device leaves the NES; stops executing CHO; determines that the candidate target cell does not meet the CHO switching condition; determines that the CHO execution condition is not met; determines that the CHO event is not met; determines that the CHO execution condition is not available; determines that the candidate target cell is not a triggered cell; and stops CHO evaluation.

在一些实施例中,第三条件包括:第五指示信息中的第一比特位被设置为特定值。In some embodiments, the third condition includes: the first bit in the fifth indication information is set to a specific value.

本领域技术人员应当理解,本申请实施例的上述通信的装置的相关描述可以参照本申请实施例的通信的方法的相关描述进行理解。Those skilled in the art should understand that the relevant description of the above-mentioned communication device in the embodiment of the present application can be understood by referring to the relevant description of the communication method in the embodiment of the present application.

图14是本申请实施例提供的一种通信设备1400示意性结构图。该通信设备可以是终端设备,也可以是网络设备。图14所示的通信设备1400包括处理器1410,处理器1410可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。FIG14 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1400 provided in an embodiment of the present application. The communication device may be a terminal device or a network device. The communication device 1400 shown in FIG14 includes a processor 1410, which may call and run a computer program from a memory to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.

可选地,如图14所示,通信设备1400还可以包括存储器1420。其中,处理器1410可以从存储器1420中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。Optionally, as shown in FIG14 , the communication device 1400 may further include a memory 1420. The processor 1410 may call and run a computer program from the memory 1420 to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.

其中,存储器1420可以是独立于处理器1410的一个单独的器件,也可以集成在处理器1410中。The memory 1420 may be a separate device independent of the processor 1410 , or may be integrated into the processor 1410 .

可选地,如图14所示,通信设备1400还可以包括收发器1430,处理器1410可以控制该收发器1430与其他设备进行通信,具体地,可以向其他设备发送信息或数据,或接收其他设备发送的信息或数据。Optionally, as shown in FIG. 14 , the communication device 1400 may further include a transceiver 1430 , and the processor 1410 may control the transceiver 1430 to communicate with other devices, specifically, may send information or data to other devices, or receive information or data sent by other devices.

其中,收发器1430可以包括发射机和接收机。收发器1430还可以进一步包括天线,天线的数量可以为一个或多个。The transceiver 1430 may include a transmitter and a receiver. The transceiver 1430 may further include an antenna, and the number of the antennas may be one or more.

可选地,该通信设备1400具体可为本申请实施例的网络设备,并且该通信设备1400可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the communication device 1400 may specifically be a network device of an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1400 may implement corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiment of the present application, which will not be described in detail here for the sake of brevity.

可选地,该通信设备1400具体可为本申请实施例的终端设备,并且该通信设备1400可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the communication device 1400 may specifically be a terminal device of an embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1400 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in each method of the embodiment of the present application, which will not be described in detail here for the sake of brevity.

可选地,收发器1430可以是装置600中的第一获取单元601、装置700中的第一发送单元701、装置800中的第一接收单元801、装置900中的第二发送单元901、装置1000中的第二接收单元1001、装置1100中的第三发送单元1101、装置1200中的第三接收单元1201或装置1300中的第四发送单元1301。Optionally, the transceiver 1430 can be the first acquisition unit 601 in the device 600, the first sending unit 701 in the device 700, the first receiving unit 801 in the device 800, the second sending unit 901 in the device 900, the second receiving unit 1001 in the device 1000, the third sending unit 1101 in the device 1100, the third receiving unit 1201 in the device 1200, or the fourth sending unit 1301 in the device 1300.

可选地,处理器1410例如可以为装置600中的第一获取单元601。Optionally, the processor 1410 may be, for example, the first acquisition unit 601 in the device 600 .

图15是本申请实施例的芯片的示意性结构图。图15所示的芯片1500包括处理器1510,处理器1510可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。Fig. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application. The chip 1500 shown in Fig. 15 includes a processor 1510, and the processor 1510 can call and run a computer program from a memory to implement the method according to the embodiment of the present application.

可选地,如图15所示,芯片1500还可以包括存储器1520。其中,处理器1510可以从存储器1520中调用并运行计算机程序,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。Optionally, as shown in FIG15 , the chip 1500 may further include a memory 1520. The processor 1510 may call and run a computer program from the memory 1520 to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.

其中,存储器1520可以是独立于处理器1510的一个单独的器件,也可以集成在处理器1510中。The memory 1520 may be a separate device independent of the processor 1510 , or may be integrated into the processor 1510 .

可选地,该芯片1500还可以包括输入接口1530。其中,处理器1510可以控制该输入接口1530与其他设备或芯片进行通信,具体地,可以获取其他设备或芯片发送的信息或数据。Optionally, the chip 1500 may further include an input interface 1530. The processor 1510 may control the input interface 1530 to communicate with other devices or chips, and specifically, may obtain information or data sent by other devices or chips.

可选地,该芯片1500还可以包括输出接口1540。其中,处理器1510可以控制该输出接口1540与其他设备或芯片进行通信,具体地,可以向其他设备或芯片输出信息或数据。 Optionally, the chip 1500 may further include an output interface 1540. The processor 1510 may control the output interface 1540 to communicate with other devices or chips, and specifically, may output information or data to other devices or chips.

可选地,该芯片可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,并且该芯片可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the chip can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in each method of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.

可选地,该芯片可应用于本申请实施例中的终端设备,并且该芯片可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the chip can be applied to the terminal device in the embodiments of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.

应理解,本申请实施例提到的芯片还可以称为系统级芯片,系统芯片,芯片系统或片上系统芯片等。It should be understood that the chip mentioned in the embodiments of the present application can also be called a system-level chip, a system chip, a chip system or a system-on-chip chip, etc.

本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机存储介质,所述计算机存储介质存储有一个或者多个程序,所述一个或者多个程序可被一个或者多个处理器执行,以实现本申请实施例中的方法。The embodiments of the present application also provide a computer storage medium, which stores one or more programs. The one or more programs can be executed by one or more processors to implement the method in the embodiments of the present application.

图16是本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统1600的示意性框图。如图16所示,该通信系统1600包括终端设备1610和网络设备1620。FIG16 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system 1600 provided in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG16 , the communication system 1600 includes a terminal device 1610 and a network device 1620 .

其中,该终端设备1610可以用于实现上述方法中由终端设备实现的相应的功能,以及该网络设备1620可以用于实现上述方法中由网络设备实现的相应的功能,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Among them, the terminal device 1610 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the terminal device in the above method, and the network device 1620 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the network device in the above method. For the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.

应理解,本申请实施例的处理器可能是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。It should be understood that the processor of the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities. In the implementation process, each step of the above method embodiment can be completed by the hardware integrated logic circuit in the processor or the instruction in the form of software. The above processor can be a general processor, a digital signal processor (Digital Signal Processor, DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (Application Specific Integrated Circuit, ASIC), a field programmable gate array (Field Programmable Gate Array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components. The methods, steps and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed. The general processor can be a microprocessor or the processor can also be any conventional processor, etc. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiment of the present application can be directly embodied as a hardware decoding processor to execute, or the hardware and software modules in the decoding processor can be executed. The software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as a random access memory, a flash memory, a read-only memory, a programmable read-only memory or an electrically erasable programmable memory, a register, etc. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.

可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(Static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(Dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(Synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(Double Data Rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(Enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(Synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It can be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application can be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or can include both volatile and non-volatile memories. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), or a flash memory. The volatile memory can be a random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache. By way of example and not limitation, many forms of RAM are available, such as Static RAM (SRAM), Dynamic RAM (DRAM), Synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), Double Data Rate SDRAM (DDR SDRAM), Enhanced SDRAM (ESDRAM), Synchlink DRAM (SLDRAM), and Direct Rambus RAM (DR RAM). It should be noted that the memory of the systems and methods described herein is intended to include, but is not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.

应理解,上述存储器为示例性但不是限制性说明,例如,本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synch link DRAM,SLDRAM)以及直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM,DR RAM)等等。也就是说,本申请实施例中的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It should be understood that the above-mentioned memory is exemplary but not restrictive. For example, the memory in the embodiment of the present application may also be static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (synch link DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DR RAM), etc. That is to say, the memory in the embodiment of the present application is intended to include but not limited to these and any other suitable types of memory.

本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,用于存储计算机程序。An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program.

可选的,该计算机可读存储介质可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer-readable storage medium can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they are not repeated here.

可选地,该计算机可读存储介质可应用于本申请实施例中的终端设备,并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer-readable storage medium can be applied to the terminal device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they are not repeated here.

本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品,包括计算机程序指令。An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, including computer program instructions.

可选的,该计算机程序产品可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,并且该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer program product can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program instructions enable the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they are not repeated here.

可选地,该计算机程序产品可应用于本申请实施例中的终端设备,并且该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer program product can be applied to the terminal device in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program instructions enable the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they are not repeated here.

本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program.

可选的,该计算机程序可应用于本申请实施例中的网络设备,当该计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由网络设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。 Optionally, the computer program can be applied to the network device in the embodiments of the present application. When the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the corresponding processes implemented by the network device in the various methods in the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they are not described here.

可选地,该计算机程序可应用于本申请实施例中的终端设备,当该计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由终端设备实现的相应流程,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the computer program can be applied to the terminal device in the embodiments of the present application. When the computer program runs on the computer, the computer executes the corresponding processes implemented by the terminal device in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they are not repeated here.

本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professional and technical personnel can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application.

所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working processes of the systems, devices and units described above can refer to the corresponding processes in the aforementioned method embodiments and will not be repeated here.

在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.

所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.

另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.

所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,)ROM、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application can be essentially or partly embodied in the form of a software product that contributes to the prior art. The computer software product is stored in a storage medium and includes several instructions for a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), disk or optical disk, and other media that can store program codes.

以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。 The above is only a specific implementation of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited thereto. Any person skilled in the art who is familiar with the present technical field can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the present application, which should be included in the protection scope of the present application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application should be based on the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (107)

一种通信的方法,应用于终端设备,所述方法包括:A communication method, applied to a terminal device, comprising: 获取所述终端设备与第一小区之间的第一定时提前TA,所述第一TA用于所述终端设备与所述第一小区执行上行同步;Acquire a first timing advance TA between the terminal device and the first cell, where the first TA is used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell; 其中,所述第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。The first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 1, wherein 所述第一TA包含在来自网络设备的第一指示信息中,所述第一指示信息是针对第一请求信息的响应,所述第一请求信息用于请求所述第一TA。The first TA is included in first indication information from a network device, the first indication information is a response to first request information, and the first request information is used to request the first TA. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其中,所述第一指示信息为以下任一项:The method according to claim 2, wherein the first indication information is any one of the following: 随机接入响应;Random access response; 定时提前命令媒体接入控制控制单元;以及,a timing advance command media access control control unit; and, 携带所述第一TA的下行消息。A downlink message carrying the first TA. 根据权利要求2或3所述的方法,其中,所述第一请求信息为以下任一项:The method according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the first request information is any one of the following: 调度请求;Scheduling requests; 上行控制信息;Uplink control information; 上行媒体接入控制控制单元;Uplink media access control control unit; 上行无线资源控制消息;Uplink radio resource control message; 所述第一小区的上行资源;以及,uplink resources of the first cell; and 第二小区的上行资源,所述第二小区是用于所述终端设备与所述第一小区执行上行同步的小区。The uplink resources of the second cell, where the second cell is a cell used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 1, wherein 所述第一TA是通过随机接入过程得到的;The first TA is obtained through a random access process; 其中,所述随机接入过程是所述终端设备在所述第一小区或第二小区上执行的;所述第二小区是用于所述终端设备与所述第一小区执行上行同步的小区。The random access process is performed by the terminal device on the first cell or the second cell; the second cell is a cell used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 1, wherein 所述第一TA基于所述终端设备与第二小区之间的第二TA确定;所述第二小区是用于所述终端设备与所述第一小区执行上行同步的小区。The first TA is determined based on a second TA between the terminal device and a second cell; the second cell is a cell used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 6, wherein 所述第二TA包含在来自网络设备的第二指示信息中,所述第二指示信息是针对第二请求信息的响应,所述第二请求信息用于请求所述第二TA。The second TA is included in second indication information from the network device, the second indication information is a response to second request information, and the second request information is used to request the second TA. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其中,所述第二指示信息为以下任一项:The method according to claim 7, wherein the second indication information is any one of the following: 随机接入响应;Random access response; 定时提前命令媒体接入控制控制单元;以及,a timing advance command media access control control unit; and, 携带所述第二TA的下行消息。A downlink message carrying the second TA. 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法,其中,所述第二请求信息为以下任一项:The method according to claim 7 or 8, wherein the second request information is any one of the following: 调度请求;Scheduling requests; 上行控制信息;Uplink control information; 上行媒体接入控制控制单元;Uplink media access control control unit; 上行无线资源控制消息;Uplink radio resource control message; 所述第一小区的上行资源;以及,uplink resources of the first cell; and 所述第二小区的上行资源。The uplink resources of the second cell. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 6, wherein 所述第二TA是通过随机接入过程得到的;The second TA is obtained through a random access process; 其中,所述随机接入过程是所述终端设备在所述第一小区或所述第二小区上执行的。The random access process is performed by the terminal device on the first cell or the second cell. 根据权利要求5或10所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 5 or 10, wherein the method further comprises: 获取第一参考信号的配置信息,所述第一参考信号是所述第一小区的参考信号或所述第二小区的参考信号,所述第一参考信号用于执行所述随机接入过程。Configuration information of a first reference signal is acquired, where the first reference signal is a reference signal of the first cell or a reference signal of the second cell, and the first reference signal is used to perform the random access process. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 11, wherein 所述第一小区的参考信号的类型为跟踪参考信号或信道状态信息参考信号;A type of the reference signal of the first cell is a tracking reference signal or a channel state information reference signal; 所述第二小区的参考信号的类型为同步信号块、跟踪参考信号、信道状态信息参考信号中的任一种。The type of the reference signal of the second cell is any one of a synchronization signal block, a tracking reference signal, and a channel state information reference signal. 根据权利要求11或12所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 11 or 12, wherein 所述第一参考信号的类型是由网络设备指示的。The type of the first reference signal is indicated by a network device. 根据权利要求4至13中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 4 to 13, wherein 所述第二小区是由网络设备指示的;或者,The second cell is indicated by the network device; or, 所述第二小区是所述终端设备预配置的;或者,The second cell is preconfigured by the terminal device; or, 所述第二小区是所述网络设备预配置的;或者,The second cell is preconfigured by the network device; or, 所述第二小区是预定义的;或者,The second cell is predefined; or, 所述第二小区是由所述终端设备确定的。The second cell is determined by the terminal device. 根据权利要求4至13中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 4 to 13, wherein 所述第二小区基于第一信息确定,所述第一信息包括以下至少之一:The second cell is determined based on first information, where the first information includes at least one of the following: 所述网络设备的位置信息;location information of the network device; 与所述网络设备相邻的网络设备的位置信息;Location information of network devices adjacent to the network device; 所述网络设备包括的第三小区的位置信息,所述第三小区为所述终端设备所在的小区;The location information of a third cell included in the network device, where the third cell is the cell where the terminal device is located; 与所述第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; 各个网络设备之间的共站址信息;Co-site information between various network devices; 各个小区之间的共站址信息;Co-site information between various cells; 参考信号之间的准共址信息;Quasi-co-location information between reference signals; 信道之间的准共址信息;以及,Quasi-co-location information between channels; and, 定位信息。Positioning information. 根据权利要求4至13中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 4 to 13, wherein 所述第二小区是由网络设备通过第三指示信息指示的;The second cell is indicated by the network device through third indication information; 所述第三指示信息包括:所述第二小区的频点和/或小区标识。The third indication information includes: the frequency point and/or cell identifier of the second cell. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 16, wherein 所述第三指示信息是在第一条件下配置的。The third indication information is configured under the first condition. 根据权利要求4至17中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 4 to 17, wherein 所述第一小区与所述第二小区属于同一个定时提前组和/或小区组。The first cell and the second cell belong to the same timing advance group and/or cell group. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 18, wherein 所述定时提前组和/或所述小区组是由网络设备基于第二信息确定的,所述第二信息包括以下至少之一:The timing advance group and/or the cell group is determined by the network device based on second information, where the second information includes at least one of the following: 参考信号的测量结果;Measurement results of reference signals; 定位信息;Location information; 所述终端设备的运动轨迹信息;Movement trajectory information of the terminal device; 所述网络设备的位置信息;location information of the network device; 与所述网络设备相邻的网络设备的位置信息;Location information of network devices adjacent to the network device; 所述网络设备包括的第三小区的位置信息,所述第三小区为所述终端设备所在的小区;The location information of a third cell included in the network device, where the third cell is the cell where the terminal device is located; 与所述第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; 各个网络设备之间的共站址信息;以及,Co-location information between various network devices; and, 各个小区之间的共站址信息。Co-site information between cells. 根据权利要求4至19中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 4 to 19, wherein 所述第二小区是网络设备指示所述终端设备激活的;或者,The second cell is activated by the terminal device instructed by the network device; or, 所述第二小区是所述终端设备在第二条件下激活的。The second cell is activated by the terminal device under a second condition. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其中,所述第二条件包括以下至少之一:The method according to claim 20, wherein the second condition comprises at least one of the following: 所述第二小区的去激活定时器超时;A deactivation timer of the second cell times out; 所述第二小区的去激活定时器需启动;The deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be started; 所述第二小区的去激活定时器需重启;The deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be restarted; 获取到用于指示所述第二小区的指示信息;Acquire indication information used to indicate the second cell; 获取到所述第二小区的参考信号;acquiring a reference signal of the second cell; 执行与所述第一小区的上行同步或下行同步;performing uplink synchronization or downlink synchronization with the first cell; 获取到所述第一小区的配置;Acquire the configuration of the first cell; 所述第一小区被激活;以及,The first cell is activated; and, 所述第一小区需被激活。The first cell needs to be activated. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 1, wherein 所述第一TA是基于所述第一小区的上行数据信号确定的。The first TA is determined based on an uplink data signal of the first cell. 一种通信的方法,应用于网络设备,所述方法包括:A communication method, applied to a network device, comprising: 向终端设备发送第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息包括所述终端设备与第一小区之间的第一定时提前TA,和/或,所述终端设备与第二小区之间的第二TA,所述第二小区是用于所述终端设备与所述第一小区执行上行同步的小区,所述第二TA用于确定所述第一TA,所述第一TA用于所述终端设备与所述第一小区执行上行同步;Sending fourth indication information to the terminal device, the fourth indication information including a first timing advance TA between the terminal device and the first cell, and/or a second TA between the terminal device and the second cell, the second cell being a cell used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell, the second TA being used to determine the first TA, and the first TA being used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell; 其中,所述第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。The first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission. 根据权利要求23所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 23, wherein 所述第四指示信息是针对第三请求信息的响应,所述第三请求信息用于请求所述第一TA和/或所述第二TA。The fourth indication information is a response to third request information, where the third request information is used to request the first TA and/or the second TA. 根据权利要求24所述的方法,其中,所述第四指示信息为以下任一项:The method according to claim 24, wherein the fourth indication information is any one of the following: 随机接入响应;Random access response; 定时提前命令媒体接入控制控制单元;以及,a timing advance command media access control control unit; and, 携带所述第一TA和/或所述第二TA的下行消息。A downlink message carrying the first TA and/or the second TA. 根据权利要求24或25所述的方法,其中,所述第三请求信息为以下任一项:The method according to claim 24 or 25, wherein the third request information is any one of the following: 调度请求;Scheduling requests; 上行控制信息;Uplink control information; 上行媒体接入控制控制单元;Uplink media access control control unit; 上行无线资源控制消息;Uplink radio resource control message; 所述第一小区的上行资源;以及,uplink resources of the first cell; and 所述第二小区的上行资源。The uplink resources of the second cell. 根据权利要求23所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 23, wherein 所述第四指示信息是在随机接入过程中向所述终端设备发送的随机接入响应,所述随机接入过程是所述终端设备在所述第一小区或所述第二小区上执行的。The fourth indication information is a random access response sent to the terminal device during a random access procedure, and the random access procedure is performed by the terminal device on the first cell or the second cell. 根据权利要求27所述的方法,其中,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 27, wherein the method further comprises: 向所述终端设备发送第一参考信号的配置信息,所述第一参考信号是所述第一小区的参考信号或所述第二小区的参考信号,所述第一参考信号用于执行所述随机接入过程。Configuration information of a first reference signal is sent to the terminal device, where the first reference signal is a reference signal of the first cell or a reference signal of the second cell, and the first reference signal is used to perform the random access process. 根据权利要求28所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 28, wherein 所述第一小区的参考信号的类型为跟踪参考信号或信道状态信息参考信号;A type of the reference signal of the first cell is a tracking reference signal or a channel state information reference signal; 所述第二小区的参考信号的类型为同步信号块、跟踪参考信号、信道状态信息参考信号中的任一种。The type of the reference signal of the second cell is any one of a synchronization signal block, a tracking reference signal, and a channel state information reference signal. 根据权利要求28或29所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 28 or 29, wherein 所述第一参考信号的类型是由所述网络设备指示的。The type of the first reference signal is indicated by the network device. 根据权利要求23至30中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 23 to 30, wherein 所述第二小区是由所述网络设备指示的;或者,The second cell is indicated by the network device; or, 所述第二小区是所述终端设备预配置的;或者,The second cell is preconfigured by the terminal device; or, 所述第二小区是所述网络设备预配置的;或者,The second cell is preconfigured by the network device; or, 所述第二小区是预定义的;或者,The second cell is predefined; or, 所述第二小区是由所述终端设备确定的。The second cell is determined by the terminal device. 根据权利要求23至30中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 23 to 30, wherein 所述第二小区基于第一信息确定,所述第一信息包括以下至少之一:The second cell is determined based on first information, where the first information includes at least one of the following: 所述网络设备的位置信息;location information of the network device; 与所述网络设备相邻的网络设备的位置信息;Location information of network devices adjacent to the network device; 所述网络设备包括的第三小区的位置信息,所述第三小区为所述终端设备所在的小区;The location information of a third cell included in the network device, where the third cell is the cell where the terminal device is located; 与所述第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; 各个网络设备之间的共站址信息;Co-site information between various network devices; 各个小区之间的共站址信息;Co-site information between various cells; 参考信号之间的准共址信息;Quasi-co-location information between reference signals; 信道之间的准共址信息;以及,Quasi-co-location information between channels; and, 定位信息。Positioning information. 根据权利要求23至30中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 23 to 30, wherein 所述第二小区是由所述网络设备通过第三指示信息指示的;The second cell is indicated by the network device through third indication information; 所述第三指示信息包括:所述第二小区的频点和/或小区标识。The third indication information includes: the frequency point and/or cell identifier of the second cell. 根据权利要求33所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 33, wherein 所述第三指示信息是在第一条件下配置的。The third indication information is configured under the first condition. 根据权利要求23至34中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 23 to 34, wherein 所述第一小区与所述第二小区属于同一个定时提前组和/或小区组。The first cell and the second cell belong to the same timing advance group and/or cell group. 根据权利要求35所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 35, wherein 所述定时提前组和/或所述小区组是由所述网络设备基于第二信息确定的,所述第二信息包括以下至少之一:The timing advance group and/or the cell group is determined by the network device based on second information, where the second information includes at least one of the following: 参考信号的测量结果;Measurement results of reference signals; 定位信息;Location information; 所述终端设备的运动轨迹信息;Movement trajectory information of the terminal device; 所述网络设备的位置信息;location information of the network device; 与所述网络设备相邻的网络设备的位置信息;Location information of network devices adjacent to the network device; 所述网络设备包括的第三小区的位置信息,所述第三小区为所述终端设备所在的小区;The location information of a third cell included in the network device, where the third cell is the cell where the terminal device is located; 与所述第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; 各个网络设备之间的共站址信息;以及,Co-location information between various network devices; and, 各个小区之间的共站址信息。Co-site information between cells. 根据权利要求23至36中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 23 to 36, wherein 所述第二小区是所述网络设备指示所述终端设备激活的;或者,The second cell is activated by the terminal device instructed by the network device; or, 所述第二小区是所述终端设备在第二条件下激活的。The second cell is activated by the terminal device under a second condition. 根据权利要求37所述的方法,其中,所述第二条件包括以下至少之一:The method according to claim 37, wherein the second condition comprises at least one of the following: 所述第二小区的去激活定时器超时;A deactivation timer of the second cell times out; 所述第二小区的去激活定时器需启动The deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be started 所述第二小区的去激活定时器需重启;The deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be restarted; 获取到用于指示所述第二小区的指示信息;Acquire indication information used to indicate the second cell; 获取到所述第二小区的参考信号;acquiring a reference signal of the second cell; 执行与所述第一小区的上行同步或下行同步;performing uplink synchronization or downlink synchronization with the first cell; 获取到所述第一小区的配置;Acquire the configuration of the first cell; 所述第一小区被激活;以及,The first cell is activated; and, 所述第一小区需被激活。The first cell needs to be activated. 一种通信的方法,应用于终端设备,所述方法包括:A communication method, applied to a terminal device, comprising: 接收第二小区的参考信号或第一小区的下行数据信号,所述参考信号或所述下行数据信号用于所述终端设备与所述第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时;receiving a reference signal of a second cell or a downlink data signal of a first cell, wherein the reference signal or the downlink data signal is used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell; 其中,所述第二小区是用于所述终端设备与所述第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时的小区,所述第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。The second cell is a cell used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell, and the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission. 根据权利要求39所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 39, wherein 所述参考信号的类型为同步信号块、跟踪参考信号、信道状态信息参考信号中的任一种。The type of the reference signal is any one of a synchronization signal block, a tracking reference signal, and a channel state information reference signal. 根据权利要求39或40所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 39 or 40, wherein 所述参考信号的至少部分配置信息是网络设备指示的;和/或,At least part of the configuration information of the reference signal is indicated by the network device; and/or, 所述参考信号的至少部分配置信息是所述终端设备从所述第二小区读取的。At least part of the configuration information of the reference signal is read by the terminal device from the second cell. 根据权利要求39至41中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 39 to 41, wherein 在所述参考信号用于所述终端设备与所述第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时的情况下,所述参考信号的类型是由网络设备指示的。In the case where the reference signal is used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell, the type of the reference signal is indicated by a network device. 根据权利要求39至42中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 39 to 42, wherein 所述第二小区是由网络设备指示的;或者,The second cell is indicated by the network device; or, 所述第二小区是所述终端设备预配置的;或者,The second cell is preconfigured by the terminal device; or, 所述第二小区是所述网络设备预配置的;或者,The second cell is preconfigured by the network device; or, 所述第二小区是预定义的;或者,The second cell is predefined; or, 所述第二小区是由所述终端设备确定的。The second cell is determined by the terminal device. 根据权利要求39至42中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 39 to 42, wherein 所述第二小区基于第一信息确定的,所述第一信息包括以下至少之一:The second cell is determined based on first information, where the first information includes at least one of the following: 所述网络设备的位置信息;location information of the network device; 与所述网络设备相邻的网络设备的位置信息;Location information of network devices adjacent to the network device; 所述网络设备包括的第三小区的位置信息,所述第三小区为所述终端设备所在的小区;The location information of a third cell included in the network device, where the third cell is the cell where the terminal device is located; 与所述第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; 各个网络设备之间的共站址信息;Co-site information between various network devices; 各个小区之间的共站址信息;Co-site information between various cells; 参考信号之间的准共址信息;Quasi-co-location information between reference signals; 信道之间的准共址信息;以及,Quasi-co-location information between channels; and, 定位信息。Positioning information. 根据权利要求39至42中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 39 to 42, wherein 所述第二小区是由网络设备通过第三指示信息指示的;The second cell is indicated by the network device through third indication information; 所述第三指示信息包括:所述第二小区的频点和/或小区标识。The third indication information includes: the frequency point and/or cell identifier of the second cell. 根据权利要求45所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 45, wherein 所述第三指示信息是在第一条件下配置的。The third indication information is configured under the first condition. 根据权利要求39至46中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 39 to 46, wherein 所述第一小区与所述第二小区属于同一个定时提前组和/或小区组。The first cell and the second cell belong to the same timing advance group and/or cell group. 根据权利要求47所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 47, wherein 所述定时提前组和/或所述小区组是由网络设备基于第二信息确定的,所述第二信息包括以下至少之一:The timing advance group and/or the cell group is determined by the network device based on second information, where the second information includes at least one of the following: 参考信号的测量结果;Measurement results of reference signals; 定位信息;Location information; 所述终端设备的运动轨迹信息;Movement trajectory information of the terminal device; 所述网络设备的位置信息;location information of the network device; 与所述网络设备相邻的网络设备的位置信息;Location information of network devices adjacent to the network device; 所述网络设备包括的第三小区的位置信息,所述第三小区为所述终端设备所在的小区;The location information of a third cell included in the network device, where the third cell is the cell where the terminal device is located; 与所述第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; 各个网络设备之间的共站址信息;以及,Co-location information between various network devices; and, 各个小区之间的共站址信息。Co-site information between cells. 根据权利要求39至48中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 39 to 48, wherein 所述第二小区是网络设备指示所述终端设备激活的;或者,The second cell is activated by the terminal device instructed by the network device; or, 所述第二小区是所述终端设备在第二条件下激活的。The second cell is activated by the terminal device under a second condition. 根据权利要求49所述的方法,其中,所述第二条件包括以下至少之一:The method according to claim 49, wherein the second condition comprises at least one of the following: 所述第二小区的去激活定时器超时;A deactivation timer of the second cell times out; 所述第二小区的去激活定时器需启动;The deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be started; 所述第二小区的去激活定时器需重启;The deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be restarted; 获取到用于指示所述第二小区的指示信息;Acquire indication information used to indicate the second cell; 获取到所述第二小区的参考信号;acquiring a reference signal of the second cell; 执行与所述第一小区的上行同步或下行同步;performing uplink synchronization or downlink synchronization with the first cell; 获取到所述第一小区的配置;以及,acquiring the configuration of the first cell; and, 所述第一小区被激活或需要被激活。The first cell is activated or needs to be activated. 一种通信的方法,应用于网络设备,所述方法包括:A communication method, applied to a network device, comprising: 向终端设备发送第二小区的参考信号或第一小区的下行数据信号,所述参考信号或所述下行数据信号用于所述终端设备与所述第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时;Sending a reference signal of a second cell or a downlink data signal of a first cell to a terminal device, wherein the reference signal or the downlink data signal is used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell; 其中,所述第二小区是用于所述终端设备与所述第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时的小区,所述第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。The second cell is a cell used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell, and the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission. 根据权利要求51所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 51, wherein 所述参考信号的类型为同步信号块、跟踪参考信号、信道状态信息参考信号中的任一种。The type of the reference signal is any one of a synchronization signal block, a tracking reference signal, and a channel state information reference signal. 根据权利要求51或52所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 51 or 52, wherein 用于所述终端设备与所述第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时的参考信号的至少部分配置信息是所述网络设备指示的;和/或,At least part of the configuration information of the reference signal used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell is indicated by the network device; and/or, 用于所述终端设备与所述第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时的参考信号的至少部分配置信息是所述终端设备从所述第二小区读取的。At least part of the configuration information of the reference signal used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell is read by the terminal device from the second cell. 根据权利要求51至53中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 51 to 53, wherein 在所述参考信号用于所述终端设备与所述第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时的情况下,所述参考信号的类型是由所述网络设备指示的。In the case where the reference signal is used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell, the type of the reference signal is indicated by the network device. 根据权利要求51至54中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 51 to 54, wherein 所述第二小区是由所述网络设备指示的;或者,The second cell is indicated by the network device; or, 所述第二小区是所述终端设备预配置的;或者,The second cell is preconfigured by the terminal device; or, 所述第二小区是所述网络设备预配置的;或者,The second cell is preconfigured by the network device; or, 所述第二小区是预定义的;或者,The second cell is predefined; or, 所述第二小区是由所述终端设备确定的。The second cell is determined by the terminal device. 根据权利要求51至54中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 51 to 54, wherein 所述第二小区基于第一信息确定的,所述第一信息包括以下至少之一:The second cell is determined based on first information, where the first information includes at least one of the following: 所述网络设备的位置信息;location information of the network device; 与所述网络设备相邻的网络设备的位置信息;Location information of network devices adjacent to the network device; 所述网络设备包括的第三小区的位置信息,所述第三小区为所述终端设备所在的小区;The location information of a third cell included in the network device, where the third cell is the cell where the terminal device is located; 与所述第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; 各个网络设备之间的共站址信息;Co-site information between various network devices; 各个小区之间的共站址信息;Co-site information between various cells; 参考信号之间的准共址信息;Quasi-co-location information between reference signals; 信道之间的准共址信息;以及,Quasi-co-location information between channels; and, 定位信息。Positioning information. 根据权利要求51至54中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 51 to 54, wherein 所述第二小区是由所述网络设备通过第三指示信息指示的;The second cell is indicated by the network device through third indication information; 所述第三指示信息包括:所述第二小区的频点和/或小区标识。The third indication information includes: the frequency point and/or cell identifier of the second cell. 根据权利要求57所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 57, wherein 所述第三指示信息是在第一条件下配置的。The third indication information is configured under the first condition. 根据权利要求51至58中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 51 to 58, wherein 所述第一小区与所述第二小区属于同一个定时提前组和/或小区组。The first cell and the second cell belong to the same timing advance group and/or cell group. 根据权利要求59所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 59, wherein 所述定时提前组和/或所述小区组是由所述网络设备基于第二信息确定的,所述第二信息包括以下至少之一:The timing advance group and/or the cell group is determined by the network device based on second information, where the second information includes at least one of the following: 参考信号的测量结果;Measurement results of reference signals; 定位信息;Location information; 所述终端设备的运动轨迹信息;Movement trajectory information of the terminal device; 所述网络设备的位置信息;location information of the network device; 与所述网络设备相邻的网络设备的位置信息;Location information of network devices adjacent to the network device; 所述网络设备包括的第三小区的位置信息,所述第三小区为所述终端设备所在的小区;The location information of a third cell included in the network device, where the third cell is the cell where the terminal device is located; 与所述第三小区相邻的小区的位置信息;location information of cells adjacent to the third cell; 各个网络设备之间的共站址信息;以及,Co-location information between various network devices; and, 各个小区之间的共站址信息。Co-site information between cells. 根据权利要求51至60中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 51 to 60, wherein 所述第二小区是所述网络设备指示所述终端设备激活的;或者,The second cell is activated by the terminal device instructed by the network device; or, 所述第二小区是所述终端设备在第二条件下激活的。The second cell is activated by the terminal device under a second condition. 根据权利要求61所述的方法,其中,所述第二条件包括以下至少之一:The method of claim 61, wherein the second condition comprises at least one of the following: 所述第二小区的去激活定时器超时;A deactivation timer of the second cell times out; 所述第二小区的去激活定时器需启动;The deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be started; 所述第二小区的去激活定时器需重启;The deactivation timer of the second cell needs to be restarted; 获取到用于指示所述第二小区的指示信息;Acquire indication information used to indicate the second cell; 获取到所述第二小区的参考信号;acquiring a reference signal of the second cell; 执行与所述第一小区的上行同步或下行同步;performing uplink synchronization or downlink synchronization with the first cell; 获取到所述第一小区的配置;Acquire the configuration of the first cell; 所述第一小区被激活;以及,The first cell is activated; and, 所述第一小区需被激活。The first cell needs to be activated. 一种通信的方法,应用于终端设备,所述方法包括:A communication method, applied to a terminal device, comprising: 接收来自网络设备的第一媒体接入控制控制单元MAC CE,所述第一MAC CE用于指示有子上报配置的第一CSI报告的上报方式。Receive a first media access control control unit MAC CE from a network device, where the first MAC CE is used to indicate a reporting method of a first CSI report with a sub-reporting configuration. 根据权利要求63所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 63, wherein: 所述第一MAC CE包括所述第一CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置,在其中任一子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活的情况下,所述第一MAC CE指示所述终端设备上报所述第一CSI报告。The first MAC CE includes indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report. When the indication or position of any sub-reporting configuration is set to activated, the first MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the first CSI report. 根据权利要求64所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 64, wherein: 在所述第一MAC CE指示所述终端设备上报所述第一CSI报告的情况下,所述第一CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置中,被设置为激活的子上报配置的指示或位置的数量大于1。In a case where the first MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the first CSI report, among the indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report, the number of indications or positions of sub-reporting configurations set to be activated is greater than 1. 根据权利要求64或65所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 64 or 65, wherein 对于所述第一CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置中的每一子上报配置,在所述子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活的情况下,所述第一MAC CE还用于指示所述终端设备上报所述第一CSI报告中与所述子上报配置对应的子上报的报告。For each sub-reporting configuration of the multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report, when the indication or position of the sub-reporting configuration is set to activated, the first MAC CE is also used to instruct the terminal device to report the sub-reporting report corresponding to the sub-reporting configuration in the first CSI report. 根据权利要求63至66中任一项所述的方法,其中,A method according to any one of claims 63 to 66, wherein 所述第一MAC CE还用于指示没有子上报配置的第二CSI报告的上报方式。The first MAC CE is also used to indicate the reporting method of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration. 根据权利要求67所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 67, wherein 所述第一MAC CE包括所述第二CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置,在其中任一子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活的情况下,所述第一MAC CE指示所述终端设备上报所述第二CSI报告。The first MAC CE includes indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the second CSI report. When the indications or positions of any one of the sub-reporting configurations are set to be activated, the first MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the second CSI report. 根据权利要求68所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 68, wherein 在所述第一MAC CE指示所述终端设备上报所述第二CSI报告的情况下,所述第二CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置中,被设置为激活的子上报配置的指示或位置的数量为1。In the case where the first MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the second CSI report, among the indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the second CSI report, the number of indications or positions of sub-reporting configurations set to be activated is 1. 根据权利要求67至69中任一项所述的方法,其中,A method according to any one of claims 67 to 69, wherein 所述第一MAC CE的长度固定。The length of the first MAC CE is fixed. 根据权利要求63至66中任一项所述的方法,其中,A method according to any one of claims 63 to 66, wherein 所述第一MAC CE不用于指示没有子上报配置的第二CSI报告的上报方式。The first MAC CE is not used to indicate the reporting method of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration. 根据权利要求71所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 71, wherein 所述第二CSI报告由第二MAC CE指示。The second CSI report is indicated by a second MAC CE. 根据权利要求71或72所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 71 or 72, wherein: 所述第一MAC CE的长度固定或可变。The length of the first MAC CE is fixed or variable. 一种通信的方法,应用于网络设备,所述方法包括:A communication method, applied to a network device, comprising: 向终端设备发送第一媒体接入控制控制单元MAC CE,所述第一MAC CE用于指示有子上报配置的第一CSI报告的上报方式。A first media access control control unit MAC CE is sent to the terminal device, where the first MAC CE is used to indicate a reporting method of a first CSI report with a sub-reporting configuration. 根据权利要求74所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 74, wherein: 所述第一MAC CE包括所述第一CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置,在其中任一子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活的情况下,所述第一MAC CE指示所述终端设备上报所述第一CSI报告。The first MAC CE includes indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report. When the indication or position of any sub-reporting configuration is set to activated, the first MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the first CSI report. 根据权利要求75所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 75, wherein: 在所述第一MAC CE指示所述终端设备上报所述第一CSI报告的情况下,所述第一CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置中,被设置为激活的子上报配置的指示或位置的数量大于1。In a case where the first MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the first CSI report, among the indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report, the number of indications or positions of sub-reporting configurations set to be activated is greater than 1. 根据权利要求74或75所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 74 or 75, wherein 对于所述第一CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置中的每一子上报配置,在所述子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活的情况下,所述第一MAC CE还用于指示所述终端设备上报所述第一CSI报告中与所述子上报配置对应的子上报的报告。For each sub-reporting configuration of the multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the first CSI report, when the indication or position of the sub-reporting configuration is set to activated, the first MAC CE is also used to instruct the terminal device to report the sub-reporting report corresponding to the sub-reporting configuration in the first CSI report. 根据权利要求74至77中任一项所述的方法,其中,A method according to any one of claims 74 to 77, wherein 所述第一MAC CE还用于指示没有子上报配置的第二CSI报告的上报方式。The first MAC CE is also used to indicate the reporting method of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration. 根据权利要求78所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 78, wherein 所述第一MAC CE包括所述第二CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置,在其中任一子上报配置的指示或位置被设置为激活的情况下,所述第一MAC CE指示所述终端设备上报所述第二CSI报告。The first MAC CE includes indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the second CSI report. When the indications or positions of any one of the sub-reporting configurations are set to be activated, the first MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the second CSI report. 根据权利要求79所述的方法,其中,The method of claim 79, wherein: 在所述第一MAC CE指示所述终端设备上报所述第二CSI报告的情况下,所述第二CSI报告对应的多个子上报配置的指示或位置中,被设置为激活的子上报配置的指示或位置的数量为1。In the case where the first MAC CE instructs the terminal device to report the second CSI report, among the indications or positions of multiple sub-reporting configurations corresponding to the second CSI report, the number of indications or positions of sub-reporting configurations set to be activated is 1. 根据权利要求78至80中任一项所述的方法,其中,The method according to any one of claims 78 to 80, wherein 所述第一MAC CE的长度固定。The length of the first MAC CE is fixed. 根据权利要求74至77中任一项所述的方法,其中,A method according to any one of claims 74 to 77, wherein 所述第一MAC CE不用于指示没有子上报配置的第二CSI报告的上报方式。The first MAC CE is not used to indicate the reporting method of the second CSI report without sub-reporting configuration. 根据权利要求82所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 82, wherein 所述第二CSI报告由第二MAC CE指示。The second CSI report is indicated by a second MAC CE. 根据权利要求82或83所述的方法,其中,The method according to claim 82 or 83, wherein 所述第一MAC CE的长度固定或可变。The length of the first MAC CE is fixed or variable. 一种通信的方法,应用于终端设备,所述方法包括:A communication method, applied to a terminal device, comprising: 接收来自网络设备的第五指示信息;其中,所述第五指示信息用于指示第一操作;或者,所述第五指示信息在满足第三条件的情况下用于指示第一操作;Receiving fifth indication information from the network device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation; or, the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation when the third condition is met; 所述第一操作包括以下至少之一:The first operation includes at least one of the following: 所述终端设备的源小区进入网络节能NES;The source cell of the terminal device enters the network energy saving NES; 所述终端设备执行条件切换CHO;The terminal device performs conditional handover CHO; 所述终端设备开始执行CHO;以及,The terminal device starts to execute CHO; and, 所述终端设备评估CHO的执行条件。The terminal device evaluates the execution condition of CHO. [根据细则91更正 16.11.2023]
根据权利要求85所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第五指示信息用于指示所述第一操作的情况下,所述方法还包括:
[Corrected 16.11.2023 in accordance with Article 91]
The method according to claim 85, characterized in that, when the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation, the method further comprises:
基于所述第五指示信息,执行CHO;或者,Based on the fifth indication information, executing CHO; or, 基于所述第五指示信息,开始执行CHO;或者,Based on the fifth indication information, start executing CHO; or, 基于所述第五指示信息,评估CHO的执行条件;或者,Based on the fifth indication information, evaluating the execution condition of CHO; or, 确定候选目标小区满足CHO切换条件;或者,Determine that the candidate target cell meets the CHO switching condition; or, 在第一CHO事件满足的情况下,确定候选目标小区满足CHO切换条件;或者,When the first CHO event is satisfied, determining that the candidate target cell satisfies the CHO switching condition; or, 在第一CHO事件满足的情况下,确定CHO执行条件满足;或者,When the first CHO event is satisfied, determining that the CHO execution condition is satisfied; or, 在第一CHO事件满足的情况下,确定CHO事件满足;或者,In the case where the first CHO event is satisfied, determining that the CHO event is satisfied; or, 在第一CHO事件满足的情况下,确定候选目标小区是触发的小区。When the first CHO event is satisfied, it is determined that the candidate target cell is a triggered cell.
根据权利要求85或86所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第五指示信息用于指示所述第一操作的情况下,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 85 or 86, characterized in that, when the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation, the method further comprises: 在第一时长内,所述终端设备不期待收到新的第五指示信息;或者,During the first time period, the terminal device does not expect to receive new fifth indication information; or, 在第一时长内,所述终端设备不期待收到不满足所述第三条件的新的第五指示信息;或者,Within the first time period, the terminal device does not expect to receive new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition; or, 在第一时长内,在所述终端设备收到新的第五指示信息的情况下,忽略所述新的第五指示信息;或者,Within the first time period, when the terminal device receives new fifth indication information, ignore the new fifth indication information; or, 在第一时长内,在所述终端设备收到不满足所述第三条件的新的第五指示信息的情况下,忽略所述新的第五指示信息。Within the first time period, when the terminal device receives new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition, it ignores the new fifth indication information. 根据权利要求87所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 87, characterized in that 所述第一时长的起始时刻为所述终端设备收到所述第五指示信息的时刻;或者,The starting time of the first duration is the time when the terminal device receives the fifth indication information; or, 所述第一时长的起始时刻为所述终端设备收到满足所述第三条件的第五指示信息的时刻;或者,The starting time of the first duration is the time when the terminal device receives the fifth indication information that meets the third condition; or, 所述第一时长的起始时刻为所述终端设备收到所述第五指示信息的时刻与第一偏移相加的结果;或者,The starting time of the first duration is the result of adding the time when the terminal device receives the fifth indication information to the first offset; or, 所述第一时长的起始时刻为所述终端设备收到满足所述第三条件的第五指示信息的时刻与第一偏移相加的结果。The starting time of the first duration is the result of adding the time when the terminal device receives the fifth indication information that meets the third condition to the first offset. 根据权利要求87或88所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 87 or 88, characterized in that 所述第一时长是预定义的、预配置的、所述网络设备配置的、基于无线资源控制配置的或者包含在所述第五指示信息中;The first duration is predefined, preconfigured, configured by the network device, configured based on radio resource control, or included in the fifth indication information; 所述第一偏移是预定义的、预配置的、所述网络设备配置的、基于无线资源控制配置的或者包含在所述第五指示信息中。The first offset is predefined, preconfigured, configured by the network device, configured based on radio resource control, or included in the fifth indication information. 根据权利要求85至89中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 85 to 89, characterized in that the method further comprises: 在所述终端设备收到新的第五指示信息的情况下,或者,在所述终端设备收到不满足所述第三条件的新的第五指示信息的情况下,执行第二操作,所述第二操作包括以下至少之一:When the terminal device receives new fifth indication information, or when the terminal device receives new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition, a second operation is performed, where the second operation includes at least one of the following: 停止执行CHO;Stop executing CHO; 停止CHO评估;Stop CHO assessment; 删除CHO配置;Delete CHO configuration; 向所述网络设备指示CHO停止;Instructing the network device to stop CHO; 向所述网络设备指示切换停止;Instructing the network device to stop switching; 确定候选目标小区不满足CHO切换条件;Determining that the candidate target cell does not meet the CHO switching condition; 确定CHO执行条件不满足;Determining that the CHO execution conditions are not met; 确定CHO事件不满足;Determine that the CHO event is not satisfied; 确定候选目标小区不是触发的小区;以及,determining that the candidate target cell is not a triggered cell; and, 确定所述源小区离开NES。It is determined that the source cell leaves the NES. 根据权利要求85至89中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一时长之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 85 to 89, characterized in that after the first duration, the method further comprises: 在所述终端设备收到新的第五指示信息的情况下,或者,在所述终端设备收到不满足所述第三条件的新的第五指示信息的情况下,执行第二操作,所述第二操作包括以下至少之一:When the terminal device receives new fifth indication information, or when the terminal device receives new fifth indication information that does not meet the third condition, a second operation is performed, where the second operation includes at least one of the following: 停止执行CHO;Stop executing CHO; 停止CHO评估;Stop CHO assessment; 删除CHO配置;Delete CHO configuration; 向所述网络设备指示CHO停止;Instructing the network device to stop CHO; 向所述网络设备指示切换停止;Instructing the network device to stop switching; 确定候选目标小区不满足CHO切换条件;Determining that the candidate target cell does not meet the CHO switching condition; 确定CHO执行条件不满足;Determining that the CHO execution conditions are not met; 确定CHO事件不满足;Determine that the CHO event is not satisfied; 确定候选目标小区不是触发的小区;以及,determining that the candidate target cell is not a triggered cell; and, 确定所述源小区离开NES。It is determined that the source cell leaves the NES. 根据权利要求87至91中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 87 to 91, characterized in that 所述新的第五指示信用于指示第三操作,或者,所述新的第五指示信息在不满足所述第三条件的情况下用于指示第三操作;The new fifth indication information is used to indicate the third operation, or the new fifth indication information is used to indicate the third operation when the third condition is not met; 所述第三操作包括以下至少之一:The third operation includes at least one of the following: 所述终端设备的源小区离开NES;The source cell of the terminal device leaves the NES; 停止执行CHO;Stop executing CHO; 确定候选目标小区不满足CHO切换条件;Determining that the candidate target cell does not meet the CHO switching condition; 确定CHO执行条件不满足;Determining that the CHO execution conditions are not met; 确定CHO事件不满足;Determine that the CHO event is not satisfied; 确定CHO执行条件不可用;Determine that the CHO execution condition is not available; 确定候选目标小区不是触发的小区;以及,determining that the candidate target cell is not a triggered cell; and, 停止CHO评估。CHO evaluation was stopped. 根据权利要求85至92中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 85 to 92, characterized in that 所述第三条件包括:所述第五指示信息中的第一比特位被设置为特定值。The third condition includes: the first bit in the fifth indication information is set to a specific value. 一种通信的方法,应用于网络设备,所述方法包括:A communication method, applied to a network device, comprising: 向终端设备发送第五指示信息;其中,所述第五指示信息用于指示第一操作;或者,所述第五指示信息在满足第三条件的情况下用于指示第一操作;Sending fifth indication information to the terminal device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation; or, the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation when the third condition is met; 所述第一操作包括以下至少之一:The first operation includes at least one of the following: 所述终端设备的源小区进入网络节能NES;The source cell of the terminal device enters the network energy saving NES; 所述终端设备执行条件切换CHO;The terminal device performs conditional handover CHO; 所述终端设备开始执行CHO;以及,The terminal device starts to execute CHO; and 所述终端设备评估CHO的执行条件。The terminal device evaluates the execution condition of CHO. 根据权利要求94所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 94, characterized in that the method further comprises: 向所述终端设备发送新的第五指示信息,所述新的第五指示信息用于指示第三操作,或者,所述新的第五指示信息在不满足所述第三条件的情况下用于指示第三操作;Sending new fifth indication information to the terminal device, where the new fifth indication information is used to indicate a third operation, or, when the third condition is not met, the new fifth indication information is used to indicate the third operation; 所述第三操作包括以下至少之一:The third operation includes at least one of the following: 所述终端设备的源小区离开NES;The source cell of the terminal device leaves the NES; 停止执行CHO;Stop executing CHO; 确定候选目标小区不满足CHO切换条件;Determining that the candidate target cell does not meet the CHO switching condition; 确定CHO执行条件不满足;Determining that the CHO execution conditions are not met; 确定CHO事件不满足;Determine that the CHO event is not satisfied; 确定CHO执行条件不可用;Determine that the CHO execution condition is not available; 确定候选目标小区不是触发的小区;以及,determining that the candidate target cell is not a triggered cell; and, 停止CHO评估。CHO evaluation was stopped. 根据权利要求94或95所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 94 or 95, characterized in that 所述第三条件包括:所述第五指示信息中的第一比特位被设置为特定值。The third condition includes: the first bit in the fifth indication information is set to a specific value. 一种通信的装置,所述装置包括:A communication device, the device comprising: 第一获取单元,被配置为获取所述装置与第一小区之间的第一定时提前TA,所述第一TA用于所述装置与所述第一小区执行上行同步;A first acquisition unit is configured to acquire a first timing advance TA between the device and a first cell, where the first TA is used for the device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell; 其中,所述第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。The first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission. 一种通信的装置,所述装置包括:A communication device, the device comprising: 第一发送单元,被配置为向终端设备发送第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息包括所述终端设备与第一小区之间的第一定时提前TA,和/或,所述终端设备与第二小区之间的第二TA,所述第二小区是用于所述终端设备与所述第一小区执行上行同步的小区;所述第二TA用于确定所述第一TA,所述第一TA用于所述终端设备与所述第一小区执行上行同步;A first sending unit is configured to send fourth indication information to a terminal device, where the fourth indication information includes a first timing advance TA between the terminal device and a first cell, and/or a second TA between the terminal device and a second cell, where the second cell is a cell used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell; the second TA is used to determine the first TA, and the first TA is used for the terminal device to perform uplink synchronization with the first cell; 其中,所述第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。The first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission. 一种通信的装置,所述装置包括:A communication device, the device comprising: 第一接收单元,被配置为接收第二小区的参考信号或第一小区的下行数据信号,所述参考信号或所述下行数据信号用于所述装置与所述第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时;A first receiving unit is configured to receive a reference signal of a second cell or a downlink data signal of a first cell, wherein the reference signal or the downlink data signal is used for the apparatus to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell; 其中,所述第二小区是用于所述装置与所述第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时的小区,所述第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。The second cell is a cell used for the device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell, and the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission. 一种通信的装置,所述装置包括:A communication device, the device comprising: 第二发送单元,被配置为向终端设备发送第二小区的参考信号或第一小区的下行数据信号,所述参考信号或所述下行数据信号用于所述终端设备与所述第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时;A second sending unit is configured to send a reference signal of a second cell or a downlink data signal of a first cell to a terminal device, wherein the reference signal or the downlink data signal is used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell; 其中,所述第二小区是用于所述终端设备与所述第一小区执行下行同步或下行定时的小区,所述第一小区为无同步信号块传输的辅小区。The second cell is a cell used for the terminal device to perform downlink synchronization or downlink timing with the first cell, and the first cell is a secondary cell without synchronization signal block transmission. 一种通信的装置,所述装置包括:A communication device, the device comprising: 第二接收单元,被配置为接收来自网络设备的第一媒体接入控制控制单元MAC CE,所述第一MAC CE用于指示有子配置的第一SCI报告的上报方式。The second receiving unit is configured to receive a first media access control control unit MAC CE from a network device, wherein the first MAC CE is used to indicate a reporting method of a first SCI report with a sub-configuration. 一种通信的装置,所述装置包括:A communication device, the device comprising: 第三发送单元,被配置为向终端设备发送第一媒体接入控制控制单元MAC CE,所述第一MAC CE用于指示有子配置的第一SCI报告的上报方式。The third sending unit is configured to send a first media access control control unit MAC CE to the terminal device, and the first MAC CE is used to indicate a reporting method of a first SCI report with a sub-configuration. 一种通信的装置,所述装置包括:A communication device, the device comprising: 第三接收单元,被配置为接收来自网络设备的第五指示信息;其中,所述第五指示信息用于指示第一操作;或者,所述第五指示信息在满足第一条件的情况下用于指示第一操作;a third receiving unit, configured to receive fifth indication information from the network device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation; or, the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation when the first condition is met; 所述第一操作包括以下至少之一:The first operation includes at least one of the following: 所述装置的源小区进入网络节能NES;The source cell of the device enters the network energy saving NES; 所述装置执行条件切换CHO;The device performs conditional switching CHO; 所述装置开始执行CHO;以及,The device begins to perform CHO; and, 所述装置评估CHO的执行条件。The device evaluates the execution condition of CHO. 一种通信的装置,所述装置包括:A communication device, the device comprising: 第四发送单元,被配置为向终端设备发送第五指示信息;其中,所述第五指示信息用于指示第一操作;或者,所述第五指示信息在满足第一条件的情况下用于指示第一操作;a fourth sending unit, configured to send fifth indication information to the terminal device; wherein the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation; or, the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first operation when the first condition is met; 所述第一操作包括以下至少之一:The first operation includes at least one of the following: 所述终端设备的源小区进入网络节能NES;The source cell of the terminal device enters the network energy saving NES; 所述终端设备执行或开始执行条件切换CHO;以及,The terminal device executes or starts to execute conditional handover CHO; and 所述终端设备评估CHO的执行条件。The terminal device evaluates the execution condition of CHO. 一种通信设备,所述通信设备包括:A communication device, comprising: 存储器,用于存储计算机可执行指令;A memory for storing computer executable instructions; 处理器,与所述存储器连接,用于通过执行所述计算机可执行指令,实现权利要求1至22中任一项所述的方法,或者,实现权利要求23至38中任一项所述的方法,或者,实现权利要求39至50中任一项所述的方法,或者,实现权利要求51至62中任一项所述的方法,或者,实现权利要求63至73中任一项所述的方法,或者,实现权利要求74至84中任一项所述的方法,或者,实现权利要求85至93中任一项所述的方法,或者,实现权利要求94至96中任一项所述的方法。A processor, connected to the memory, for implementing the method of any one of claims 1 to 22, or the method of any one of claims 23 to 38, or the method of any one of claims 39 to 50, or the method of any one of claims 51 to 62, or the method of any one of claims 63 to 73, or the method of any one of claims 74 to 84, or the method of any one of claims 85 to 93, or the method of any one of claims 94 to 96 by executing the computer-executable instructions. 一种芯片,所述芯片包括:A chip, comprising: 处理器,用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序,使得安装有所述芯片的设备执行如权利要求1至22中任一项所述的方法,或者,执行如权利要求23至38中任一项所述的方法,或者,执行如权利要求39至50中任一项所述的方法,或者,执行如权利要求51至62中任一项所述的方法,或者,执行如权利要求63至73中任一项所述的方法,或者,执行如权利要求74至84中任一项所述的方法,或者,执行如权利要求85至93中任一项所述的方法,或者,执行如权利要求94至96中任一项所述的方法,。A processor, used to call and run a computer program from a memory so that a device equipped with the chip executes a method as described in any one of claims 1 to 22, or executes a method as described in any one of claims 23 to 38, or executes a method as described in any one of claims 39 to 50, or executes a method as described in any one of claims 51 to 62, or executes a method as described in any one of claims 63 to 73, or executes a method as described in any one of claims 74 to 84, or executes a method as described in any one of claims 85 to 93, or executes a method as described in any one of claims 94 to 96. 一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被至少一个处理器执行时实现权利要求1至22中任一项所述的方法,或者,实现权利要求23至38中任一项所述的方法,或者,实现权利要求39至50中任一项所述的方法,或者,实现权利要求51至62中任一项所述的方法,或者,实现权利要求63至73中任一项所述的方法,或者,实现权利要求74至84中任一项所述的方法,或者,实现权利要求85至93中任一项所述的方法,或者,实现权利要求94至96中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium storing a computer program, wherein the computer program, when executed by at least one processor, implements the method of any one of claims 1 to 22, or implements the method of any one of claims 23 to 38, or implements the method of any one of claims 39 to 50, or implements the method of any one of claims 51 to 62, or implements the method of any one of claims 63 to 73, or implements the method of any one of claims 74 to 84, or implements the method of any one of claims 85 to 93, or implements the method of any one of claims 94 to 96.
PCT/CN2023/129468 2023-11-02 2023-11-02 Communication methods, apparatus, device, chip and storage medium Pending WO2025091435A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2023/129468 WO2025091435A1 (en) 2023-11-02 2023-11-02 Communication methods, apparatus, device, chip and storage medium

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2023/129468 WO2025091435A1 (en) 2023-11-02 2023-11-02 Communication methods, apparatus, device, chip and storage medium

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025091435A1 true WO2025091435A1 (en) 2025-05-08

Family

ID=95582994

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/129468 Pending WO2025091435A1 (en) 2023-11-02 2023-11-02 Communication methods, apparatus, device, chip and storage medium

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025091435A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20180006867A1 (en) * 2015-02-03 2018-01-04 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for performing synchronization for carrier without synchronization signal in wireless communication system
CN116235568A (en) * 2020-08-06 2023-06-06 华为技术有限公司 Systems and methods for uplink timing in multipoint communications
WO2023106982A1 (en) * 2021-12-09 2023-06-15 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Configuring cell groups in which reference signals are not transmitted by all cells
CN116868638A (en) * 2023-05-06 2023-10-10 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Information processing methods, devices, communication equipment and storage media

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20180006867A1 (en) * 2015-02-03 2018-01-04 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for performing synchronization for carrier without synchronization signal in wireless communication system
CN116235568A (en) * 2020-08-06 2023-06-06 华为技术有限公司 Systems and methods for uplink timing in multipoint communications
WO2023106982A1 (en) * 2021-12-09 2023-06-15 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Configuring cell groups in which reference signals are not transmitted by all cells
CN116868638A (en) * 2023-05-06 2023-10-10 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Information processing methods, devices, communication equipment and storage media

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
XIAORAN ZHANG, CMCC: "Discussion on SSB-less SCell operation for network energy saving", 3GPP DRAFT; R4-2315175; TYPE DISCUSSION; NETW_ENERGY_NR-CORE, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG4, no. Xiamen, CN; 20231009 - 20231013, 27 September 2023 (2023-09-27), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP052523634 *
ZTE CORPORATION: "Discussion on RRM aspects of Network energy saving for NR", 3GPP DRAFT; R4-2308730, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. 3GPP RAN 4, no. Inchon, Korea; 20230522 - 20230526, 21 May 2023 (2023-05-21), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP052484942 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11729830B2 (en) Method for transmitting information based on channel access manners, and user equipment
CN112369116B (en) Base station network sharing configuration
US12323368B2 (en) Method and device for managing band width part
CN110291751B (en) Method and apparatus for associating carriers in a wireless communication network
US20250142637A1 (en) Systems and methods of enhanced random access procedure
JP7301949B2 (en) Random access method, terminal device, network device and storage medium
CN110859011A (en) Communication method and related equipment
WO2018171759A1 (en) Information transmission method and apparatus
CN115552849B (en) Synchronization based on low-level mobility management
WO2023130471A1 (en) Cell access method and apparatus, and device and readable storage medium
WO2020248143A1 (en) Power control method, terminal device and network device
CN107710822A (en) Method, terminal and the base station that carrier wave redirects
CN112385285A (en) Random access method and device
WO2020056777A1 (en) Wireless communication method, transmitting node and receiving node
US20250212121A1 (en) Network energy saving methods, cell wakeup methods, terminal device, and network device
WO2020030008A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting signal
WO2025091435A1 (en) Communication methods, apparatus, device, chip and storage medium
CN118828984A (en) A wireless communication method and device, terminal equipment, and network equipment
US20250318011A1 (en) Energy-saving method and apparatus, terminal, and network device
EP4598259A1 (en) Small data transmission method, terminal, device and storage medium
EP4271109B1 (en) Channel transmission method, electronic device, and storage medium
US20240250800A1 (en) Method and apparatus for activating trs, terminal device, and network device
EP4564960A1 (en) Small data transmission method, terminal, network device, apparatus, and storage medium
EP4598143A1 (en) Resource location determination method, and device, apparatus and storage medium
US20240098594A1 (en) Method for cell handover, and terminal device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23957303

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1